Home

Sirius 800 User Manual Issue 5 Revision 2 - AV-iQ

1. Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Crosspoint Modules 10 5 1 5903 Audio Crosspoint Module LED Information Table 33 shows the LED color code for the LEDs at the front of the 5903 Audio Crosspoint module and Fig 100 shows the front edge of the module Note lf the Route Active LED is not illuminated it is safe to remove the crosspoint module without affecting any active routes see section 10 5 5 for details SD SDHC Card Used for upgrading 5 Crosspoint module firmware see the S Bm ii ce Sirius 800 Maintenance amp Upgrade DD es Ss 2 E d SLC o manual for details Ogg tL o ae dd 5 E E o o 2 LEDs 2E E 55 x o O Oo o o a oo rtm Fig 100 5903 Sirius 800 Audio Crosspoint Module LEDs LED Detail Status Function Color Power OK Power to the module On Solid working correctly Config R Flashing rapidly between Red amp Green located 2 Hz each LED starting up behind the Green On Solid amp Red Off normal state Power OK working correctly LED Green Off amp Red On Solid FPGA FPGA status programming fault found Remove module and Config G refit to force a reboot located behind the Other indications are displayed when Power OK performing a firmware upgrade see the Sirius LED 800 Maintenance amp Upgrade manual for details Command Command from the Flashing receiving information and working OK Control module correctly Error with command Off
2. Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Modules No Longer Supplied With New Systems B 3 4 1 5937 Output Module LED Information Table 92 shows the LED color code on the 5937 output module and Fig 188 shows the output module LED Color Label Deiail Normal Working Status Power OK Power to the module On Solid working correctly Command Receiving messages Flashing receiving information and OK from local Nucleus working correctly control module the Nucleus controller in this frame Command Error with messages from Off normal state Error local Nucleus control Flashing the command message from module the Nucleus the router controller is corrupt or hasn t controller in this frame been received This communications error could be caused by a hardware failure or incorrect insertion Check that the module is inserted correctly If the Command Error LED is flashing atthe same time as the Command OK LED is flashing it suggests a mismatch in the configuration of the Nucleus controller Check the controller configuration Expansion Message from the Off Expansion not used Message corresponding expansion OK module received correctly Expansion Error Message sent from Off Expansion not used Message theoutput of one frame to Error the output of the expanded frame Table 94 5937 Sirius 830 Standard Video BNC Fiber Output Module LED Information Power OK Command OK Command Err
3. Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Door PC 5 4 2 Audio Crosspoint Matrix Status Screens The Main Audio Crosspoint Matrix Status screen displays the status of the main and redundant audio crosspoint modules The screen is also used to switch between audio crosspoint modules if an audio crosspoint module needs to be replaced Note e For information on replacing a failed crosspoint card see section 10 5 5 Audio Crosspoint Matrix Status F Redundancy Enabled AucoxontcaaNone E rena F Redundancy Available AudioXpntCardRight Imm F Fail Found green ok AudioXpntCardLeft EET O O More Fault Present green 0k i TA Click to bypass a crosspoint Clock Master Audio Stream Right List P Ae REI o ee Failed Action MoveFailedStream Input Sync Faults Input Syncs In Use Input Stream Ok First Failure Detected Input Stream Faults Left Right Output Stream Ok Failed Incoming Stream 0 Output Stream Fault Failed Outgoing Stream 0 Output Stream In Use Faut Fed Freefaled o crosspoint clicking this will Click when fault is Green when a move the remaining routes rm no longer present to crosspoint is to the redundant crosspoint Menu snell restore to normal bypassed freeing the failed crosspoint operation Fig 36 Sirius 800 Audio Crosspoint Matrix Status and Crosspoint Switching Screen Item Description Indicators Redundancy Enabled Green Redundant crosspoint checking enabled Red Redundant crosspoint chec
4. Output Slot 11 C Output Slot 10 y Video 24 Audio 768 Output Slot 12 Output Slot 9 Output Slot 8 Output Slot 7 Output Slot 6 Output Slot 5 Output Slot 4 Output Slot 3 Output Slot 2 Output Slot 1 Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 93 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Module Locations 8 2 4 1 Input Output and Expansion Connections by Slot Input Output Rear Input Output Channels Panel Slot Number Video Channels Embedded Audio Channels Rear Panel Slot 1 1 to 24 1 to 768 Rear Panel Slot 2 25 to 48 769 to 1536 Rear Panel Slot 3 49 to 72 1537 to 2304 Rear Panel Slot 4 73 to 96 2305 to 3072 Rear Panel Slot 5 97 to 120 3073 to 3840 Rear Panel Slot 6 121 to 144 3841 to 4608 Rear Panel Slot 7 145 to 168 4609 to 5376 Rear Panel Slot 8 169 to 192 5377 to 6144 Rear Panel Slot 9 193 to 216 6145 to 6912 Rear Panel Slot 10 217 to 240 6913 to 7680 Rear Panel Slot 11 241 to 264 7681 to 8448 Rear Panel Slot 12 265 to 288 8449 to 9216 Table 15 Connector Video and Embedded Audio Channels by Rear Panel Slot Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 94 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Module Locations 8 3 Sirius 840 850 8 3 1 Sirius 840 Module Locations The Sirius 840 architecture allows different formats to be configured up to 576 x 576 video channels and up to 18432 x 18432 audio channels depending on configuration in a single 27U frame
5. The example in Fig 112 shows 1080i50 set to Ref 1 so a 1080150 signal will use frame sync settings in the 1080i FS tab 1080159 set to Lock to Input so a 1080 59 signal will use delay settings in the 1080i Delay tab 1080160 set to Lock to Input so a 1080160 signal will use delay settings in the 1080i Delay tab Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 180 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Output Modules and Output Rear Panels Function Function Description XXXX FS tab where XXXX is the video standard eg 1080i FS Video standard configuration tabs for Frame Line Sync Select the number of frames of offset from the reference Only Frame Offset available if Sync Function is selected as Frame If Line is selected then the frame slider is not visible Select the number of lines of offset from the reference Only available Line Offset if Sync Function is selected as Frame If Line is selected then the frame slider is not visible Pixel Offset Select the number of pixels of offset from the reference Delay ms Select the offset in milliseconds from the reference When setting any one of the above values the other settings will automatically changes to reflect the setting being made Lock to Input Select Lock to Input to enable video delay for the Reference video standard Reference 1 to 4 Select which video reference the signal will be synchronized to Freeze Frame in the e
6. Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Specifications C 4 Physical Sirius 830 Frame Weight Between 73 kg 161 lbs and 85 kg 187 Ibs typical full frame without packaging and depending on modules fitted Height 15RU chassis 668 mm 26 3 inches Power requirements Auto ranging 100 Vac to 240 Vac 50 60 Hz via external power supply shelf shelves see Table 115 See Appendix B 1 1 on page 283 for details on the number of power supply shelves and power supply units required Max Rated Power 2500 W for video only routing on a fully equipped system 6500 W for video and audio routing on a fully equipped system Power Consumption for Typical Usage Examples Fully Equipped Standard Video modules all Coax 1750 W No monitoring or redundancy options Fully Equipped Standard Video modules all Fiber 2000 W No monitoring or redundancy options Fully Equipped 50 standard Video 50 Video AHP 2970 W all Coax No monitoring or redundancy options Additional Redundant Video crosspoints 50 W Additional Redundant Audio crosspoints 55 W Additional 96 MV outputs 320 W Table 111 Sirius 830 Frame Details Sirius 840 Frame Weight Between 150 kg 830 Ibs and 175 kg 386 Ibs typical full frame without packaging and depending on modules fitted Height 27RU chassis 1198mm 47 17 inches Power requirements Auto ranging 100 Vac to 240 Vac 50 60Hz via external power supply shelf shelves see Table 115 See Appendix B 1 2
7. Input Output Range Addresses Video Inputs 1 to 576 Source 0 to 575 Main Video Outputs 1 to 576 Destination 0 to 575 Destination 1152 to 1291 the default configuration controls these as 577 to 716 as this then Multiviewer Outputs 1 to 140 redicastha matrix etis amd provides a continuous range of outputs Monitoring Outputs 1 to 4 Destination 16370 to 16373 Video Destinations 577 to 1152 are not used and do not respond to any control Table 68 Sirius 840 Input and Output Port Mapping Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 250 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Nucleus Router Control Modules 14 4 2 3 Sirius 850 Input Output Port Mapping Sirius 850 Single Frame Frame 1 of 1 Frame ID Switch set to 0 see section 16 3 1 Table 69 shows the Sirius 850 crosspoint address mapping for Frame 1 of 1 Input Output Range Addresses Video Inputs 1 to 576 Source 0 to 575 Main Video Outputs 1 to 576 Destination 0 to 575 Expansion Video Outputs using 5928 expansion modules amp 577 to 1152 576 to 1151 1293 expansion output rear panels Multiviewer Outputs Destination 1152 to 1199 using two 1291 multiviewer 1 to 96 amp rear panels Destination 1224 to 1271 Monitoring Outputs 1to4 Destination 16370 to 16373 Table 69 Sirius 850 Input Output Port Mapping Frame 1 Of 1 Note Multiviewer Outputs 1152 to 1291 only if two 1292 multiviewer MV Link rear panels are fitte
8. llle 211 13 2 Sirius 830 Monitoring and Multiviewer ee eee eee 212 13 2 1 Sirius 830 Multiviewer Outputs Only no monitoring 212 13 2 2 Sirius 830 Input output Monitoring Only no multiviewer outputs 212 13 3 Sirius 840 Monitoring and Multiviewer lille 213 13 3 1 Sirius 840 Multiviewer Outputs Only no monitoring 213 13 3 2 Sirius 840 Multiviewer Outputs and Input Output Monitoring 214 13 3 3 Sirius 840 Output Monitoring Only no multiviewer outputs 215 13 3 4 Sirius 840 Input Output Monitoring Only no multiviewer outputs 215 13 4 Sirius 850 Monitoring and Multiviewer llle 216 13 4 1 Sirius 850 Multiviewer Outputs Only no monitoring 216 13 4 2 Sirius 850 Multiviewer Outputs and Input Output Monitoring 217 13 4 3 Sirius 850 Output Monitoring Only no multiviewer outputs 218 13 4 4 Sirius 850 Input Output Monitoring Only no multiviewer outputs 218 13 5 5902 Sirius 800 Series Multiviewer Crosspoint Module 219 13 5 1 Sirius 840 850 only LL 219 13 5 2 5902 Sirius 800 Multiviewer Crosspoint Module LED Information 220 13 6 5931 Sirius 800 Multiviewer Output Module eae 221 13 6 1 5931 Sirius 800 Multiviewer Output Module LED Information 222 13 7 5939 Sirius 830 Video amp Audio Input amp Output Monitoring Module 223 13 7 1 5939
9. Fig 60 Sirius 850 Rear Module Locations e See section 8 1 for details on which rear panels that can be used with which front module e See section 8 3 7 for BNC and Fiber rear panel channel numbers and layout e See section 8 3 8 for expansion rear panel channel numbers and layout Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 98 2014 Snell Limited Module Locations www snellgroup com Sirius 800 Input Module Locations 8 3 5 Sirius 840 850 Before adding modules to a Sirius 840 850 router check that the power supplies fitted can supply sufficient power to the router The router power requirements are described in Appendix B 1 2 Sirius 840 and Appendix B 1 3 Sirius 850 Important Fig 61 shows the Input Module locations as they are situated in the Sirius 840 850 frame CEY8L 01 9994 oipny 94G 0 EGG O9plA V99 01 2689 oipny zGG 0 62G O9pIA 96891 01 62191 OIPNY 8zG 01 GOS OSPIN 87191 01 LIEG L OIPNY POS 01 184 O PIA 09ESI 01 6Sr OIPNY 084 01 LSY O9pIA c6Gr 01 G28E OIPNY 9Gy 01 COPIA YZ8E L 01 LOGE OIPNY ZEY O 60p COPIA 90S I 01 68ZZ L Olpny 80r 0 98E O9plA 8827 01 LZSLL Olpny 78 0 9E OSPIN OZS LL 01 ESLOL OIPNY 09 0 LEE O9pIA 2G 0L 01 7866 OIPNY GEE O ELE O PIA 7866 01 126 Olpny ZLE 01 68 O PIA 9LZ6 01 61178 OIPNY 88 0 G9Z O PIA 8t
10. Impedance 75 nominal Cable Equalisation 200 m 650 Feet Belden 1855 or equivalent MADI Inputs on Fiber Rear Panel 1286 or 1304 Rear Panels Number and Type 12 with main and backup inputs per signal auto fail over on signal loss or manual changeover Removable SFP modules Fiber Connector LC PC single mode Wavelength Wideband receiver 1260 1620 nm nominal Sensitivity 18 dBm Typical Fiber Length 20 km 12 5 Miles single mode Note Fiber MADI specifications are based on fitting standard SFP receivers Snell Order Code SRR 3 Audio Processing free License with each module Gain Mute Per mono or stereo signal Silence Mute or 72 to 30 dB in 0 1 dB steps Phase Invert Available per mono or stereo signal NORMAL INVERT control on off Stereo Mode Options are Left Right swap Left Both Right Both Mono Mix or Normal Table 101 4915 AES MADI Input Module Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 323 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com C 2 Outputs C 2 1 Video Outputs Type 5926 5938 5949 5923 and 5925 Video Output Modules used with 1294 or 1295 Main Router Coax Video Output Rear Panels 24 per module re clocked Connectors BNC to IEC61169 8 75Q electrical impedance Gold plated Standards supported SMPTE 259M 525 and 625 SD SDI EN50083 9 DVB ASI SMPTE 292M 720p and 1080i HD SDI SMP
11. 6 AES Unbalanced Input e AES Unbalanced Input 9 9 AES Unbalanced Input 9 9 AES Unbalanced Input 9 9 AES Unbalanced Input amp 9 AES Unbalanced Input Fig 82 Unbalanced AES Rear Panel 62 Way High Density Socket AES Unbalanced Input 2 26 50 74 or 98 AES Unbalanced Input 4 28 52 76 or 100 6 30 54 78 or 102 8 32 56 80 or 104 10 34 58 82 or 106 12 36 60 84 or 108 14 38 62 86 or 110 16 40 64 88 or 112 18 42 66 90 or 114 AES Unbalanced Input 20 44 68 92 or 116 AES Unbalanced Input 22 46 70 94 or 118 AES Unbalanced Input 24 48 72 96 or 120 Issue 5 Rev2 Page 122 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Input Rear Panels and Input Modules Socket1 AES Socket2 AES Socket3 AES Socket 4 AES Socket 5 AES ARIE Unbalanced Unbalanced Unbalanced Unbalanced Unbalanced Input Input Input Input Input 24 1 25 49 73 97 25 GND GND GND GND GND 22 2 26 50 744 98 23 GND GND GND GND GND 1 34 274 51 75 99 43 GND GND GND GND GND 2 4 28 52 76 100 44 GND GND GND GND GND 3 5 29 53 77 101 45 GND GND GND GND GND 4 6 30 54 78 102 46 GND GND GND GND GND 5 7 31 55 79 103 47 GND GND GND GND GND 6 8 32 56 80 104 48 GND GND G
12. A 2 Sirius 840 Frame Dimensions Make sure that sufficient space is available for the Sirius 840 For ventilation purposes there must be an additional 50 mm 2 inch gap on the left and right sides The full height of the Sirius 840 is 1198 mm 47 2 inches Allow an additional 200 mm 8 inches behind the unit for power control and signal cables Dimensions are of full size system without the power supplies Dimensions are in millimeters inches 17 60 447 0 mm 24 81 630 1 mm 18 98 482 0 mm 20 77 527 5 mm os 4 n 5 dads ax e 0 eee C J Li ki jn A9 b R 5 08 129 0 mm a 47 17 1198 0 mm a 47 16 1197 9 mm Adm s 28 79 731 2 mm m a ea w geet ie e ie el N ee _ amp 22 56 573 1 mm Fig 171 Sirius 840 Frame Dimensions Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 278 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Router and Power Supply Shelf Dimensions Issue 5 Rev 2 A 3 Sirius 850 Frame Dimensions Make sure that sufficient space is available for the Sirius 850 For ventilation purposes there must be an additional 50 mm 2 inch gap on the left and right sides The full height of the Sirius 850 is 1511 mm 59 49 inches Allow an additional 200 mm 8 inches behind the unit for power control and signal cables power supplie
13. Gain control Gain is applied to an audio output channel as Silence mute or in steps of 0 1dB in a range of 72 dB to 30 dB For example this might be used when the feed is destined for another country that requires a specific audio level that is different from the current audio level Phase Invert Phase invert will invert the audio waveform For example this might be used if one channel of a stereo pair is out of phase with the other 5925 Connections to the Audio Crosspoints The 5925 video output module receives two identical multiplexed audio transport streams each of which contains all of the audio channels on the output module up to 768 mono channels One transport stream is received from the main audio crosspoint module and a duplicate transport stream is received from the redundant audio crosspoint module The output module monitors the transport streams received from each of the audio crosspoint modules for errors If an error is found the output module will use the transport stream from the other audio crosspoint module if it is fitted e Due to the nature of multiplexed audio transport streams there is an extremely small delay between groups of channels as the transport stream is constructed If the audio is locked to the input these delays will need to be considered e Ifthe audio is locked to an external reference these delays are managed by the router and the audio will remain co timed Sirius 800 B 3 3 4 B
14. Note 7 2 1 7 2 2 Range of Dial up Multibus 4 bus panels Fig 49 2RU Dial up Multibus 4 bus Panel These panels can be controlled serially through RS485 When controlled through RS485 the 1U panels can mimic 6700 series Nucleus control panels and the 2U panels can mimic the 6276 and 6277 series Nucleus control panels See the 1U Panels User Manual and 2U Panels User Manual respectively for details For more flexibility they can be controlled over ethernet see the Workbench User Manual The Sirius 800 routers are supplied with a default database Serial port 3 COM 5 is configured in the default database to use the control panels for BPX and XY control Older Control Panels The control panels below are no longer manufactured or supplied and are shown here for users that already have them fitted The Nucleus controller supports the following external control panels 6700 series 1RU BPX and XY Panels Fig 50 6700 series 1RU BPX and XY panels 6276 2RU Dial up XY panel Fig 51 6276 2RU Dial up XY Panel Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 84 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com External Control 7 2 3 6277 2RU Range of Dial up Multibus panels Beste TN we F Fy k a4 oe BREE vs JA um Buc Ee d Fig 52 6277 2RU Dial up Multibus Panel To connect these panels to a Sirius 800 use a multi drop pin to pin RS485
15. 5931 Multiviewer Output Modules up to 3 5902 Multiviewer Crosspoint Module x 1 or 5930 Input Monitor Module x1 24 Input slots populated with any combination of the following modules 4915 Audio Input Modules 5917 Video Re clocking Input Modules 5919 Video Re clocking De embedder Input Modules 5913 BNC 5914 Fiber Video Re clocking Input Modules 5915 Video Re clocking De embedder Input Modules Mu Wii 2452 2456 or 2458 blue Fan out Control Modules x 1 or 2 NI 5903 Audio Crosspoint N 3 Modules x1 or 2 YO N 5901 5 Video Crosspoint Modules x4 or 5 h A han 24 Output slots populated ZZ with any combination of the Z following modules LA 4929 Audio Output Modules A 5926 Video Re clocking Output Modules f Pd 5949 Video Re clocking Embedder Output Modules 4925 Audio Output Modules 5933 O P Monitor Module x 1 5923 BNC 5924 Fiber Video 2450 Nucleus or 2463 Nucleus2 Re clocking Output Modules 5925 Video Re clocking Embedder Output Modules Control Modules x 1 or 2 Fig 57 Sirius 840 Front Module Locations See section 8 1 for details on which rear panels that can be used with which front module Important Early Sirius 840 routers must be modified by Snell before they can be used for audio routing and processing 4915 5919 4929 5949 4925 5915 5925 or 5903 modules in use See section 3 11 to check i
16. Off normal state Flashing receiving error messages related to a route failure Table 30 Video Crosspoint Module LED Information x O ui x Oo D O 7 2 2 E E 4 3 5 o oo 3 lt o 0 0 D O O VA X te o XE w Ow 3 tO QU S S D E E E gt o Qo 5 OO dou Fig 98 Video Crosspoint Module LEDs Route Fail Pp SD SDHC Card Used for upgrading Crosspoint module firmware see the Sirius 800 Maintenance amp Upgrade manual for details Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 148 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Crosspoint Modules 10 2 Sirius 830 Video Crosspoint Arrangement 10 2 1 Note The Sirius 830 has two horizontally mounted video crosspoint modules situated near the top of the frame that send signals to the output modules The lower module is the main video crosspoint module the upper module is optional and for redundancy For video crosspoint module locations see section 8 2 1 The 288 router requires a minimum of one crosspoint module The redundant crosspoint can take the place of the main crosspoint module in the unlikely event of a failure If the redundant crosspoint has become active due to the failure of the main crosspoint the system is no longer redundant Sirius 830 Redundant Video Crosspoint Operation The redundant crosspoint design is based around protecting against crosspoint module failure In normal operation all
17. Section 12 4 5938 Section 12 3 5949 Section 11 3 5931 Sirius 800 Standard Video BNC Fibre input module Sirius 800 Video AHP input module with delay and sync capability Sirius 800 Standard Video output module non expandable Sirius 850 Standard Video Expansion output module Only fitted if expansion of a Sirius 850 frame is required Sirius 850 Standard Video output module expandable Only fitted if expansion is required between two Sirius 850 frames Sirius 800 Video embedding amp AHP output module with delay and sync capability Sirius 830 840 Multiviewer output module Section 13 6 Sirius 830 840 up to 3 Modules Sirius 850 up to 2 modules Rear Panel Sirius 830 1234 1235 BNC See section 9 1 1236 Fiber See section 9 2 Sirius 840 850 1349 1289 BNC See section 9 7 1305 Fiber See section 9 8 Sirius 830 1234 1235 BNC See section 9 1 1236 Fiber See section 9 2 Sirius 840 850 1349 1289 BNC See section 9 7 1305 Fiber See section 9 8 1294 BNC See section 11 4 1302 Fiber See section 11 5 1290 Expansion Output to a second Sirius 850 frame See section 12 5 1293 DIN 1 0 2 3 Coax See section 12 6 1294 BNC See section 11 4 1302 Fiber See section 11 5 1294 BNC See section 11 4 1302 Fiber See section 11 5 Sirius 830 840 1309 MV DIN 1 0 2 3 Coax See section 13 10 Sirius 850 1291 MV DIN 1 0 2 3 Coax See section 13 11 Table 13 New R
18. 00005 44 3 9 4 RefAuto Selected tees 44 3 9 5 Manual Reference Standard Selected 44 3 9 6 Reference Input Physical or Derived Selected 45 3 10 Audio Reference Input Li 45 3 11 Audio Routing and AHP Router Modifications n anaana naaa anaana 46 3 11 1 Frame Configuration and Module Compatibility 47 4 Powering the Sirius 800 Routers lere 49 4 1 Powering Up the Sirius 800 0 0 0 0 ce eee 49 4 1 1 Power Sequencing LL 49 4 1 2 Power Up and Initialization LL 50 4 1 2 1 Configuration Errors LL 51 4 1 3 Starting the Door PC Manually 00 000 c eee eee 51 4 2 Powering Down the Sirius 800 00000 cee eee eee 52 5 Door PC ier aie dea Bias RO ee ela ewe lak 53 5 1 Main Menu e ee Rr eR re Reese ee kee UR ke BOR od 53 DA NUS Me CPI ere Pa ee A ae acne 54 52T Alar MS CE 54 52 2 Modules de gece a 2S IO edes Foe era 55 5 2 3 Temperatule ersi rrd ese Eom de a ees i RR c 57 5 9 Sighals cuis eR pd n Beige aa 58 5 344 Video Inputs eese Sew daw eee dk RR oR el e 58 5 3 2 MADI Inputs 5 1 tee cad Rm md ee De ted ae ce es 59 5 3 3 References astin ia aea nA Ee a ka a re 60 5 4 Redundant Crosspoint Control 64 5 4 1 Video Crosspoint Matrix Status Screens llli llli eee 64 5 4 1 1 Video Crosspoint Failure llle 68 5 4 2 Audio Crosspoint Matrix Status Screens 0 0000 eee eee 69 5
19. 241 14 3 5 2 Sirius 840 Input and Output Port Mapping LL 241 14 3 5 3 Sirius 850 Input and Output Port Mapping 242 14 3 6 Configuring Nucleus2 2463 Controller Replication 243 14 3 7 Changing the IP Address of a Nucleus2 Controller 244 14 3 8 Setting the Network Communication Speed of a Nucleus2 Controller 245 14 3 9 Enable Disable RollCall on a Nucleus2 Controller Using the Online Editor 246 14 3 10 Enable Disable Auto Change Over of Controller Ethernet Connection 247 14 3 11 Further Information 247 14 4 Nucleus 2450 Router Controller Card 248 14 4 1 Nucleus 2450 Controller LEDs 0 0 0 0 cece eae 248 14 4 2 Nucleus 2450 Sirius 800 Input and Output Port Mapping 250 14 4 2 1 Sirius 830 Input and Output Port Mapping 250 14 4 2 2 Sirius 840 Input and Output Port Mapping 0 250 14 4 2 3 Sirius 850 Input Output Port Mapping 251 14 4 3 Nucleus 2450 Config ini File 252 14 4 4 Nucleus 2450 Network ini File 254 14 4 5 Nucleus 2450 Viewing Modifying Config ini and Network ini Files 257 14 4 5 1 Modify an ini File Using FTP 257 14 4 5 2 Modify an ini File Using Copy isssesseeee B 258 14 4 6 Nucleus 2450 Changing the IP Address 258 14 4 7 Nucleus 2450 Setting the Network Communication Speed 259 14 4 8 Nucleus 2450 Enabling RollCall 0 00020 a eee 259 14 4 9 Nucleus 2450 Setting Parity f
20. Ethernet Link Flashes Ethernet activity D9 Crosspoint Switch e Toggles between Blue and Off each time a Crosspoint is switched D10 Not used D11 Not used D12 Not used D13 Communications to other processor e Green Communications to other processor Off No communications to other processor D14 LTC e Flashes Blue 625 TC present e Green 525 TC present e Off TC not present D15 When the Nucleus Controller powers up if it detects a difference between what was configured last and the current configuration it applies the new configuration and the D15 LED shows an FPGA validation error see Fig 160 The next time the Nucleus Controller is rebooted there is no mismatch and therefore the D15 LED is off If the D15 LED remains on it could indicate a fault in the interface to the modules An FPGA interface validation error occurs if the software detects a difference between the modules configured in the database and the configuration last written to the modules in the frame This can happen when a reconfigure is done to recognise new cards and the Nucleus Controller is rebooted On a dual processor system the D15 LED can indicate a mismatch between the databases on the two controllers Red FPGA interface validation error Off no error D16 Active ldle Flashes Green Active Flashes Red Idle Table 66 2450 Nucleus Router Contro
21. Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 6 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Contents 11 8 1 62 Way High Density Balanced AES Socket Pin Outs 191 11 9 1356 Sirius 800 Unbalanced AES Output Rear Panel with MADI Outputs 194 11 9 1 62 Way High Density Unbalanced AES Socket Pin Outs 195 11 9 2 FGAEY 25029104 Unbalanced 62 Way AES to BNC Breakout Cable 197 11 10 HD BNC MADI Output Connectors 197 TAO Example 15 Paka wets ene Re tho em Une Ri a 198 11 10 2 Example 2 exe xe eee RR eoe e ee XR t CES Res 198 T1 10 3 Example 3 x ete LE Ru Ren RON ead on ee ee Ried eR RR 198 12 Sirius 850 Video Expansion 199 12 1 Single Sirius 850 Frame up to 576 x 1152 Video 199 12 2 Dual Sirius 850 Frames up to 1152 x 1152 Video 200 12 2 1 Control of a Dual Frame System 201 12 2 2 Signal Flow Between Frames 202 12 3 5938 Sirius 850 Standard Video Output Module Expandable 204 12 3 1 5938 Output Module LED Information LL 205 12 4 5928 Sirius 850 Standard Video Expansion Output Module 206 12 4 1 5928 Sirius 850 Standard Video Expansion Output Module LEDs 207 12 5 1290 Sirius 850 Video Expansion Output Rear Panel 208 12 6 1293 Sirius 850 Video DIN 1 0 2 3 mini Coax Output Rear Panel 209 13 Multiviewer and Input Output Monitoring Modules 211 13 1 Monitoring and Multiviewer Overview
22. Pass asynchronous audio or Dolby E transparently at the original sample rate Asynchronous channels pass VU amp C data transparently parity is recalculated for each output Up to 3 MADI outputs are also available on HD BNC connectors with correct rear panel see section 11 10 for details Up to 64 channels of audio per MADI output B 3 1 4 MADI Audio Outputs Note To connect MADI audio outputs from a 4925 input module it must be used with either a 1295 BNC or 1296 Fiber rear panel Up to 12 MADI outputs one main and one duplicate output of each channel When fiber SFP modules are used the main and duplicate MADI outputs span two separate SFP modules to guard against an SFP failure see section 11 7 for details Up to 64 channels of audio per MADI output Maximum of 768 12 x 64 audio channels per 4925 audio output module Maximum of 768 12 x 64 audio channels per 4929 audio output module MADI streams are generated locked to the AES reference All audio must be synchronous for fully transparent operation Re generate VU amp C data See Table 105 on page 327 for default standard details Asynchronous AES channels will be added to the MADI using drop repeat techniques Asynchronous Dolby E will not pass error free through MADI outputs Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 297 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Modules No Longer Supplied With New Systems B 3 1 5 Note Au
23. Redundant Crosspoint Control Crosspoint Video Main and Expansion see section 5 4 X Di see below Nucleus Info see section 5 5 Redundant Crosspoint Control Pirri f eene see section 5 4 le Nucleus Info Miscellaneous Miscellaneous Catsii Dial Up Routing par Up Monitor H Video see section 5 6 Fig 20 Main Menu Sirius 850 shown e fLiveRunner is closed or the door PC is shut down the door screen cannot notify the user of the status of the router or any router alarms Status and alarm monitoring on the door screen will not resume until the door PC and LiveRunner have been restarted See section 4 1 3 for details on starting the door PC manually Router status and alarm notifications are still available to external control and monitoring systems while the door screen is off The Exit button on the main menu screen is used to access the following options Close button Closes LiveRunner and displays the Door PC desktop Shutdown button Closes LiveRunner and shuts down the Door PC Menu button Displays the door screen main menu Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 53 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Door PC 5 2 Status The Status box on the main menu screen contains the Alarms Modules and Temperature buttons 5 2 1 Alarms Touch the Alarms button on the main menu screen to view the router alarm status see section 5 1 Altern
24. e Take button touch to complete the routing once the destination and source have been entered in the text boxes Undo button touch the Undo button to undo a Take and go back to the previously selected source Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 75 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Door PC Dial Up Routing Operation Example Routing video input 1 to video output 2 1 Ifthe Dial Up screen is not already displayed touch the Dial Up Routing Video button from the main menu screen and then touch the Continue buttons as they are displayed Finally touch the Dial Up button when it is displayed to access the screen 2 Select the Destination text box using the DST SCR button and enter 2 using the numeric keypad and the configured destination name is displayed in the Destination text box Note The source for the currently selected destination is displayed in the Current Source text box 3 Select the Source text box using the DST SCR button and enter 1 using the numeric keypad and the configured source name is displayed in the Source text box 4 Tosetthe route touch the Take button 5 f you have routed the wrong source to the destination touch the Undo button This will undo the Take and go back to the previously selected source Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 76 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Door PC 5 6 3 Dial Up Monitor Touch the Dial Up Monitor button on the main menu screen to displ
25. 01 LEE COPIA ZSZ0L 01 7866 OIPNY 96 01 ELE O PIA 7866 01 7126 OIPNY ZLE 01 68Z O PIA 9LZ6 01 61178 OIPNY 88Z 01 G9Z O9plA 8778 01 L894 OIPNY 997 01 Lyg OBPIA 089 01 169 OIpny 072 0 LLZ O PIA ZL69 0 St L9 OIPNY 9LZ 01 64 O9pIA VV L9 0 LES OIPNY Z6L 0 694 OSPIA 9489 01 6097 OIPNY 894 0 Gy O PIA 809r 01 Lp8 OIPNY ry L O LZ O9pIA 018 01 ELOE OIpny OZ 01 76 O9plA ZLOE 0 GOES OIPNY 96 0 EZ O PIA 7082 01 LESI OIPNY ZZ 0 6p O PIA 9 G 01 697 OIPNY 84 0 GZ O PIA 892 01 o pny 72 O O9pIA Fig 62 Sirius 840 850 Output Module Locations Front View 2014 Snell Limited Page 99 Issue 5 Rev 2 Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Module Locations 8 3 7 Sirius 840 850 Rear Input Output Connector Configuration Frames that are not fully populated with input or output rear panels have blanking plates fitted in their place Note Y Fiber 8 3 7 1 Inputs The columns count down from top to bottom then back to top again and from right to left The video and embedded audio channel numbers for input and output rear panel slots 1 and 24 are shown in Fig 63 and Fig 64 respectively The channel numbers for all of the rear panel connectors are listed on page 102 in Table 16 If MADI rear panels are fitted each input or output
26. 1299 Balanced AES rear panel no MADI No longer supplied Sirius 840 850 1352 Balanced AES HD BNC MADI rear panel 1355 Unbalanced AES HD BNC MADI rear panel 1297 Balanced AES rear panel no MADI No longer supplied Up to 12 MADI input channels Sirius 830 1303 MADI Input BNC rear panel 1304 MADI Input Fiber rear panel Sirius 840 850 1285 MADI Input BNC rear panel 1286 MADI Input Fiber rear panel See Section See section 9 9 1 See section 9 10 1 See Appendix B 1 1 See section 9 9 2 See section 9 10 2 See Appendix B 1 2 See section 9 3 See section 9 4 See section 9 5 See section 9 6 Table 20 4915 Rear Panel Compatibility Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 126 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Input Rear Panels and Input Modules Fugue LED Sirius 830 Connectors to LEDs the 1354 1357 1303 1304 or 1299 Rear Modules PL7 Link fitted Sirius 840 850 across two pins Connectors to closest to SD the 1352 1355 Card 1285 1286 or 1297 Rear Firmware Licensing Modules SD SDHC Card see the Sirius 800 Maintenance amp Upgrade manual for details Fig 84 4915 Sirius 800 AES MADI Input Module Note e Jumpers and Headers are present on the audio input module and these are for Snell Use Only n normal operation no jumper links or headers are fitted except for PL7 which has a link fitted across the two pins closest to the SD card slot 9 12 1 M
27. B B The connectors are located on the alarm rear panel see section 16 3 REMOTE B Fig 125 Control Expansion in a Two Frame Sirius 850 System RJ45 connectors Local A and Local B take the local control signals both outgoing clock and data and incoming data from the local controller out to a remote frame The connectors Remote A and Remote B receive commands from a remote controller and send the data back to the remote controller RJ45 Cat 5e RJ45 Cat 5e Connector E pacer Connector Pin ea ds Pin Out Wire Colors Out Cable Pairs 1 White with Orange 1 2 Orange 2 A 3 White with Green 3 4 Blue 4 5 White with Blue 5 6 Green 6 7 White with Brown 7 8 Brown 8 Table 45 Cat 5e Cable Connector Pin Outs for Dual Frame Issue 5 Rev2 Page 201 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Sirius 850 Video Expansion Note 12 2 2 Enabling video redundancy in frame one will enable redundancy for the main crosspoint modules mounted in frame one and the expansion crosspoint modules mounted in frame two The reverse is true for frame two In a dual frame system if redundancy is enabled in one frame it must also be enabled in the other frame See section 10 2 for details on enabling disabling video redundancy Signal Flow Between Frames Video signals can be routed via the expansion video crosspoint matrix and passed to the 5928 standard video expansion output modules
28. Check that the module is inserted correctly If the Local Command Error LED is flashing at the same time as the Local Command OK LED is flashing it suggests a mismatch in the configuration of the Nucleus controller Check the controller configuration Remote Receiving messages Sirius 850 no expansion Command from remote Nucleus Off Expansion not used OK control module the Sirius 850 expanded to second frame Nucleus controller in the Flashing receiving information and frame linked to this working correctly frame Remote Error with messages from Sirius 850 no expansion Error remote Nucleus control Off Expansion not used module the Nucleus Sirius 850 expanded to second frame controller in the frame Off normal state linked to this frame Flashing the command message from the remote router controller is corrupt or hasn t been received This communications error could be caused by a hardware failure or incorrect insertion Check that the module is inserted correctly and the four RJ45 connections between the frames are fitted correctly see section 12 2 1 If the Remote Error LED is flashing at the same time as the Hemote Command OK LED is flashing it suggests a mismatch in the configuration of the Nucleus controller Check the controller configuration Table 46 5938 Sirius 850 Standard Video Output Module Expandable LED Information Issue 5 Rev2 Page 205 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgro
29. Each of the output modules receives one transport stream from each of the audio crosspoint modules Redundant Audio Crosspoint Operation The redundant crosspoint design is based around protecting against crosspoint module failure In normal operation all of the routes pass through both crosspoint modules and the individual output modules will use the audio signals from the main crosspoint module If an output module detects an error in the transport stream from the main audio crosspoint module or if the stream is not present it will use the transport stream from the redundant audio crosspoint module The Route Fail LED on the audio crosspoint module with the failure will flash red see section 10 5 1 for the location of the status LEDs At this point the crosspoint matrix is still capable of setting all audio routes but redundancy protection has been lost This failure must be addressed immediately to regain redundancy for the crosspoint matrix Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 156 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Crosspoint Modules For example e f Audio Output 1 on the main crosspoint fails The output module that Audio Output 1 is routed to selects the redundant crosspoint audio transport stream e f Audio Output 2 on the main crosspoint fails The output module that Audio Output 2 is routed to selects the redundant crosspoint audio transport stream Note e Any failure needs addressing immed
30. LED Color Label Deiail Normal Working Status Each Pair of FPGA LEDS Flashing rapidly between Red amp Green 1 FPGA 1 status 2 Hz each LED starting up Green On Solid amp Red Off normal state working correctly Green Off amp Red On Solid FPGA programming fault found Remove module and refit to force a reboot 2 FPGA 2 status Red amp Green Flashing very rapidly in sync 4 Hz each LED A change has been made to the module settings database in RAM but it has not yet been written to flash memory This is not a fault and the flash memory will be updated after 3 FPGA 3 status 10 seconds of no audio setting changes being made Do not remove power from the module while this indication is present as the flash may become corrupted Other indications are displayed when rforming a firmware upgrade see the 4 FPGA 4 status n ga i Sirius 800 Maintenance amp Upgrade manual for details Power OK Power to the module On Solid working correctly Local Receiving messages Flashing receiving information and Command from local Nucleus working correctly OK control module the Nucleus controller in this frame Local Error Error with messages Off normal state from local Nucleus Flashing the command message from control module the the router controller is corrupt or hasn t Nucleus controller in been received this frame This communications error could be caused by a hardware failure or incorrect insertion Check that the modul
31. LED G Power OK Command OK Error Video Ref 1 Video Ref 2 Video Ref 3 Video Ref 4 AES Ref Fig 106 4929 Output Module LEDs Issue 5 Rev2 Page 173 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Output Modules and Output Rear Panels 11 2 5926 Sirius 800 Standard Video Output Module Non Expandable The 5926 Sirius 800 standard video output module with re clocking has 24 video output channels and can handle SD ASI and HD signals up to 3Gb s Note Sirius 850 If video expansion is required from a second Sirius 850 frame use the 5938 video output module See section 12 3 Connectors to the Motherboard LEDs Connectors to the 1294 or 1302 Rear Modules Fig 107 5926Sirius 800 Standard Video Output Module Non Expandable Note e Jumpers and Headers are present on the video output module and these are for Snell Use Only n normal operation no jumper links or headers are fitted The 5926 video output module is compatible with the 1294 BNC rear panel See section 11 4 and the 1302 Fiber rear panel See section 11 5 Issue 5 Rev2 Page 174 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Output Modules and Output Rear Panels 11 2 1 5926 Output Module LED Information Table 37 shows the LED color code on the 5926 Output Module and Fig 108 shows the front edge of the output module LED Color Label Detail Nor
32. Monitor row 3 e Outputs 16373 Monitor row 4 Mon Row Sources 0 287 outputs 0 287 e Mon Row Sources 576 863 inputs 0 287 e Outputs 1153 1292 are multiviewer outputs All numbers with an Asterisk against them are Base 0 Issue 5 Rev2 Page 261 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Nucleus Router Control Modules 14 6 1 2 Sirius 840 Sirius 840 Router e A o 576 x 140 576 x 576 Multiviewer Outputs Video Inputs RE i f Video Outputs 1 lt a 576 1153 to 1292 16370 ger to 16373 a Monitoring Outputs Fig 162 Sirius 840 Router Diagram Main video inputs and outputs are 1 576 e Outputs 16370 Monitor row 1 e Outputs 16371 Monitor row 2 e Outputs 16372 Monitor row 3 e Outputs 16373 Monitor row 4 Mon Row Sources 0 575 outputs 0 575 e Mon Row Sources 576 1151 inputs 0 575 e Outputs 1153 1292 are multiviewer outputs Note All numbers with an Asterisk against them are Base 0 Issue 5 Rev2 Page 262 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Nucleus Router Control Modules 14 6 1 3 Sirius 850 Single Frame with Optional Expansion Outputs Sirius 850 single router with optional expansion outputs Sirius 850 Router single frame with optional expansion outputs 576 x 576 Expansion Outputs 576 576 x 140 57
33. Rear Panel Slot 1 1 to 24 1 to 768 577 to 600 Rear Panel Slot 2 25 to 48 769 to 1536 601 to 624 Rear Panel Slot 3 49 to 72 1537 to 2304 625 to 648 Rear Panel Slot 4 73 to 96 2305 to 3072 649 to 672 Rear Panel Slot 5 97 to 120 3073 to 3840 673 to 696 Rear Panel Slot 6 121 to 144 3841 to 4608 697 to 720 Rear Panel Slot 7 145 to 168 4609 to 5376 721 to 744 Rear Panel Slot 8 169 to 192 5377 to 6144 745 to 768 Rear Panel Slot 9 193 to 216 6145 to 6912 769 to 792 Rear Panel Slot 10 217 to 240 6913 to 7680 793 to 816 Rear Panel Slot 11 241 to 264 7681 to 8448 817 to 840 Rear Panel Slot 12 265 to 288 8449 to 9216 841 to 864 Rear Panel Slot 13 289 to 312 9217 to 9984 865 to 888 Rear Panel Slot 14 313 to 336 9985 to 10752 889 to 912 Rear Panel Slot 15 337 to 360 10753 to 11520 913 to 936 Rear Panel Slot 16 361 to 384 11521 to 12288 937 to 960 Rear Panel Slot 17 385 to 408 12289 to 13056 961 to 984 Rear Panel Slot 18 409 to 432 13057 to 13824 985 to 1008 Rear Panel Slot 19 433 to 456 13825 to 14592 1009 to 1032 Rear Panel Slot 20 457 to 480 14598 to 15360 1033 to 1056 Rear Panel Slot 21 481 to 504 15361 to 16128 1057 to 1080 Rear Panel Slot 22 505 to 528 16129 to 16896 1081 to 1104 Rear Panel Slot 23 529 to 552 16897 to 17664 1105 to 1128 Rear Panel Slot 24 553 to 576 17665 to 18432 1129 to 1152 Table 16 Sirius 840 850 Connector Channels by Rear Panel Slot Issue 5 Rev2 Page 102 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Module Locations
34. Refer all servicing to qualified personnel To reduce the risk of electric shock do not expose this appliance to rain or moisture Always ensure that the unit is properly earthed and power connections correctly made This equipment must be supplied from a power system providing a PROTECTIVE EARTH connection and having a neutral connection which can be reliably identified The power outlet supplying power to the unit should be close to the unit and easily accessible L gende Ce symbole indique qu il faut pr ter attention et se r f rer 4 au manuel Ce symbole indique qu il peut y avoir des tensions lectriques 3 l int rieur de l appareil Ne pas intervenir sans l agr ment du service qualifi Pr caution d emploi Les proc dures de maintenance ne concernent que le service agr Afin de r duire le risque de choc lectrique il est recommand de se limiter aux proc dures d utilisation moins d en tre qualifi Pour toute maintenance contacter le service comp tent Pour r duire le risque de choc lectrique ne pas exposer l appareil dans un milieu humide Toujours s assurer que l unit est correctement aliment e en particuliers la liaison la terre La source lectrique de cet quipement doit poss der une connexion la terre D ainsi qu une liaison neutre identifiable La prise lectrique qui alimente l appareil doit tre proche de celle ci et accessible
35. Simboli di sicurezza Questo simbolo indica l informazione importante contenuta nei manuali appartenenti all apparecchiatura Consultare il manuale CO Questo simbolo indica che all interno dell apparato sono presenti tensioni pericolose Non cercare di smontare l unit Per qualsiasi tipo di intervento rivolgersi al personale qualificato Attenzione Le istruzioni relative alla manutenzione sono ad uso esclusivo del personale qualificato E proibito all utente eseguire qualsiasi operazione non esplicitamente consentita nelle istruzioni Per qualsiasi informazione rivolgersi al personale qualificato Per prevenire il pericolo di scosse elettriche necessario non esporre mai l apparecchiatura alla pioggia o a qualsiasi tipo di umidit Assicurarsi sempre che l unit sia propriamente messa a terra e che le connessioni elettriche siano eseguite correttamente Questo dispositivo deve essere collegato ad un impianto elettrico dotato di un sistema di messa a terra efficace La presa di corrente deve essere vicina all apparecchio e facilmente accessibile Erkl rung der Sicherheitssymbole Dieses Symbol weist den Benutzer auf wichtige Informationen hin die in der begleitenden Dokumentation enthalten sind Dieses Symbol zeigt an dass gef hrliche Spannung vorhanden ist Es befinden sich keine vom Benutzer zu wartenden Teile im Ger teinneren Dieses Ger t sollte nur von geschultem Personal gewartet werden Sicherheits
36. amp 0 or 32 kHz 1 amp 1 or Not Indicated 0 O Sampling Frequency bits 35 to 38 96 kHz 0 1 0 0 192 kHz 1 1 0 0 or Not Indicated 0 0 0 0 Use of Auxiliary Sample Bits bit 18 24 bit format 1 All other default channel status bits set to Zero 0 Default User Data bits set to All bits set to Zero 0 Parity re calculated on outputs Transparent to audio data Sample rate adjustment for near rate locking by drop repeat Transparency free Transparent to audio data running asynchronous outputs Transparent to Input Channel Status and User data Parity re calculated on outputs MADI Outputs on AES Rear Panel 1353 and 1356 Rear Panel Number 3 Connector HD BNC 75 Q electrical impedance Impedance 75 0 20 Output Amplitude 720 mV nominal MADI Outputs on Coax Rear Panel 1295 Rear Panel Number and Type 12 with dual outputs per signal Connector BNC to IEC61169 8 75 Q electrical impedance Impedance 75 Q 42 O Output Amplitude 720 mV nominal MADI Outputs on Fiber Rear Panel 1296 Rear Panel Number and Type 12 with dual outputs per signal Removable SFP modules Fiber Connector LC PC single mode Wavelength 1310 nm nominal Output Power Typical 2 dBm Other power and CWDM wavelength options available contact factory Typical Fiber Length 20 km 12 5 Miles single mode MADI Note Fiber MADI specifications are based on fitting standard SFP transmitters Order Code ST31ST31 3 Table 105 4929 and 4925 AES MAD
37. bottom LED 5 All LEDs Off for 10 Seconds 6 Return to Step 1 Any other pattern abnormal operation contact Snell Customer Support Table 41 5949 Output Module LED Information Top LED Bottom LED Fig 114 5949 Output Module LEDs Power OK Local Command OK Local Error Remote Command OK Remote Error Fugue Status Diagnostic LEDs x 8 Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 185 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Output Modules and Output Rear Panels 11 4 1294 Sirius 800 Video BNC Output Rear Panel The 1294 Sirius 800 video BNC output rear panel has 24 BNC outputs The 1294 rear panel is used with the 5949 5925 video output module 24 channel video with audio embedder re clocking and AHP and the 5926 5938 video output module 24 channel video with re clocking Video Output 1 f f 7 7 f 7 f Video Output 24 f Sirius 850 Expansion Connectors i a r b Li c n Not Used with 5926 modules Fig 115 1294Sirius 800 Video BNC Output Rear Panel All the BNC connectors on the output rear panel have Snell s unique Catsii feature that illuminates each connector See section 6 for details of the Catsii functionality Issue 5 Rev2 Page 186 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Output Modules and Output Rear Panels 11 5 1302 Sirius 800 Video Fiber Output rear panel The 1302 Sirius 800 vide
38. cabling between frames is supplied with the 1290 expansion rear panels The control bus cables between frames are standard Category 5e Ethernet cables see section 12 2 1 for details or Field expandable to 576 x 1152 video by the use of 5928 Expansion Output modules and 1293 DIN 1 0 2 3 Expansion Output rear panels processing is not available on the expansion outputs and the maximum audio matrix size remains as 18432 x 18432 mono audio channels A typical Sirius 850 router might be 480 x 600 Video router with a 480 x 480 AES and 12 x 12 MADI router Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 28 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Product Overview 3 4 4 All Sirius 800 Routers Mix and match different signal formats in the same frame e BNC Video 3 Gb s amp 1 5 Gb s HD SD DVB ASI e Fiber Video 3 Gb s amp 1 5 Gb s HD SD DVB ASI e 5x 62 way female high density D Type connectors for balanced or unbalanced AES Audio dependant on rear panel fitted AES up to 48 kHz and 3 x HD BNC dependant on rear panel fitted MADI up to 48 kHz e BNC Audio MADI up to 48 kHz e Fiber Audio MADI up to 48 kHz Crosspoints e Video each crosspoint module has 288 crosspoints Sirius 830 up to 288 x 288 Up to two crosspoint modules can be fitted sending signals to the output modules One crosspoint module is used as the main crosspoint module and the second is optional for redundancy Sirius 840 and Sirius 850 up to 576 x 576 Up to five c
39. normal state Command Flashing the command message from the from the Control Error router controller is corrupt or hasn t been module received On if any signal is routed through this crosspoint module Removing the crosspoint Route Route is active on module will disturb the signal s passing Active crosspoint through the crosspoint module Off no signal is present on this crosspoint module Off normal state One or more audio Flashing there is a fault with one or more Route Fail transport streams audio transport streams passing through the have failed crosspoint module For details on replacing the crosspoint module see section 10 5 5 Table 33 5903 Audio Crosspoint Module LED Information Issue 5 Rev2 Page 155 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Crosspoint Modules 10 5 2 10 5 3 10 5 4 LED Detail Status Color Function The 5903 module either generates the audio system clock or uses the clock generated on the other crosspoint if fitted In normal operation the main crosspoint module generates the audio system clock and the redundant crosspoint module is slaved to that CLK Clock Master On a this crosspoint module is supplying the Master audio system clock Off this crosspoint module s clock is slaved to the other crosspoint module Note If the 5903 module supplying the audio system clock fails then it is important that clock generation is moved to the working cro
40. see section 10 4 1 for details Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 150 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Crosspoint Modules 10 3 1 Note Sirius 840 850 Redundant Crosspoint Operation The redundant crosspoint design is based around protecting against a single signal path failure In normal operation all the routes pass through the four main routing crosspoint modules The redundant signal path algorithm checks the signal paths on each of the main crosspoint modules in turn by configuring the redundant crosspoint module to mimic the main module being checked The algorithm compares the signal standard of each signal path through the main crosspoint module with the signal standard of the equivalent path through the redundant module The algorithm also compares the signal lock status of each signal as it enters and leaves the main crosspoint module A difference between the incoming and outgoing signal lock status indicates a route failure Each signal path is compared in turn until all of the paths on the main module have been checked The algorithm then moves on to check the next main crosspoint module in the same way If the algorithm finds a difference in the signal standard of a path passed by the main and redundant crosspoint modules or if a signal lock status check fails for a route the failure is flagged and the control system can if configured move the route to the redundant crosspoint module On
41. see Table 48 This configuration is carried out in Workbench see the Workbench manual for information Signal Type Monitored Monitor Output Port Configuration Required Discrete MADI or AES Audio Configure Monitor Output Port to Matrix 2 Audio 4915 4929 and 4925 modules Video Configure Monitor Output to Matrix 1 Video 5917 5919 5926 5949 5915 5916 Embedded audio is passed with the video signal 5925 and 5937 modules Table 56 Monitor Output Port Configuration If an AES left or right channel is routed to a monitor output the relevant AES pair will be output Note The 5939 does not have any way of determining signal format so there are only a limited number of options the Catsii LED s on the 1237 input output rear panel BNC and DIN monitor outputs can display see Table 57 Signal Monitor Output Catsii Color Default Monitor port not enabled Off Off No signal Current configured setting for No valid signal Red SD or DVB ASI Current configured setting for Valid SD signal Yellow Any HD or 3G signal Current configured setting for Valid 1080i signal Green AES audio signal Current configured setting for No valid signal Red via 4915 4929 4925 modules Table 57 1237 Control Panel Catsii Signal Status Colors Issue 5 Rev2 Page 229 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Multiviewer and Input Output Monitoring Modules 13 10 1309 Sirius 830 840 Multivie
42. when the first part of the boot process is complete The controller will be ready to communicate with the control system and control the router up to two minutes after this This will be indicated by the Snell control system connected to the router Dual Controllers Single Controller LED Active Controller Inactive Controller Active Controller Power OK Solid Green Solid Green Solid Green 1 Active ldle Flashing Green Flashing Blue Flashing Green 2 Master Slave Solid Green Solid Blue Solid Green 3 Watchdog Status Flashing Green Flashing Green Flashing Green ae octal Pink Magenta Pulsin Between Blue Pulsing Green Blue Pulsing Green 9 9 Blue Controllers 5 Serial Data Off Flashing Green Off Replication 6 Not Used Off Off Off 7 Not Used Off Off Off Table 60 2463 Nucleus2 Router Control Module LED Sequence Startup Reset 2463 Nucleus2 Router Control Module LEDs on Database Push When a Workbench database is pushed to a controller in a frame with two controllers it should be pushed to the inactive controller first This means that route changes and processing can be controlled while the inactive controller is being updated The inactive controller can then be made active for the user to test the database If the test is successful the database is then pushed to the other now inactive controller so that the databases in both controllers matches In a frame with a single controller this is not possible and the database must
43. working correctly Command OK Command from the Control module Flashing receiving information and working correctly Command Error Error with command from the Control module Off normal state Flashing the command message from the router controller is corrupt or hasn t been received If all of the multiviewer output modules indicate a Command Error check that the router controller is operating correctly If only one of the modules indicates the error contact Snell Customer Support see section 1 2 for contact details Table 51 5931 Sirius 800 Multiviewer Output Module LED Information Power OK Command OK Command Error 5931 Fig 147 5931 Sirius 800 Multiviewer Output Module LEDs Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 222 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Multiviewer and Input Output Monitoring Modules 13 7 5939 Sirius 830 Video amp Audio Input amp Output Monitoring Module The 5939 Sirius 830 video amp audio input amp output monitoring module is compatible with the 1237 rear panel see section 13 9 Note The 5939 Input Output module must be configured in Workbench before it can be used The 5939 module is configured from the Local Router Hardware tab Advanced Configuration Edit Module Configurations See the Workbench user manual for module configuration details e The Modules Present screen of the Door PC can be used to chec
44. 1 0 2 3 Coax connectors The output from the 5928 expansion output module is via the 1293 24 Channel Expansion Output Rear Panel When 1293 cards are fitted to a Sirius 850 it is then a single frame 576 x 1152 router with no further expansion capability Connects to Expansion Output Module Video Output 24 Fig 132 1293 24 Channel Expansion Output Rear Panel e tis not possible to mix the 1290 and 1293 Output Rear Panels in a frame Itis not possible to monitor the 1293 expansion outputs e The 1293 expansion output rear panels are not fitted with Catsii LEDs e A second Sirius 850 frame cannot be used if one or more 1293 Output Rear Panels are fitted in a frame e If a second Sirius 850 frame is required at a future date all 1293 rear panels must be removed and replaced with 1290 expansion rear panels Issue 5 Rev2 Page 209 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Sirius 850 Video Expansion Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 210 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Multiviewer and Input Output Monitoring Modules 13 Multiviewer and Input Output Monitoring Modules 13 1 Note Monitoring and Multiviewer Overview The Sirius 800 routers have four independently selectable monitor outputs The four monitor outputs can be selected from any of the video audio inputs or outputs in the local frame Monitoring outputs are not available on the Sirius 830 when it is equipped w
45. 1 5932 Sirius 850 Multiviewer Output Module The 5932 Sirius 850 multiviewer output module takes the multiviewer output signals from the multiviewer crosspoint module and passes each signal through a re clocker Each 5932 module has 72 Outputs Connectors to the Motherboard LEDs Fig 195 5932 Sirius 850 Multiviewer Output Module The output of the 5932 is connected to one of the two possible rear panel arrangements in order to link to an external multiviewer system One 5932 multiviewer output module is required for each rear panel fitted Sirius 850 Up to 2 rear panels with 48 Coax DIN 1 0 2 3 connectors per 1291 Rear Panel up to rear panel up to 96 multiviewer outputs See section 13 11 two Sirius 850 Up to two rear panels with nine MV Link connectors per rear 1292 Rear Panel up to two panel The 1292 rear panel is an interface to the Miranda No longer supplied and KaleidoX multiviewer shown here for users that D already have them fitted Fitting one rear panel supplies 72 outputs and fitting two rear panels supplies 140 outputs See section B 5 2 for details Table 95 5932 Sirius 850 Multiviewer Output Module Possible Rear Panel Arrangements Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 314 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Modules No Longer Supplied With New Systems B 5 1 1 5932 Multiviewer Output Module LED Information Table 96 shows the LED color code on the edge of the 5932 m
46. 11 3 1 Processing on the Output Module The 5949 video output module can manipulate the audio channels received from the crosspoint modules before outputting them Note Video and Audio processing are licensed options and must be purchased for each module they are used on See section 3 5 for details Processing is configured in Workbench Fig 110 shows the order that the video and audio processing is applied to the signal To Input Output To Input Output Monitoring DI Monitoring Frame Sync Bypass Video and Audio Video Output with Video with Embedded Audio Embedded Audio from Video Crosspoint i o 2 B ui 3 un o 2 a E S E E amp x Frame Sync 5 E Audio Transport E or Delay o t B Stream from eu E PA E 5 Main Audio 2s g o Crosspoint card E A 2 8 s Audio Transport 2 S um Stream from 3 6 9 Redundant Audio lt lt Crosspoint card Signal Color Code Module License Color Code S8AHP VA waco Sremaay Adobe Input Output Monitoring selected from either the input or the output of the module pre or post processing See section 5 6 3 for details on how to configure this using the router Door PC Fig 110 Processing Block Diagram If any audio channels routed from the audio crosspoints are asynchronous to the video signal they are being embedded in the output module will use drop repeat to synchronize the audio channels with the video signal Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 178 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www s
47. 2452 2453 modules can only be fitted in original unmodified Sirius 800 routers see Table 5 in section 3 11 for identification details The 2457 2458 modules can only be fitted in Sirius 800 routers built or modified with blue fan casings see section 3 11 for identification details The 2455 2456 modules can only be fitted in Sirius 800 routers modified with silver fan casings stamped with HF see Table 5 in section 3 11 for identification details e DO NOCT fit Blue Control Fan Interface modules 2457 2458 in a router equipped with fans with Silver casings as this will damage the router and the router will stop working DONCT fit Green Control Fan Interface modules 2455 2456 2452 2453 in a router equipped with fans with Blue casings as this will damage the router and the router will stop working Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 266 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Control Fan Interface Module Table 75 lists compatibility between the Sirius 800 modules and the control fan interface modules 2457 2458 2455 2456 2452 2453 Control Fan Control Fan Control Fan Modules Interface Interface Interface Module Module Module Compatibility Compatibility Compatibility Nucleus Controllers 2450 Nucleus Router Control Module No No Yes 2463 Nucleus2 Router Control Module Yes Yes Yes Input Modules 5913 Sirius 840 850 Standard Video BNC Yes Yes Yes Input module not Sirius 830 not Sirius 830 not Sirius 830
48. 27 Frame Sync Configuration Video Delay Delay is applied to a video output channel in frames lines pixels or in milliseconds Video delay is set in steps of 0 00001 ms up to a maximum of 14 frames for progressive video standards or 14 fields for interlaced video standards To enable video delay for a particular video standard Lock to Input must be selected in either the delay tab or the frame sync tab of the same standard Each video standard has a tab for frame sync configuration and a tab for delay configuration The signal standard is auto detected and the channel uses the settings defined in the appropriate Frame sync or Delay tab for that standard leanne Enable fame amp ine syr 1000i Delay 1080i50 1080159 1080160 Frame Offset Frame Offset Frame Offset Line Offset Line Offset Line Offset e 6 F Pixel Offset Pixel Offset Pixel Offset e l Detay ms Detay ms Delay ms j 3 j 33388 m E Input loss nput loss input toss behaviour behaviour behaviour Fig 94 Example Workbench 1080i Delay Settings Screen o The example in Fig 94 shows 1080150 set to Ref 1 so a 1080150 signal will use frame sync settings in the 1080i FS tab 1080159 set to Lock to Input so a 1080159 signal will use delay settings in the 1080i Delay tab 1080160 set to Lock to Input so a 1080160 signal will use delay settings
49. 3 1 2 Configuring MADI to 56 or 64 Channels 296 B 3 1 3 AES Audio QUIPuts eue kv e pom AE Vac RUNE REPE 297 B 3 1 4 MADI Audio Outputs sssseseeeee ee 297 B 3 1 5 Audio Processing on the Output Module 298 B 3 1 6 Gain Control and Phase Invert LL 299 B 3 1 7 Stereo Mode hr 299 B 3 1 8 4925 Connections from the Audio Crosspoints 00000e eae 299 B 3 1 9 4925 Output Module LED Information 300 B 3 2 5923 4 Sirius 840 850 Standard Video Output Module 302 B 3 2 1 5923 5924 Output Module LED Information LL 303 B 3 3 5925 Sirius 800 Video AHP Output Module 305 B 3 3 1 Processing on the Output Module lisse esee 306 B 3 3 2 16 Channel Mixer 306 B 3 3 3 Channel Swap Shuffle 306 B 3 3 4 Gain control ssec cal exces iu e pega ie RE beds 307 B 3 3 5 Ph se Invert rawe ranr onde aor Rea RR CREAR RH PE ERES 307 B 3 3 6 5925 Connections to the Audio Crosspoints 0 00 eee eee 307 B 3 3 7 5925 Output Module LED Information 308 B 3 4 5937 Sirius 830 Standard Video BNC Fiber Output Module 311 B 3 4 1 5937 Output Module LED Information 312 B 4 Output Rear Panel 313 B 4 1 1298 Sirius 800 Balanced AES Output Rear Panel 313 B 5 Multiviewer Modules LL 314 B 5 1 5932 Sirius 850 Multiviewer Output Module 314 B 5 1 1 5932 Multiviewer Output Module LED Information 4
50. 3 3 5 B 3 3 6 Important Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 307 2014 Snell Limited www snellgroup com Modules No Longer Supplied With New Systems B 3 3 7 5925 Output Module LED Information Table 93 shows the LED color code on the 5925 output module and Fig 191 shows the front edge of the output module LED Color Label Detail Normal Working Status FPGA 1 status FPGA 2 status FPGA 3 status FPGA 4 status Each Pair of FPGA LEDS Flashing rapidly between Red amp Green 2 Hz each LED starting up Green On Solid amp Red Off normal state working correctly Green Off amp Red On Solid FPGA programming fault found Remove module and refit to force a reboot Red amp Green Flashing very rapidly in sync 4 Hz each LED A change has been made to the module settings database in RAM but it has not yet been written to flash memory This is not a fault and the flash memory will be updated after 10 seconds of no audio setting changes being made Do not remove power from the module while this indication is present as the flash may become corrupted Other indications are displayed when performing a firmware upgrade see the Sirius 800 Maintenance amp Upgrade manual for details Power OK Power to the module On Solid working correctly Local Command OK Receiving messages from local Nucleus control module the Nucleus controller in this frame Flashing receivi
51. 33 Reference Offset Configuration Nucleus2 2463 only The offset is set by using the Up and Down arrows or dragging the slider To set the offset back to zero touch the Zero button The maximum offset that can be set for all video standards is one frame Note If the derived reference standard is altered after an offset has been set then the previous offset time will remain as the offset This will probably need to be changed for the new reference standard To return to the Derived Reference Control screen touch the Reference Crosspoint button see Fig 32 To return to the Derived Reference status screen touch the Back button Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 63 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Door PC 5 4 Redundant Crosspoint Control 5 4 1 Video Crosspoint Matrix Status Screens The Main Video Crosspoint Matrix Status screen displays the status of the main and redundant video crosspoint modules The Expansion Video Crosspoint Status screen displays the same information for the expansion video crosspoints Sirius 850 only The screens are also used to switch between video crosspoint modules if a video crosspoint module needs to be replaced Note The Main Video Crosspoint Matrix Status screen for the Sirius 830 differs from the Sirius 840 and 850 screen because the Sirius 830 has a maximum of two crosspoint cards compared with the maximum of five crosspoint modules that can be fitted to the 840 and
52. 36 60 84 108 52 12 36 60 84 108 11 13 37 61 85 109 53 13 37 61 85 109 12 14 38 62 86 110 54 14 38 62 86 110 13 15 39 63 87 111 55 15 39 63 87 111 14 16 40 64 88 112 56 16 40 64 88 112 15 17 41 65 89 113 57 17 41 65 89 113 16 18 42 66 90 114 58 18 42 66 90 114 d 19 43 67 91 115 59 19 43 67 91 115 18 20 44 68 92 116 60 20 44 68 92 116 19 21 45 69 93 117 61 21 45 69 93 117 Table 17 Balanced AES Rear Panel 62 Way High Density AES Socket Pin Outs Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 118 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Input Rear Panels and Input Modules Socket1 AES Socket2 AES Socket3 AES Socket 4 AES Socket 5 AES EUR Balanced Balanced Balanced Balanced Balanced Input Input Input Input Input 20 224 464 70 94 118 62 22 46 70 94 118 41 23 474 71 95 119 42 23 47 71 95 119 39 24 48 72 96 120 40 24 48 72 96 120 21 N C N C N C N C N C 26t038 Signal GND Signal GND Signal GND Signal GND Signal GND Table 17 Balanced AES Rear Panel 62 Way High Density AES Socket Pin Outs Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 119 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Input Rear Panels and Input Modules 9 10 Unbalanced AES Input Rear Panels with MADI Inputs 9 10 1 Sirius 830 1357 Unbalanced AES Input Rear Panel with MADI Inputs The 1357 unbalanced AES input rear panel has 5
53. 4 2 1 Audio Crosspoint Failure 2 0 0 cece 71 5 5 Nucleus Info 0 0000 teenies 72 5 6 Miscellaneous ioo se ERR a get Rea ea RE RR RO rk XAR ee ed ee dL 73 5 6 1 C icu cdi dre s OR ae VOR RR RC Y RR TRUE a 73 5 6 2 Dial Up Routing Video 75 5 6 3 Dial Up MOMIOL errs rra eieaa En III 77 6 Catsii Functionality 0 0 000 cece 79 6 1 Signal Status stag weird e aa i eee Daw eer ee ae E ERR us 80 6 1 1 Video Signal Catsii Colors LL 80 6 1 2 MADI Audio Catsii Colors LL 81 6 2 I O Connector Identification 81 6 2 1 Door PC Catsii Control LL 82 6 3 Workbench Catsii Control LL 82 7 External Control 00 0000 ccc tenes 83 7 1 Control Panels iure e Pome Ea s 83 7 1 1 High Density Button Panels 83 7 1 2 Standard Density Panels 83 7 1 3 2RU Dial up XY Panel i 83 7 1 4 2RU Dial up Multibus 8 Bus Panels 83 7 1 5 2RU Dial up Multibus 4 Bus Panels 84 7 2 Older Control Panels 84 7 2 1 6700 series 1RU nea asiaa naoa a i aea a a a a A a A e a 84 T22 0276 2RU si iesu d Pee dae pat a n E ides 84 72360277 2RU x eds Oa eg ha E a Sade sae BAR ee ae 85 7 3 Default Serial Port Configuration LL 86 Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 4 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Contents 8 Module Locations cee eae 87 8 1 Front Module and Rear Panel Compatibility llle 87 8 2 SINUS 830 orsi Faq dpud Shani Gn ROI uites aged fas 90 8 2 1 Siri
54. 5 1 with the 1291 rear panel e The 5931 multiviewer output module is a direct replacement for the 5932 when it is used with the 1291 rear panel 5932 modules are no longer available and are mentioned here for users that already have them fitted If two 1291 rear panels are used then the second rear panel is 419 fitted in the top multiviewer slot and numbered as follows 73 If one 1291 rear panel is used it is fitted in the bottom multiviewer 47 slot and numbered as follows 8 2 Fig 156 1291 Sirius 850 Multiviewer Coax Rear Panel Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 231 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Multiviewer and Input Output Monitoring Modules Issue 5 Rev2 Page 232 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Nucleus Router Control Modules 14 Nucleus Router Control Modules Note The Nucleus router control modules are real time router control cards which perform the following functions e interface to all the external devices control system panels and so on through Ethernet and serial port connections e Provides redundant control connections on RS422 485 and Ethernet Store the local configuration of the router Contain all circuitry to manage multiple reference inputs e Set video and audio crosspoints in response to external commands and responds with tally information audio crosspoints Nucleus2 controllers only e Monitor the status
55. 8 3 8 Note 8 3 8 1 Sirius 850 Rear Expansion Output Connectors The Expansion section at the top of the Sirius 850 frame can be fitted with either 1290 or 1293 Expansion rear panels The 1290s are used to distribute expansion outputs to a second Sirius 850 frame and the 1293s provide expansion outputs directly from a single Sirius 850 frame The 1290 and 1293 output rear panels cannot be mixed in a router frame e Itis not possible to mix the 1290 and 1293 Output Rear Panels in a frame e tis not possible to monitor the 1293 expansion outputs e The 1293 expansion output rear panels are not fitted with Catsii LEDs e A second Sirius 850 frame cannot be used if one or more 1293 Output Rear Panels are fitted in a frame 1290 Expansion Output Rear Panel Configuration The output from the 5928 Expansion Output Module is via the 1290 Expansion Output Rear Panel 1129 to 1152 577 to 600 p Ai EEE Wt M RRRERREE Anidinininnio wd RR cad OUT Fig 65 Sirius 850 Expansion 1290 Output Rear Panel Configuration The panel has three DS Link output connectors and connects to the equivalent placed input connectors that are at the bottom of the Output Rear Panel of the second Sirius 850 frame Three 6 meter 19 5 foot DS Link cables are supplied with each 1290 expansion rear panel ordered See section 12 2 2 for details of the DS Link connections between the Sirius 850 frames Is
56. 850 Standard Video Fiber output module Yes Yes 5925 Sirius 800 Video AHP output module Yes No 5926 Sirius 800 Standard Video output module non expandable 5937 Sirius 830 Standard Video BNC Fiber output module Yes Yes 5938 Sirius 850 Standard Video output module expandable Yes Yes Only fitted if expansion is required between two Sirius 850 198 Xon frames 5949 Sirius 800 Video embedding amp AHP output module Yes No with delay and sync capability 4925 Sirius 800 AES MADI output module no audio delay 120 AES Pairs and up to 3 MADI outputs or Yes No 4925 Sirius 800 AES MADI output module no audio delay 12 MADI Main amp Redundant 4929 Sirius 800 AES MADI output module with audio delay 120 AES Pairs and up to 3 MADI outputs or Yes No 4929 Sirius 800 AES MADI output module with audio delay 12 MADI Main amp Redundant Table 58 2463 Nucleus2 Router Control Module Compatibility Table Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 235 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Nucleus Router Control Modules 2463Nucleus2 2450 Nucleus Modules Controller Controller Compatibility Compatibility Crosspoint Modules 5901 5905 Sirius 800 Series Video crosspoint module Yes Yes 5903 Sirius 800 Audio crosspoint module Yes No Control Fan Interface Module 2453 Control Fan interface module Sirius 830 Yes Yes 2455 Control Fan interface module Sirius 830 Yes No 2457 Control Fan
57. 9 4 RefAuto Selected RefAuto is set for all signals when the default database is being used When RefAuto is selected for a signal the Nucleus controller will look for a derived reference 2463 or a physical reference 2450 that exactly matches the signal Derived references are only available when Nucleus2 2463 controllers are fitted see section 3 9 1 for details Note y f RefAuto is selected for a Dual Link 1080p input signal the Nucleus controller will look for a 1080i reference with the same frame rate as the input signal e Ifa matching reference signal physical or derived is present the controller will switch in accordance with SMPTE RP168 e famatching reference signal physical or derived is not present the router will crash switch 3 9 5 Manual Reference Standard Selected When a reference standard such as Ref720p60 is selected manually the Nucleus controller will look for a derived reference 2463 or a physical reference 2450 that exactly matches the selected standard Note Derived references are only available when Nucleus2 2463 controllers are fitted see section 3 9 1 for details fthe selected standard reference signal physical or derived is present then the controller will switch in accordance with SMPTE RP168 e Ifthe selected standard reference signal physical or derived is not present the router will crash switch Ifthe selected standard reference signal phys
58. 96 Socket 5 Inputs 97 to 120 For the wiring details for the 62 way D Type sockets see section 9 9 3 Fig 78 1352 Balanced AES Input Rear Panel Sirius 840 850 only Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 116 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Input Rear Panels and Input Modules 9 9 3 62 Way High Density Balanced AES Socket Pin Outs 22 AES Balanced Input 1 25 49 73 or 97 AES Balanced Input 3 27 51 75 or 99 AES Balanced Input 5 29 53 77 or 101 AES Balanced Input 9 O 7 31 55 79 or 103 AES Balanced Input O 9 33 57 81 or 105 AES Balanced Input O 11 35 59 83 or 107 AES Balanced Input O 13 37 61 85 or 109 AES Balanced Input O 15 39 63 87 or 111 AES Balanced Input 9 O 17 41 65 89 or 113 AES Balanced Input O 19 43 67 91 or 115 AES Balanced Input 21 45 69 93 or 117 D Q D O AES Balanced Input 23 47 71 95 or 119 21 62 AES stereo pair Groupings ALL other pins GND Chassis 42 Not Connected Fig 79 Balanced AES Rear Panel 62 Way High Density Socket Viewed from the Rear of the Router AES Balanced Input 2 26 50 74 or 98 AES Balanced Input 4 28 52 76 or 100 O
59. 96 Sockets 5 Outputs 97 to 120 For the wiring details for the 62 way D Type sockets see section 11 9 1 Fig 121 1356 Sirius 800 Unbalanced AES Output Rear Panel Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 194 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Output Modules and Output Rear Panels 11 9 1 62 Way High Density Unbalanced AES Socket Pin Outs 22 1 43 AES Unbalanced Output lesa de teers AES Unbalanced Output AES Unbalanced Output o 4 2 26 50 74 or 98 3 27 51 75 or 99 AES Unbalanced Output AES Unbalanced Output e 4 28 52 76 or 100 5 29 53 77 or 101 ee AES Unbalanced Output AES Unbalanced Output 9 9 6 30 54 78 or 102 7 31 55 79 or 103 o gt 8 5 Unbalanced Output AES Unbalanced Output 9 8 32 56 80 or 104 9 33 57 81 or 105 AES Unbalanced Output AES Unbalanced Output 9 9 10 34 58 82 or 106 11 35 59 83 or 107 eo 5 Unbalanced Output AES Unbalanced Output q 9 12 36 60 84 or 108 13 37 61 85 or 109 8 5 Unbalanced Output AES Unbalanced Output 9 14 38 62 86 or 110 15 39 63 87 or 111 8 AES Unbalanced Output AES Unbalanced Output __ _ 16 40 64 88 or 112 17 41 65 89 or 113 os 2 5 Unbalanced Output AES Unbalanced Output e e 18 42 66 90 or 114 19 43 67 91 or 115 AES Unbalanced Output AES Unbalanced Output de 20 44 68 92 or 116 21 45
60. AES Balanced Output 3 27 51 75 or 99 AES Balanced Output 5 29 53 77 or 101 AES Balanced Output 7 31 55 79 or 103 AES Balanced Output 9 33 57 81 or 105 AES Balanced Output 11 35 59 83 or 107 AES Balanced Output 13 37 61 85 or 109 AES Balanced Output 15 39 63 87 or 111 AES Balanced Output 17 41 65 89 or 113 AES Balanced Output 19 43 67 91 or 115 AES Balanced Output 21 45 69 93 or 117 AES Balanced Output 23 47 71 95 or 119 22 1 43 o0 eoo 0 6 0 0 6e 0 0 o e _oO _ eoo o eo o 0 6 0O D O D O 21 62 AES stereo pair Groupings 42 ALL other pins GND Chassis Not Connected Fig 120 Balanced AES Rear Panel 62 Way High Density Socket Viewed from the Rear of the Router AES Balanced Output 2 26 50 74 or 98 AES Balanced Output 4 28 52 76 or 100 AES Balanced Output 6 30 54 78 or 102 AES Balanced Output 8 32 56 80 or 104 AES Balanced Output 10 34 58 82 or 106 AES Balanced Output 12 36 60 84 or 108 AES Balanced Output 14 38 62 86 or 110 AES Balanced Output 16 40 64 88 or 112 AES Balanced Output 18 42 66 90 or 114 AES Balanced Output 20 44 68 92 or 116 AE
61. Detected Failed Incoming Stream and Failed Outgoing Stream will be reset to 0 XpntCardNone Yellow XpntCardRedundant Grey XpntCardMain Grey 10 5 5 2 Replacing an Audio Crosspoint Module without using the Door PC Note The fan assembly should be placed back into the closed position as soon as possible after opening as this ensures correct ventilation of the frame Failure to do this will result in failure In practice the maximum time that a fan assembly can be left open will depend on a number of factors such as ambient temperature frame loading crosspoint routings etc To ensure correct operation under all conditions the fan assemblies should be left open for no more than 4 minutes at a time Take care not to trap any cables when opening and closing the fan door Open the router door and then open the fan door to locate the audio crosspoint modules Identify the faulty audio crosspoint module the Route Fail LED will be flashing Red see section 10 5 1 for the location of the status LEDs Press the Reset button on the failed audio crosspoint module Fig 100 on page 155 so that the working crosspoint module uses its own audio system clock CLK Master LED On for the working audio crosspoint module see section 10 5 1 for the location of the CLK Master LED The faulty audio crosspoint module can be hot swapped for a working audio crosspoint module without causing any disturbance to audio on
62. Failure to do this will result in failure In practice the maximum time that a fan assembly can be left open will depend on a number of factors such as ambient temperature frame loading crosspoint routings etc To ensure correct operation under all conditions the fan assemblies should be left open for no more than 4 minutes at a time Take care not to trap any cables when opening and closing the fan door 2 Open the router door and then open the fan door to locate the audio crosspoint modules Issue 5 Rev2 Page 157 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Crosspoint Modules Check that the Route Active LED on the failed audio crosspoint module is off and then remove the failed audio crosspoint module see section 10 5 1 for the location of the Route Active LED Replace the failed audio crosspoint module with a replacement working crosspoint module and close and secure the fan door and router door The replacement audio crosspoint module is automatically tested and the Fault Present indicator will change back to Green if the replacement is fully working Touch the Fault Fixed button to move all of the routes from the redundant crosspoint module to the replacement audio crosspoint module The Audio Crosspoint Matrix Status screen should now return to its working state see Fig 36 on page 69 for button and parameter locations Fail Found indicator Green e Fault Present indicator Green First Failure
63. GND GND 16 18 42 66 90 114 58 GND GND GND GND GND 17 19 43 67 91 115 59 GND GND GND GND GND 18 20 44 68 92 116 60 GND GND GND GND GND 19 21 45 69 93 117 61 GND GND GND GND GND Table 43 Unbalanced AES Rear Panel 62 Way High Density AES Socket Pin Outs Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 196 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Output Modules and Output Rear Panels Pin Socket 1 AES Socket2 AES Socket3 AES Socket 4 AES Socket 5 AES Number Unbalanced Unbalanced Unbalanced Unbalanced Unbalanced Output Output Output Output Output 20 22 46 70 94 118 62 GND GND GND GND GND 41 23 47 71 95 119 42 GND GND GND GND GND 39 24 48 72 96 120 40 GND GND GND GND GND 21 N C N C N C N C N C 26t038 Signal GND Signal GND Signal GND Signal GND Signal GND Table 43 Unbalanced AES Rear Panel 62 Way High Density AES Socket Pin Outs 11 9 2 FGAEY 2502910A Unbalanced 62 Way AES to BNC Breakout Cable The optional breakout cable converts a single unbalanced 62 way high density AES connector to 24 unbalanced AES female BNC connectors The breakout cable is optional and not supplied with the AES rear panels Five cables are required for all of the AES connectors on each AES rear panel 62 Way D Type High 24 x Female BNC Density Plug Connectors AES number printed on sleeve of each cable 1 Metre 3 Feet 3 Inches Fig 123 RMYS 2502910A Unbalanced AES Breakout Cable 62 Way D Type to 24 BNC F
64. If the system has already been configured it returns to the state it was in all signal routing and monitor settings when it was last powered Nucleus2 2463 Controller I DI Steady Green Power OK dq Ol Flashing Green Controller Active Flashing Blue Controller Idle 1 Steady Green Master Controller Flashing Blue Slave Controller 2 q Flashing Green or Orange 3 al TET Pulsing Orange Controller Mismatch 4 q Off or Flashing 5 Not used Off 6 Not used Off 7 Nucleus 2450 Controller Green or Off D5 Flashing Green or Off D6 Blue or Off D9 Not used Off D10 Not used Off D11 Not used Off D12 Green or Off D13 7 Flashing Green Steady Blue or Off D14 il Steady Red Controller Mismatch D15 Cl i Blue Controller Active Purple Blue Red Controller Idle D4 T iS Ic Flashing Green Controller Active Flashing Red Controller Idle D16 Fig 18 Nucleus2 2463 amp Nucleus 2450 Controller LED State when Running Note e For full details of the Nucleus2 2463 Controller LED colors see section 14 3 2 For full details of the Nucleus 2450 Controller LED colors see section 14 4 1 Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 50 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Powering the Sirius 800 Routers 4 1 2 1 Configuration Errors The router controller gen
65. Input Module 5925 Video AHP Output Module Table 2 Licensed Options for Video Input and Output Modules Purchasable License Purchasable License Purchasable License Purchasable License Purchasable License Not Applicable Not Applicable Purchasable License Not Applicable Not Applicable If the SD card is removed from a module for more than 30 minutes the licensed options will cease to function on that module Routing will not be affected but remember that if any processing functions such as mixing shuffle gain Frame Sync Delay etc are in use they will be reset to their default values Replacing the licensing SD card will re instate the licensed options See the Sirius 800 Maintenance amp Upgrade manual for details on updating the module licenses Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 31 2014 Snell Limited assigned to any input Purchasable License Purchasable License Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Product Overview 3 5 2 Audio Module Licensing Options Important Audio Processing Gain Phase Invert Left Right Swap Sample Rate Left Both Right Audio Delay Convert SRC Both Mono Mix License Order Code Not Applicable Not Applicable S8A SRC Module 1 license per module 4915 Audio AHP Input Free License with Module sach module Not Applicable Not Applicable 4929 Audio AHP Output Free License with Free License with P rchasable License Module with Delay each module each module Module
66. Manual for details Fault Fixed button Switches the routes back to the main crosspoint module once it has been replaced Free Failed Crosspoint Moves all of the routes from the failed crosspoint module to the button redundant crosspoint module Also makes the redundant crosspoint module the Clock Master allowing the failed crosspoint module to be replaced The Route Active LED on the failed crosspoint module will go off The failed crosspoint card can be replaced without interrupting any crosspoint routing once the routes have been switched to the redundant crosspoint module 5 4 2 1 Audio Crosspoint Failure If an output module detects an error in the audio transport stream from the main audio crosspoint module or if the stream is not present it will use the transport stream from the redundant audio crosspoint module if fitted The Route Fail LED on the audio crosspoint module with the failure will flash red see section 10 5 1 for the location of the status LEDs Note e For information on replacing a failed crosspoint card see section 10 5 5 A typical example of how the buttons will look is listed below for button and parameter locations see Fig 36 on page 69 Fail Found indicator Red Fault Present indicator Red First Fail Detected Failed Incoming Stream and or Failed Outgoing Stream will display the first failed stream s Failed Action as configured in Workbench e XpntCardNone Grey XpntCardMain Yellow indicates the
67. Nucleus control module the router controller is corrupt or hasn t the Nucleus controller been received in this frame This communications error could be caused by a hardware failure or incorrect insertion Check that the module is inserted correctly If the Local Error LED is flashing at the same time as the Local Command OK LED is flashing it suggests a mismatch in the configuration of the Nucleus controller Check the controller configuration Remote Receiving messages Sirius 830 840 850 no expansion Command from remote Nucleus Off Expansion not used OK control module the Sirius 850 expanded to second frame Nucleus controller inthe Flashing receiving information and frame linked to this working correctly frame Remote Error with messages Sirius 830 840 850 no expansion Error from remote Nucleus Off Expansion not used control module the Sirius 850 expanded to second frame Nucleus controller in the Off normal state frame linked to this Flashing the command message from frame the remote router controller is corrupt or hasn t been received This communications error could be caused by a hardware failure or incorrect insertion Check that the module is inserted correctly and the four RJ45 connections between the frames are fitted correctly see section 12 2 If the Remote Error LED is flashing at the same time as the Remote Command OK LED is flashing it suggests a mismatch in the configuration of th
68. Page 142 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Input Rear Panels and Input Modules LED Color Label Detail Normal Working Status Remote Command OK Receiving messages from remote Nucleus control module the Nucleus controller in the frame linked to this frame Sirius 830 840 850 no expansion Off Expansion not used Sirius 850 expanded to second frame Flashing receiving information and working correctly Remote Error Error with messages from remote Nucleus control module the Nucleus controller in the frame linked to this frame Sirius 830 840 850 no expansion Off Expansion not used Sirius 850 expanded to second frame Off normal state Flashing the command message from the remote router controller is corrupt or hasn t been received This communications error could be caused by a hardware failure or incorrect insertion Check that the module is inserted correctly and the four RJ45 connections between the frames are fitted correctly See section 12 2 If the Remote Error LED is flashing at the same time as the Hemote Command OK LED is flashing it suggests a mismatch in the configuration of the Nucleus controller Check the controller configuration Fugue Status CPU status Flashing sequence Green Green Blue normal operation the CPU is programmed and running Brief Red Flash at startup normal Flashing Red CPU
69. Router Controller Card LEDs see section 14 4 1 Compact Flash Card See section 14 4 3 Reset Switch Fig 159 Nucleus 2450 Control Module Jumpers Factory Use Only Note Refer to the Workbench manual for details about configuring the Nucleus Controller The Nucleus controller has a default database use Workbench to configure the modules in the Sirius 800 Modules are configured from the Local Router hardware tab Advanced Configuration Edit Module Configurations in Workbench See the Workbench manual for full details The IP address of the Nucleus controller is found in the Config ini file see section 14 4 6 14 4 4 Nucleus 2450 Controller LEDs The LEDs on the Nucleus controller card are shown in Fig 160 and Table 66 lists the 2450 Nucleus controller LED functions Table 66 Pi DI 54 a D5 CI O D6 he QOL p10 T D11 ai i pi2 q p13 JLI D14 1 M D15 C DI6 Fig 160 Nucleus 2450 Controller LEDs Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 248 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Nucleus Router Control Modules Table 66 lists the 2450 Nucleus router control module LEDs LED D4 Description Active Idle Blue Active Purple Blue Red Idle D5 100Mb Ethernet Green 100 Mb Ethernet Off 10Mb Ethernet D6
70. See Crna son modules 577 to 1152 Destination 576 to 1151 1290 expansion output rear panels Multiviewer Outputs Destination 1292 to 1339 using two 1291 multiviewer 1 to 96 amp rear panels Destination 1364 to 1411 Destinations 1 to 576 are not used and do not respond to any control Multiviewer Outputs 1292 to 1431 only if two 1292 multiviewer MV Link rear panels are fitted no longer supplied Monitoring Outputs 1to4 Destination 16370 to 16373 Aupito pals 1 to 18432 Source 0 to 18431 Nucleus2 only Audia Cu pute 1 to 18432 Destination 0 to 18431 Nucleus2 only Table 65 Sirius 850 Input and Output Port Mapping Frame 2 of 2 14 3 6 Configuring Nucleus2 2463 Controller Replication When two router controllers are fitted in a Sirius 800 router they work as a main and redundant pair The active controller in the pair sends the inactive controller data such as crosspoint status module configuration and port configuration This means if the active controller fails the other controller in the pair has the latest information available to it at all times To enable this function each controller must be configured with the details of the other The replication address can be configured by using Workbench or RollCall Using Workbench 2463 Nucleus2 Router Control Module Navigate to ConfigurationItems ReplicatedPeer Name enter the name of the controller that will be the replicated peer as shown on the Workbench configuration screen IPAddr
71. See section 6 for details of the Catsii functionality Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 107 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Input Rear Panels and Input Modules 9 2 Sirius 830 1236 Video Fiber Input Rear Panel The 1236 video fiber input rear panel has 12 fiber SFP cages with two inputs per fiber SFP module The 1236 rear panel is used in the Sirius 830 with either the 5919 5915 input module 24 channel video with de embedder re clocking and AHP or the 5916 5917 input modules 24 channel video with re clocking Video Input 1 Video Input 2 ad Used Video Input 23 Video Input 24 Fig 70 1236 Fiber Input Rear Panel Sirius 830 only All the Fiber connectors on the 1236 rear panel have Snell s unique Catsii feature that illuminates each connector See section 6 for details of the Catsii functionality When ordering the router the rear panels can be specified with or without fiber SFP receiver modules When the rear panels are ordered as spares they are supplied without Fiber SFP receiver modules and these must be ordered separately The Snell order code is shown below Fiber SFP Receiver Module Order Code SRR 3 Fiber SFP 2 channel 1260 1620nm receiver 3G HD SD MADI Capable Max 12 per rear panel Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 108 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Input Rear Panels and Input Modules 9 3 Sirius 830 1303 MADI BNC Input Rear Panel The 1303 MADI BNC
72. Sirius 830 Redundant Video Crosspoint Operation 149 10 3 Sirius 840 850 Video Crosspoint Arrangement lesus 150 10 3 1 Sirius 840 850 Redundant Crosspoint Operation 151 10 4 Video Crosspoint Failure llle 152 10 4 1 Replacing a Failed Video Crosspoint Module using the Door PC 152 10 5 5903 Sirius 800 Audio Crosspoint Module ce eae 154 10 5 1 5903 Audio Crosspoint Module LED Information 155 10 5 2 Sirius 800 Audio Crosspoint Arrangement asussaan uaaa 156 10 5 3 Audio Crosspoint Operation 156 10 5 4 Redundant Audio Crosspoint Operation 156 10 5 5 Replacing a Failed Audio Crosspoint Module 157 10 5 5 1 Replacing an Audio Crosspoint Module using the Door PC 157 10 5 5 2 Replacing an Audio Crosspoint Module without using the Door PC 158 10 6 Enabling Disabling Video Audio Redundancy s s asasan anaana 159 10 6 1 Video Redundancy 0 0 0 0 cee res 159 10 6 2 Audio Redundancy Nucleus2 2463 Controller Only 160 10 7 Configuring Video Audio Crosspoint Failure Action 161 11 Output Modules and Output Rear Panels 163 11 1 4929 Sirius 800 Audio AES MADI Output Module with Audio Delay 163 11 1 1 Duplicate MADI Outputs 00 00 0000 cee 164 11 1 2 Configuring MADI to 56 or 64 Channels 164 11 1 3 AES Audio Outputs i akaa RR RR ER
73. Sirius 830 Video amp Audio Input amp Output Monitoring Module LEDS gus seat gare Re api a di e e cbe acd ar RORIS eA AR 224 13 8 5930 Sirius 840 850 Input and 5933 Output Monitoring Modules 225 13 8 1 5930 Sirius 840 850 Input Monitoring Crosspoint Module 225 13 8 1 1 5930 Sirius 840 850 Input Monitoring Crosspoint Module LEDs 226 13 8 2 5933 Sirius 840 850 Output Monitoring Module 227 13 8 2 1 5933 Sirius 840 850 Output Monitoring Module LEDs 228 13 9 1237 Sirius 830 Monitoring Rear Panel 229 13 10 1309 Sirius 830 840 Multiviewer Coax Rear Panel 230 13 11 1291 Sirius 850 Multiviewer Coax Rear Panel 231 Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 7 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Contents 14 Nucleus Router Control Modules cece eee 233 14 1 Workbench LL 234 14 1 1 Initial Connection and Configuration Steps 234 14 2 Nucleus Router Controller Compatibility 235 14 3 2463 Nucleus2 Router Control Module 237 14 91 Reset Button sies Rer Rd ai he ee ae ae 237 14 3 2 2463 Nucleus2 Router Control Module LEDs 238 14 3 3 2463 Nucleus2 Router Control Module LEDs at Startup Reset 240 14 3 4 2463 Nucleus2 Router Control Module LEDs on Database Push 240 14 3 5 Nucleus2 2463 Sirius 800 Input and Output Port Mapping 241 14 3 5 1 Sirius 830 Input and Output Port Mapping
74. Synchronization is achieved by dropping or repeating video frames when the Frame Buffer is empty or full Selecting audio post synchronization means that when a video frame is dropped or repeated a frame of audio will also be dropped or repeated Selecting audio pre synchronization means that when a video frame is dropped or repeated the audio will not be dropped or repeated so will no longer be associated with the original video frame resulting in lip sync mismatch Therefore Snell recommends that the synchronizers are used to re time video in synchronous systems only Video AHP Detected Standard 1080p30 Input Frame Sync a Source 193 Summa PRESET ai lm hn emmm Standard Mode Standard Mode Frame Delay Frame Delay Sync Sync ll 625150 1080p23 4 input delay 1090159 la in i le MEM i Fig 92 Example Workbench Frame Sync Delay Summary Screen The video channel is selected using the dialup panel The Frame Sync Delay screen displays the currently detected video standard for the selected channel The configuration buttons at the top of the screen are used to configure the general behavior of the video channel The Summary tab displays all of the possible video standards and whether they are configured for frame sync or delay The signal standard is auto detected and the channel uses the settings defined in the appropriate Frame sync or Delay tab for that standard Function Function D
75. The new Parity setting will only take effect after the controller has been restarted Using the Generic Editor Navigate to RouterController Comms Comms 1 to 4 as required CommsType Serial Parity Parity options are Default SW P 02 Even SW P 08 None None Even Odd Push the new configuration to the controller see the Workbench user manual for details In a dual controller system make the updated controller active select it and click on the Copy to Partner button to update the second controller 14 4 10 Further Information The Sirius 800 Maintenance amp Upgrade manual contains details on updating the controller software firmware Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 259 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Nucleus Router Control Modules 14 5 14 6 14 6 1 Note Note Note Multi Drop Panel Communications Protocol SW P 06 This protocol is designed to communicate between a Snell router control system and serially controlled router Control Panels Up to sixteen devices may be daisy chained onto one multi drop control port each device requires a unique address identified using an address switch The control system database must hold configuration data for all devices The full specification for this protocol is available from the Customer Support section of the Snell web site http www snellgroup com support customer support General Switcher Protocol S
76. Warnhinweise Die angef hrten Service Reparatur Anweisungen sind ausschlie Blich von qualifiziertem Service Personal auszuf hren Um das Risiko eines lektroschocks zu reduzieren f hren Sie ausschlieBlich die im Benutzerhandbuch eschriebenen Anweisungen aus es sei denn Sie haben die entsprechende Qualifikation Wenden Sie sich in allen Service Fragen an qualifiziertes Personal Um das Risiko eines Elektroschocks zu reduzieren setzen Sie das Ger t weder Regen noch Feuchtigkeit aus Stellen Sie immer sicher dass das Ger t ordnungsgem geerdet und verkabelt ist Dieses Equipment muss an eine Netzsteckdose mit Schutzleiter angeschlossen werden und einen zuverlassig identifizierbaren Nullleiter haben Die Netzsteckdose sollte nahe beim Ger t und einfach zug nglich sein Explicaci n de los S mbolos de Seguridad ste s mbolo refiere al usuario informaci n importante contenida en la literatura incluida Referirse al manual VN ste s mbolo indica que voltajes peligrosos est n presentes en el interior No hay elementos accesibles al usuario dentro Esta unidad s lo deber a ser tratada por personal cualificado Advertencias de Seguridad Las instrucciones de servicio cuando sean dadas son s lo para uso de personal cualificado Para reducir el riesgo de choque el ctrico no llevar a cabo ninguna operaci n de servicio aparte de las contenidas en las instrucciones de operaci n a menos que se est cualif
77. Workbench manual for information Signal Type Monitored Monitor Output Port Configuration Required Discrete MADI or AES Audio Configure Monitor Output Port to Matrix 2 Audio 4915 4929 and 4925 modules Video Configure Monitor Output to Matrix 1 Video 5917 5919 5926 5928 5938 5949 Embedded audio is passed with the video signal 5913 5914 5915 5916 5923 5924 5925 and 5937 modules Table 48 Monitor Output Port Configuration The monitor output ports only output mono signals If an AES left or right channel is routed to a monitor output the relevant AES pair will be output as a combined mono signal Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 211 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Multiviewer and Input Output Monitoring Modules 13 2 Sirius 830 Monitoring and Multiviewer 13 2 1 Sirius 830 Multiviewer Outputs Only no monitoring 5902 qty 1 Multiviewer Crosspoint Module e 5931 qty 1 3 Multiviewer Output Module s 1309 rear panel qty 1 3 Multiviewer Rear Panel s Video Audio Inputs 5902 Multiviewer Crosspoint Module see section 13 5 Up to three 5931 Multiviewer Output Modules see section 13 6 1 5931 5931 5931 ib Up to three 1309 Multiviewer Coax Mv Rear Panels see section 13 10 1 to 48 49 to 96 97 to 140 GE GEH Fig 134 Multiviewer Outputs Only No Monitoring Option Sirius 830 13 2 2 Sirius 830 Input output Monitoring Only no multiviewer outputs 5939
78. and channel swap shuffle The audio processing tools are a licensed feature which must be purchased for each module they are needed on see section 3 5 for details The audio input 4915 and output 4929 amp 4925 modules include gain control phase invert and stereo mode left right swap left both right both or mono mix The 4915 4929 and 4925 audio processing tools are supplied free of charge for each audio module In addition to the standard processing tools described above the 4929 audio output module offers Audio Delay and Sample Rate Conversion SRC which are licensed features that must be purchased for each module they are needed on see section 3 5 for details Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 23 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Product Overview 3 1 6 Audio Phasing In a synchronous system multi channel audio passing through the router remains co timed on all channels of like signal format across the entire router There are three signal formats embedded audio MADI and AES Embedded audio is further broken down into sub formats of SD HD and 3G Router and processing delays are managed by the router so that co timed audio entering the router from any like format will remain co timed on the output of the router The example below shows audio from various router inputs embedded on a video channel of a video output module The audio inputs could equally have been routed to an audio output module a
79. cages with two outputs per fiber SFP module The 1296 rear panel is used with either the 4929 4925 12 channel MADI output module with AHP a duplicate of each MADI channel is output along with the main output or 5924 video output module 24 channel video with re clocking Video Output 1 Video Output 2 when used with a 5924 video output module P Of MADI Output 1a MADI Output 2a MADI Output 1b MADI Output 2b When used with a 4929 4925 audio output module Sirius 850 Expansion Connectors a b C When used with a 5924 video output module MADI Output 11a MADI Output 12a MADI Output 11b MADI Output 12b i oslLILILILI O LILI Video Output 23 Video Output 24 MADI channel a Main output when used with a 5924 MADI channel b Duplicate output video output module See section 11 1 1 for details Fig 118 1296 Fiber Output Rear Panel All the fiber connectors on the output rear panel have Snell s unique Catsii feature that illuminates each connector See section 6 for details of the Catsii functionality When ordering the router the rear panels can be specified with or without fiber SFP transmitter modules When the rear panels are ordered as spares they are supplied without Fiber SFP transmitter modules and these must be ordered separately The Snell order code for the standard SFP transmitter module is shown below Fiber SFP Transmitter Module Order Code ST31ST31 3 Fiber SFP 2 ch
80. configuration of 36864 inputs by 18432 outputs The maximum number of audio crosspoints that can be used on each audio crosspoint module varies depending on which router the audio crosspoint module is mounted in see Table 32 Router Maximum Number of Audio Crosspoints Sirius 830 9216 inputs by 9216 outputs Max Sirius 840 18432 inputs by 18432 outputs Max Sirius 850 Not Expanded 18432 inputs by 18432 outputs Max Sirius 850 Expanded two frame system 18432 inputs by 18432 outputs Max Table 32 Maximum Number of Audio Crosspoints There are two horizontally mounted audio crosspoint modules that send signals to the output modules Sirius 830 For audio crosspoint module locations see section 8 2 Sirius 840 For audio crosspoint module locations see section 8 3 Sirius 850 For audio crosspoint module locations see section 8 3 3 The left hand 5903 is the main audio crosspoint module when the router is powered on and the right hand 5903 is optional for redundancy Connectors to the Motherboard LEDs SD SDHC Card Used for upgrading the Audio Crosspoint module firmware see the Sirius 800 Maintenance amp Upgrade manual for details Fig 99 5903 Crosspoint Module e Jumpers and Headers are present on the audio crosspoint module and these are for Snell Use Only n normal operation no Jumper links or headers are fitted Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 154 2014 Snell Limited
81. confirm what level of routing and processing the frame configuration supports Frame Mark 1 Frame Configuration Configuration S Standard Unmodified Description Frame Supported by Video Routing Only Frame no Video or Audio Configuration Processing Router Controller s Nucleus 2450 Fan Out Sirius 830 2453 Controller s Sirius 840 850 2452 Silver fan casings front Fans and rear with no letters stamped on them Mark 2 Frame Mark 3 Frame Configuration Configuration Standard amp Modified Blue Fan Frame Video amp Audio Routing Video amp Audio Routing Original Modified Frame Audio Processing Video amp Audio no Video Processing Processing Nucleus2 2463 Nucleus2 2463 Sirius 830 2457 Sirius 830 2455 blue boards Sirius 840 850 2456 Sirius 840 850 2458 blue boards Silver fan casings rear fan casings stamped with HF Front and rear fans with blue fan casings Table5 Router Frame Configuration e DO NOT fit Blue Control Fan Interface modules 2457 2458 in a router equipped with fans with Silver casings as this will damage the router and the router will stop working e DO NOT fit Green Control Fan Interface modules 2455 2456 2452 2453 in a router equipped with fans with Blue casings as this will damage the router and the router will stop working Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 47 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Product Overview Issue 5 Rev 2 Pa
82. contain the controller details 5 Configure or edit the router control module s e Push the configuration to the router control module s Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 234 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Nucleus Router Control Modules 14 2 Nucleus Router Controller Compatibility Two versions of the Nucleus router control module are available for the Sirius 800 router e The 2463 Nucleus2 router control modules support both audio and video routing e The 2450 Nucleus router control modules only supports video routing and cannot be used if any audio signals need to be routed Table 58 lists the compatibility between the Sirius 800 modules and Nucleus controllers 2463 Nucleus2 2450 Nucleus Modules Controller Controller Compatibility Compatibility Input Modules 5913 Sirius 840 850 Standard Video BNC Input module Yes Yes 5914 Sirius 840 850 Standard Video Fiber input module Yes Yes 5915 Sirius 800 Video AHP input module Yes No 5916 Sirius 830 Standard Video BNC Fiber input module Yes Yes 5917 Sirius 800 Standard Video BNC Fibre input module Yes Yes 5919 Sirius 800 Video AHP input module with delay and sync capability 4915 Sirius 800 AES MADI input module 120 AES Pairs and up to 3 MADI inputs or Yes No 4915 Sirius 800 AES MADI input module 12 MADI Main amp Redundant Yes No Output Modules 5923 Sirius 840 850 Standard Video BNC output module Yes Yes 5924 Sirius 840
83. control rear panel Fig 165 Control Fan Interface Module Video Processing Compatible Version Shown Connectors to the Motherboard LEDs Connectors to the Bottom Motherboard Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 265 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Control Fan Interface Module 15 1 Control Fan Interface Module Compatibility Three versions of the control fan interface module exist for each of the Sirius 800 routers Sirius 830 Control Fan Interface Module Supports 2457 Supports video audio routing and video audio processing Supports video audio routing and audio processing but 2455 cannot be used if any video signals need video processing Supports video routing and cannot be used if any audio 2453 signals need to be routed Table 73 Sirius 830 Control Fan interface Compatibility Sirius 840 850 Control Fan Interface Module Supports 2458 Supports video audio routing and video audio processing Supports video audio routing and audio processing but 2456 cannot be used if any video signals need video processing Supports video routing and cannot be used if any audio 2452 signals need to be routed Table 74 Sirius 840 850 Control Fan interface Compatibility Important When two control fan interface modules are fitted in the router they must both be the same version For the Sirius 840 850 for example either 2 x 2452 2 x 2456 or 2 x 2458 modules should be fitted e The
84. controller is corrupt or hasn t been received This communications error could be caused by a hardware failure or incorrect insertion Check that the module is inserted correctly and the four RJ45 connections between the frames are fitted correctly see section 12 2 If the Remote Error LED is flashing at the same time as the Remote Command OK LED is flashing it suggests a mismatch in the configuration of the Nucleus controller Check the controller configuration Table 22 4915 Input Module LED Information Fugue Status LED R LED G Power OK Local Command OK Local Error Remote Command OK Remote Error Fig 87 4915 Input Module LEDs Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 132 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Input Rear Panels and Input Modules 9 13 5917 Sirius 800 Standard Video BNC Fiber Input Module Note The 5917 standard video BNC fiber input module has 24 input channels and can handle SD ASI and HD signals up to 3Gb s Connectors to the Motherboard Sirius 830 Connectors to the 1234 1235 or 1236 Rear Panels 7 Sirius 840 850 Connectors to the 1349 1289 or 1305 Rear Panels Connectors to the Motherboard Fig 88 5917 24 Channel Video Input Module with 24 Channel Re clocking e Jumpers and Headers are present on the video input module and these are for Snell Use Only n normal operation no jumper links or heade
85. delay gain control phase invert and stereo mode left right swap left both right both or mono mix The audio processing is standard for each audio module Audio processing is controlled from Workbench RollCall or RollPod panels Fig 102 and Fig 103 show the order that the processing is applied to the audio signals Audio Transport Stream from Main MADI Outputs x 3 i i 8 S 5 Audio Crosspoint 9 card E a 2 25 t5 2 AES Output x 120 9 ay ES 5 9 2 8 a o o e Ln o oS c E 3 FE E S 2 i 20 2 Audio Transport ag 2 E 5 5 f Stream from Ed 2 O Redundant Audio Crosspoint card To Input Output To Input Output Sal or Paini Monitoring Monitoring Module License Color Code Free License with Module Input Output Monitoring selected from either the input or the output of the module pre or post processing See section 5 6 3 for details on how to configure this using the router Door screen Fig 102 Audio Channel Processing Block Diagram AES Rear Panel Audio Transport Stream from Main Audio Crosspoint card MADI Outputs x 12 Main x 12 Copies Audio Crosspoint MADI Encoder Audio Transport Stream from Redundant Audio Crosspoint card Auto Changeover Switch Audio Transport Stream Gain and Phase Invert Stereo Mode To Input Output To Input Output Monitoring Monitoring SI Module License Color Code Free License with Module Inpu
86. described in this manual is furnished under a license agreement and can not be reproduced or copied in any manner without prior agreement with Snell Limited or their authorized agents Reproduction or disassembly of embedded computer programs or algorithms prohibited No part of this publication can be transmitted or reproduced in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopy recording or any information storage and retrieval system without permission being granted in writing by the publishers or their authorized agents Snell operates a policy of continuous improvement and development Snell reserves the right to make changes and improvements to any of the products described in this document without prior notice Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 12 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Warnings and Precautions 2 Warnings and Precautions Explanation of Safety Symbols This symbol refers the user to important information contained in the accompanying literature Refer to manual This symbol indicates that hazardous voltages are present inside No user serviceable parts inside This unit should only be serviced by trained personnel Safety Warnings Servicing instructions where given are for use by qualified service personnel only To reduce risk of electric shock do not perform any servicing other than that contained in the operating instructions unless you are qualified to do so
87. door replaced with new door Sirius 840 850 only Input Module fan door replaced with new door Sirius 840 850 only Input Output Module fan door replaced with new door Sirius 830 only New Control rear panel assembly fitted Sirius 830 only New Alarm rear panel assembly fitted Sirius 840 850 only New rating plate fitted Nucleus 2450 controllers replaced by Nucleus2 2463 controllers Control fan interface modules replaced by 2457 control fan interface modules Sirius 830 only 2457 Control fan interface module boards are blue Control fan interface modules replaced by 2458 control fan interface modules Sirius 840 850 only 2458 control fan interface module boards are blue The modifications must be carried out with the router powered down The original shipping bars must not be refitted to a modified frame The shipping bars are no longer required as the new fan doors perform the same function Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 46 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Product Overview 3 11 1 Frame Configuration and Module Compatibility Important There are three possible configurations for each Sirius 800 router model in the field These configurations are listed in Table 5 Each configuration enables the router to work with particular input output modules and controllers Table 5 can be used to check if a router frame has been modified and identify which configuration it is This can then be used to
88. e Dest Audio E Processing Pe rapere eh MADI SRC Rate 4K B SRC Reference Ren i V snc Cane 7 on sn Ch1 16 Dest 769 CM Ch2 CRI Ch4 ChE Che Ch7 Ch8 Cha Chio Chit Chi2 Chi3 Chj4 Chis Chie PRESET L R L R L R L R L R L R L R L R a e a a D D D ee EE D lM O E E E O O LU 5 Q O O F 1 bj 3 lo see la xu ame ae lm se 3 e ue ae Cam ame Ts H3 Ts Ts 5 6 Fig 105 Example Workbench MADI Audio Processing Screen Showing SRC Settings SRC Operation e The audio outputs use sample rate converted to one of five references e Ref 1 Derived Reference 1 Video Ref 2 Derived Reference 2 Video e Ref 3 Derived Reference 3 Video Ref 4 Derived Reference 4 Video Ref 5 AES Reference input e Supported input sample rates from the audio crosspoint 32 kHz 44 1 kHz or 48 kHz e AES Sample rate conversion is applied to groups of eight audio pairs rather than individual channels All selected pairs in the group will be synchronous to each other and output at the same selected sample rate Deselected pairs will pass through with their sample rates unchanged e Supports conversion to 32 kHz 44 1 kHz or 48 kHz Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 167 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Output Modules and Output Rear Panels Note e When sample rate converting AES to 44 1 kHz the output must be locked to a 44 1 kHz AES re
89. for up to 3 MADI inputs Note f unbalanced AES inputs are required see section 9 10 for details The 1354 rear panel is used in the Sirius 830 with the 4915 120 channel AES MADI input module For the wiring details for the 62 way D Type sockets see section 9 9 3 and for details of the MADI inputs see section 9 11 MADS See section 9 11 for MADI 2 details MADI 1 Socket 1 Inputs 1 to 24 Socket 2 Inputs 25 to 48 Socket 3 Inputs 49 to 72 Socket 4 Inputs 73 to 96 Socket 5 Inputs 97 to 120 For the wiring details for the 62 way D Type sockets see section 9 9 3 Fig 77 1354 Balanced AES Input Rear Panel Sirius 830 only Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 115 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Input Rear Panels and Input Modules 9 9 2 Sirius 840 850 1352 Balanced AES Input Rear Panel with MADI Inputs Note The 1352 balanced AES input rear panel has 5 x 62 way female high density sockets for balanced AES audio inputs and HD BNC connectors for up to 3 MADI inputs If unbalanced AES inputs are required see section 9 10 2 for details The 1352 rear panel is used in the Sirius 840 850 with the 4915 120 channel AES MADI input module For the wiring details for the 62 way D Type sockets see section 9 9 3 and for details of the MADI inputs see section 9 11 ni See section 9 11 for details MADI 1 Socket 1 Inputs 1 to 24 Socket 2 Inputs 25 to 48 Socket 3 Inputs 49 to 72 Socket 4 Inputs 73 to
90. i S c Main Audio 28 s S 8 Crosspoint card 6 S 5 2 25 88 G SEES oc o Audio Transport 9 6 E Stream from lt lt Redundant Audio Crosspoint card Signal Color Code Module License Color Code S8AHP VA Input Output Monitoring selected from either the input or the output of the module pre or post processing See section 5 6 3 for details on how to configure this using the router Door PC Fig 190 Processing Block Diagram If any audio channels routed from the audio crosspoints are asynchronous to the video signal they are being embedded in the output module will use drop repeat to synchronize the audio channels with the video signal B 3 3 2 16 Channel Mixer There are 16 Mixers available per video output channel and each mixer can mix up to 16 channels of audio Each 16 channel mixer is used to mix two or more audio output channels together to create a single mono signal that is output from the mixer For example using Mixer 6 to mix the stereo pair of channels 1 and 2 would result in a single mono signal being output from Mixer 6 B 3 3 3 Channel Swap Shuffle The channel shuffler is used to change the channel order of one or more of the audio channels For example this might be used if a stereo pair arrives at the router as right left and they need to be swapped to left right to match the house reference Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 306 2014 Snell Limited www snellgroup com Modules No Longer Supplied With New Systems
91. includes removal of embedded audio VANC Data Blank On Blank all VANC interval Off Pass VANC except SMPTE defined switching line and line following Other Functions DVB ASI Handling Automatically detected and passed transparently Synchronization Method Video and audio frame drop repeat Audio Selection Pre or post video synchronization Freeze Field on interlaced standards Frame in progressive standards Minimum Delay Reference lock or free run 2 us to 7 us for all formats dependent on hysteresis state Synchronizer Hysteresis Window 5 US Table 100 5919 and 5915 Video AHP Input Modules Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 320 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Specifications 5919 and 5915 Video AHP Input Modules Embedded Audio Delay 5919 only optional Licensed feature see section 3 5 Embedded Audio Delay License Snell Order Code SBAHP VD 1 per module 24 channels Audio Delay Per audio input channel in steps of 0 25 ms in a range of 0 to 5 46 Seconds Embedded Audio Processing including de embedding 5919 amp 5915 optional Licensed features see section 3 5 Embedded Audio Processing License Snell Order Code S8AHP VA 1 per module 24 channels Audio phase Invert Available per mono or stereo signal NORMAL INVERT control on off Audio Gain Mute adjustment Per mono or stereo signal Si
92. input module has 24 fiber input channels 12 dual channel fiber receivers and can handle SD ASI and HD signals up to 3Gb s Connectors to the Motherboard LEDs Connectors to the 1285 BNC Rear Module or the 1286 Fiber Rear Module depending on the input module used Connectors to the Motherboard Fig 176 5913 5914 Sirius 840 850 Standard Video Input Module The 5913 Input Module is compatible with the 1285 BNC rear panel see section 9 5 The 5914 Input Module is compatible with the 1286 Fiber rear panel see section 9 6 Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 283 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Modules No Longer Supplied With New Systems B 2 1 1 5913 5914 Input Module LED Information Table 85 shows the LED color code on the 5913 and 5914 input modules and Fig 177 shows the input module LEDs on the edge of the module LED Color Function Detail Normal Working Status Power OK Power to the module On Solid working correctly Local Receiving messages Flashing receiving information and Command from local Nucleus working correctly OK control module the Nucleus controller in this frame Local Error Error with messages Off normal state from local Nucleus Flashing the command message from control module the the router controller is corrupt or hasn t Nucleus controller in been received this frame This communications error could be caused by a hardw
93. input output monitoring Extensive status reporting from Workbench control via the touch screen panel in the front door further Workbench status and control using an external PC running Workbench V3 Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 30 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Product Overview 3 5 AHP Licensing 3 5 1 Important The Advanced Hybrid Processing AHP features are enabled by the Snell Licensing system Licenses are enabled on a module by module basis allowing you to choose which input and output modules are enabled for audio and video processing See section 3 5 1 and 3 5 2 for details of the licenses available The licensing can be enabled on a module at any point without changing module hardware or removing the module from the router frame Table 2 and Table 3 show the licensed options that are available for each of the Advanced Hybrid Processing AHP input and output modules Video Module Licensing Options Embedded Audio Embedded Audio f Video Processing Processing Processing Gain Phase Invert 2 16 Channel Mix Delay E E Channel Swap ync y Shuffle License Order Code S8AHP VA S8AHP VD S8AHP VF 1 license per module 1 license per module l Note also requires 1 license 8 S8AHP VA on the module assignable channels Module 2 or output channels 5919 Video AHP Input Module 5949 Video AHP Output Module Modules no longer supplied with new systems 5915 Video AHP
94. input rear panel has 24 BNC connectors The 1303 rear panel is used in the Sirius 830 with the 4915 audio input module 12 channel MADI MADI Input 1a MADI Input 2a MADI Input 1b MADI Input 2b MADI Input 11a MADI Input 12a MADI Input 11b MADI Input 12b f t e ji t c f f t e f Not Used MADI channel a Main input MADI channel b Redundant input See section 9 12 for details Fig 71 1303 Input BNC Rear Panel Sirius 830 only All the BNC connectors on the 1303 rear panel have Snell s unique Catsii feature that illuminates each connector See section 6 for details of the Catsii functionality Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 109 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Input Rear Panels and Input Modules 9 4 Sirius 830 1304 MADI Fiber Input Rear Panel The 1304 MADI fiber input rear panel has 12 fiber SFP cages with two inputs per fiber SFP module The 1304 rear panel is used in the Sirius 830 with the 4915 audio input module 12 channel MADI MADI Input 1a MADI Input 2a MADI Input 1b MADI Input 2b Not Used MADI Input 11a MADI Input 12a MADI Input 11b MADI Input 12b MADI channel a Main input MADI channel b Redundant input See section 9 12 for details Fig 72 1304 Fiber Input Rear Panel Sirius 830 only All the Fiber connectors on the 1304 rear panel have Snell s unique Catsii feature
95. kHz nominal sample rate Table 100 5919 and 5915 Video AHP Input Modules Issue 5 Rev2 Page 322 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Specifications C 1 3 AHP Audio Inputs 4915 AES MADI Input Module AES Inputs Functional Signal Standard AES3 2009 Sample Rate 48 kHz nominal Synchronous or asynchronous to references or video input signals Format 20 bit or 24 bit transparent AES Inputs Electrical In terface 1352 1354 1355 1357 1297 and 1299 Rear Panels Number and Type 120 AES pairs per card Balanced AES 1352 1354 1297 and 1299 Unbalanced AES 1355 and 1357 Connector 5 x 62 way high density D type Sockets Input signal sensitivity gt 250 mV pk pk MADI Inputs Functional Signal Standard AES10 2003 56 or 64 channels 48 kHz sample rate Sample Rate 48 kHz nominal Synchronous or asynchronous to references or video input signals Audio Format 20 bit or 24 bit transparent MADI Inputs on AES Rear Panel 1352 1354 1355 and 1357 Rear Panels Number 3 Connector HD BNC 75 electrical impedance Impedance 75 Q nominal Cable Equalisation 200 m 650 Feet Belden 1855 or equivalent MADI Inputs on Coax Rear Panel 1285 or 1303 Rear Panels Number and Type 12 with main and backup inputs per signal auto fail over on signal loss or manual changeover Connector BNC to IEC61169 8 75 Q electrical impedance
96. lines and pixels or in milliseconds The offset for line sync is set in pixels or in milliseconds The offset settings can be preset for each standard of video signal that might be expected to be input to the channel Video offset is set in steps of 0 00001 ms up to a maximum of 14 frames for progressive video standards or 14 fields for interlaced video standards The embedded audio can be sourced from before or after the frame sync block using the Pre Post Selector as required Each video standard has a tab for frame sync configuration and a tab for delay configuration The signal standard is auto detected and the channel uses the settings defined in the appropriate Frame sync or Delay tab for that standard Summary Frame Sync Enabled Audio Selection Sync Function LL PrePost Video processo Unable trame amp lina syne ws deo 1080 FS 1080i50 1080i59 1080i60 Frame Offset Frame Offset Frame Offset D 1 1 Line Offset Line Offset Line Offset _ gt 0 M o 0 Pixel Offset Pixel Offset Pixeli Offset O s E s Delay ms Delay ms Delay ms _ 40 _ mm 33 36666 gt 3332333 Input loss Input loss Input loss behaviour behavicur behaviour Fig 93 Example Workbench 1080i Frame Sync Settings Tab The example in Fig 93 shows 1080150 set to Ref 1 so a 1080150 signal will use frame sync settings in the 1080i FS tab 1080159
97. on the video AHP output modules or a combination of both Failed crosspoints and audio transport streams are detected by the output module s which automatically switch to the alternate audio crosspoint module if fitted Output Modules The standard video output modules 5926 5938 5923 5924 amp 5937 receive the video and embedded audio signals and transmit them to the router outputs The AHP video output modules 5949 amp 5925 can embed up to 16 mono audio channels per video output if required These audio channels are routed from the audio crosspoint card and can originate from discrete audio inputs de embedded audio or a combination of both The audio replaces the original embedded audio that was routed with the video The audio channels can be manipulated directly on the video output module before being output from the router The audio output modules 4929 amp 4925 output either MADI only or a combination of AES and MADI depending on the rear panel that is fitted The audio channels are routed from the audio crosspoint card and can originate from discrete audio inputs de embedded audio or a combination of both Audio Processing Each of the AHP video input 5919 amp 5915 and output 5949 amp 5925 modules contains a powerful processing engine that can manipulate the individual audio channels passing through them The 5919 5915 5949 and 5925 audio processing tools include gain control phase invert 16 channel mixer
98. operation the CPU is programmed and running Brief Red Flash at startup normal Flashing Red CPU Error Remove module and refit to force a reboot FPGA status Flashing rapidly between Red amp Green 2 Hz each LED starting up Green On Solid amp Red Off normal state working correctly Green Off amp Red On Solid FPGA programming fault found Remove module and refit to force a reboot Red amp Green Flashing very rapidly in sync 4 Hz each LED A change has been made to the module settings database in RAM but it has not yet been written to flash memory This is not a fault and the flash memory will be updated after 10 seconds of no audio setting changes being made Do not remove power from the module while this indication is present as the flash may become corrupted Other indications are displayed when performing a firmware upgrade see the Sirius 800 Maintenance amp Upgrade manual for details Power to the module On Solid working correctly Receiving messages from local Nucleus control module the Nucleus controller in this frame Flashing receiving information and working correctly Error with messages from local Nucleus control module the Nucleus controller in this frame Off normal state Flashing the command message from the router controller is corrupt or hasn t been received This communications error could be caused by a hardware failure or incorrect in
99. operation the main crosspoint module generates the audio system clock and the redundant crosspoint module is slaved to that Displays the action that will be carried out by the router when a crosspoint fails This is configured in Workbench see section 10 7 for configuration details Configuration options available are Move the failed stream to the redundant crosspoint default when shipped Move all streams from the crosspoint module with the failure to the redundant crosspoint module First Failure Detected shown for Left and Right Audio Crosspoint Modules Failed Incoming Stream Failed Outgoing Stream Displays the first incoming and first outgoing streams to fail on each Audio Crosspoint module If all display zero and the Fail Found status is red then an entire crosspoint module has failed Check the Crosspoint Status of crosspoint modules to determine which card has failed If both display zero and the Fail Found and Fail Present LEDs are green then no fault has been found Totals shown for Left and Right Audio Crosspoint Modules Input Syncs OK Input Sync Faults Input Syncs in Use Input Stream OK Input Stream Faults Output Stream OK Output Stream Fault Output Stream in Use Displays the total number of successful input syncs for the audio crosspoint module Displays the total number of failed input syncs for the audio crosspoint module 0 No input sync faults good Displays the total n
100. qty 1 Input Output Monitoring Card e 1237 qty 1 Input Output Monitoring Rear Panel Video Audio Inputs Si 1237 5939 Input Output Monitoring Monitor Module see section 13 7 Output Process Video Audio Outputs For details of the Monitor 1 to 4 BNC connections see section 13 8 Input Output Monitoring selected from either the input or the output of the module pre or post processing See section 5 6 3 for details on how to configure this using the router Door PC Fig 135 Input Output Monitoring Only No Multiviewer Outputs Option Sirius 830 Issue 5 Rev2 Page 212 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Multiviewer and Input Output Monitoring Modules 13 3 Sirius 840 Monitoring and Multiviewer 13 3 1 Sirius 840 Multiviewer Outputs Only no monitoring 5902 qty 1 Multiviewer Crosspoint module 5931 qty 1 to 3 Multiviewer Output module s 1309 qty 1 to 3 Multiviewer Coax Rear panel s 1 x 5902 Multiviewer Crosspoint Inputs Module see section 13 7 5931 Up to three 5931 Multiviewer Output Modules see section 13 6 1 set 5931 je e eg je Up to three 1309 Multiviewer Coax Rear Panels see section 13 10 1 to 48 49 to 96 97 to 140 Fig 136 Multiviewer Outputs Only No Monitoring Option Sirius 840 Issue 5 Rev2 Page 213 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Multiviewer and Input Output Monitoring M
101. set to Lock to Input so a 1080 59 signal will use delay settings in the 1080i Delay tab 1080160 set to Lock to Input so a 1080160 signal will use delay settings in the 1080i Delay tab Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 139 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Input Rear Panels and Input Modules Function Function Description XXXX FS tab where XXXX is the video standard eg 1080i FS Video standard configuration tabs for Frame Line Sync Select the number of frames of offset from the reference Only Frame Offset available if Sync Function is selected as Frame If Line is selected then the frame slider is not visible Select the number of lines of offset from the reference Only available Line Offset if Sync Function is selected as Frame If Line is selected then the frame slider is not visible Pixel Offset Select the number of pixels of offset from the reference Delay ms Select the offset in milliseconds from the reference When setting any one of the above values the other settings will automatically changes to reflect the setting being made Lock to Input Select Lock to Input to enable video delay for the Reference video standard Reference 1 to 4 Select which video reference the signal will be synchronized to Freeze Frame in the event of input signal loss the last good frame is Input Loss behavior output Black Screen in the event of input signal loss a black screen is output Table
102. sirius 840 850 only All the BNC connectors on the 1285 rear panel have Snell s unique Catsii feature that illuminates each connector See section 6 for details of the Catsii functionality Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 111 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Input Rear Panels and Input Modules 9 6 Sirius 840 850 1286 Video MADI Fiber Input Rear Panel The 1286 video MADI fiber input rear panel has 12 fiber SFP cages with two inputs per fiber SFP module The 1286 rear panel is used in the Sirius 840 850 with either the 4915 audio input module 12 Channel MADI or the 5914 video input module 24 channel video with re clocking Not Used MADI 4915 module MADI Input 12b Video 5914 Module Video Input 1 Video Input 2 Video Input 3 Video Input 4 Video Input 21 Video Input 22 Video Input 23 Video Input 24 MADI channel a Main input MADI channel b Redundant input See section 9 12 1 for details Fig 74 1286 Fiber Input Rear Panel Sirius 840 850 only All the Fiber connectors on the 1286 rear panel have Snell s unique Catsii feature that illuminates each connector See section 6 for details of the Catsii functionality When ordering the router the rear panels can be specified with or without fiber SFP receiver modules When the rear panels are ordered as spares they are supplied without Fiber SFP receiver modules and these must be ordered separately The Snell order code i
103. to Controller Devices ModuleConfigurations 280 TCatsiiControlModule Nucleus2 2463 Controllers Navigate to Devices Config2450 ModuleConfigurations Devices Devices 1 LocalRouterConfig ModuleConfigurations ModuleConfigurations 280 CatsiiControl 2 Select a parameter and then select the color from the drop down list Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 82 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com External Control T External Control 7 1 Control Panels The Nucleus controller supports the following control panels 7 1 1 High Density Button Panels The high density button panels are configurable as BPX or XY panels and are available as 78 key High density button panel e 60 key High density panel iH Fig 45 High Density Button Panel 7 1 2 Standard Density Panels The standard density panels are configurable as BPX or XY panels and are available as e 42 key Standard density button panel e 24 key Standard density panel Fig 46 Standard Density Panel 7 1 3 2RU Dial up XY Panel Dial up XY panel Fig 47 2RU Dial up XY Panel 7 1 4 2RU Dial up Multibus 8 Bus Panels Range of Dial up Multibus 8 bus panels mu Fig 48 2RU Dial up Multibus 8 bus Panel Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 83 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com External Control 7 1 5 2RU Dial up Multibus 4 Bus Panels 7 2
104. to 24 Socket 2 Inputs 25 to 48 Socket 3 Inputs 49 to 72 Socket 4 Inputs 73 to 96 Socket 5 Inputs 97 to 120 For the wiring details for the 62 way D Type sockets see section 9 10 3 Fig 81 1355 Unbalanced AES Input Rear Panel Sirius 840 850 only Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 121 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Input Rear Panels and Input Modules 9 10 3 62 Way High Density Unbalanced AES Socket Pin Outs 22 1 43 AES Unbalanced Input 1 25 49 73 or 97 S AES Unbalanced Input 1q 3 27 51 75 or 99 D AES Unbalanced Input S 5 29 53 77 or 101 AES Unbalanced Input e 9 7 31 55 79 or 103 AES Unbalanced Input _ 9 33 57 81 or 105 AES Unbalanced Input 6 9 11 35 59 83 or 107 AES Unbalanced Input e e 13 37 61 85 or 109 AES Unbalanced Input e 9 15 39 63 87 or 111 AES Unbalanced Input 9 9 17 41 65 89 or 113 AES Unbalanced Input e6 19 43 67 91 or 115 AES Unbalanced Input 21 45 69 93 or 117 oe 8 AES Unbalanced Input 23 47 71 95 or 119 21 AES stereo pair Groupings GND o 62 42 ALL other pins GND Chassis Not Connected Viewed from the Rear of the Router 9 9 AES Unbalanced Input 9
105. x 62 way female high density sockets for unbalanced AES audio inputs and HD BNC connectors for up to 3 MADI inputs Note If balanced AES inputs are required see section 9 9 1 for details The 1357 rear panel is used in the Sirius 830 with the 4915 120 channel AES MADI input module For the wiring details for the 62 way D Type sockets see section 9 10 3 and for details of the MADI inputs see section 9 11 Md See section 9 11 for MADI2 details MADI 1 Socket 1 Inputs 1 to 24 Socket 2 Inputs 25 to 48 Socket 3 Inputs 49 to 72 Socket 4 Inputs 73 to 96 Socket 5 Inputs 97 to 120 For the wiring details for the 62 way D Type sockets see section 9 10 3 Fig 80 1357 Unbalanced AES Input Rear Panel Sirius 830 only Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 120 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Input Rear Panels and Input Modules 9 10 2 Note Sirius 840 850 1355 Unbalanced AES Input Rear Panel with MADI Inputs The 1355 unbalanced AES input rear panel has 5 x 62 way female high density sockets for unbalanced AES audio inputs and HD BNC connectors for up to 3 MADI inputs If balanced AES inputs are required see section 9 9 2 for details The 1355 rear panel is used in the Sirius 840 850 with the 4915 120 channel AES MADI input module For the wiring details for the 62 way D Type sockets see section 9 10 3 and for details of the MADI inputs see section 9 11 MADI 3 MADI 2 RI 9 11 for MaDI 1 Sets Socket 1 Inputs 1
106. 0 shows the front edge of the module LEDs LED Color Function Detail Normal Working Status Power OK Power to the card On Solid working correctly Command OK Receiving messages from local Nucleus control module the Nucleus controller in this frame Flashing receiving information and working correctly Command Error Error with messages from local Nucleus control module the Nucleus controller in this frame Off normal state Flashing the command message from the router controller is corrupt or hasn t been received This communications error could be caused by a hardware failure or incorrect insertion Check that the module is inserted correctly If the Command Error LED is flashing at the same time as the Command OK LED is flashing it suggests a mismatch in the configuration of the Nucleus controller Check the controller configuration Table 47 5928 Sirius 850 Standard Video Expansion Output Module LED Information Power OK Command OK Command Error 5928 Fig 130 5928 Sirius 850 Standard Video Expansion Output Module LEDs Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 207 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Sirius 850 Video Expansion 12 5 1290 Sirius 850 Video Expansion Output Rear Panel The 1290 Sirius 850 Video Expansion Output Rear Panel is used to connect 24 signals to a second Sirius 850 expansion router drivin
107. 00 www snellgroup com Nucleus Router Control Modules 14 3 2 2463 Nucleus2 Router Control Module LEDs The LEDs on the Nucleus2 router control module are shown in Fig 158 and Table 59 lists the Nucleus2 Controller LED functions DI DI USB Connector Reset Button see section 14 3 1 for details Power OK er 1 2 L 3 q 4 q 5 al 6 d 7 d Fig 158 Nucleus2 Router Control Module LEDs LED Description Power OK pog e Green Power is connected and okay Off Power not connected or not okay Active Idle 1 Flashing Green Active Flashing Blue Idle Master Slave 2 e Green Master Controller Blue Slave Controller Watchdog Status 3 e Flashing Green Watchdog enabled and running e Flashing Orange Watchdog disabled Table 59 Nucleus2 Router Control Module LEDs Issue 5 Rev2 Page 238 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Nucleus Router Control Modules LED Description Serial Link Between Controllers Displays the status of the serial link between the active and idle controllers See LED 5 for further information e Blue pulsing Green Link okay data is being transferred Green pulsing Blue Link okay no data is being transferred Magenta pulsing Blue Link error no connection with the other controller 4 Indicates the other controller is not present not running or the serial link is not working e Orange Pulses Error received data for unconfigured device Indic
108. 1 to 16 1 7 32 x 1 BPX panel 1 to 32 2 8 48 x 1 BPX panel 1 to 48 3 9 Dual 16 x 1 BPX panel 1 to 16 1 and 2 10 16 x 4 X Y panel 1 to 16 1to4 11 32 x 4 X Y panel 1 to 32 1to4 12 48 x 4 X Y panel 1 to 48 1 to 4 13 32 x 16 X Y panel 1 to 32 1 to 16 14 24 x 12 X Y panel 1 to 24 1 to 12 15 Not Used 16 16 x 16 X Y panel 1 to 16 1 to 16 Table 12 Controllers and Addresses in the Default Database RS485 4 COM 6 General Switcher In SW P 02 for Centra or Aurora control Auto mode has been configured in the default database as the primary reference source for all inputs see section 3 9 for information on video and audio reference inputs Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 86 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Module Locations 8 Module Locations 8 1 Note Front Module and Rear Panel Compatibility Table 13 shows the front module and rear panel numbers that are currently ordered and shipped for new Sirius 800 router systems Table 13 also shows which front modules and rear panels can be used together Table 14 shows the front module and rear panel numbers that were shipped with earlier Sirius 800 router systems These can still be supplied for use when expanding the router or as replacements if required e A Sirius 800 router can contain a mix of front modules from Table 13 and Table 14 as long as the correct rear panels are used for each front module e All modules in Table 13 and Table 1
109. 1236 Rear Panels Fugue LED Sirius 840 850 Connectors to the 1349 1289 or 1305 Rear Panels Eight Diagnostic LEDs Snell Use Only Connectors to the Motherboard Firmware Licensing SD SDHC Card see the Sirius 800 Maintenance amp Upgrade manual for details Fig 90 5919 Sirius 800 Video AHP Input Module with Delay and Sync Capability Jumpers and Headers are present on the video input module and these are for Snell Use Only e n normal operation no jumper links or headers are fitted Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 136 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Input Rear Panels and Input Modules The 5919 input module is compatible with the rear panels listed in Table 25 Rear Panel See Section Sirius 830 1234 1235 BNC rear panel See section 9 1 Sirius 830 1236 Fiber rear panel See section 9 2 Sirius 840 850 1349 1289 BNC rear panel See section 9 7 Sirius 840 850 1305 Fiber rear panel See section 9 8 Table 25 5915 Rear Panel Compatibility 9 14 1 Advanced Hybrid Processing on the 5919 Input Module The 5919 video input module can manipulate the video and audio channels received from the input rear panels before outputting them to the video and audio crosspoint cards This makes it possible to customize the video and audio input channels to a house standard within the router Note Video and Audio processing are lice
110. 1237 Monitor Output Rear Panel x 1 Control Rear Panel standard fit non user replaceable part 1234 1235 Input BNC Rear x 12 1354 Input Balanced AES Rear x 12 1357 Input Unbalanced AES Rear x 12 1299 Input Balanced AES Rear x 12 1294 Output BNC Rear x 12 1302 Output Fiber Rear x 12 1295 Output BNC Rear x 12 1296 Output Fiber Rear x 12 1353 Output Balanced AES Rear x 12 1356 Output Unbalanced AES Rear x 12 1298 Output Balanced AES Rear x 12 e See section 8 1 for details on which rear panels that can be used with which front module e See section 8 2 4 for BNC and Fiber rear panel channel numbers and layout Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 91 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Module Locations 8 2 3 Sirius 830 Input and Output Module Locations Important Before adding modules to a Sirius 830 router check that the power supplies fitted can supply sufficient power to the router The router power requirements are described in Appendix B 1 1 Fig 55 shows the Input and Output Modules as they are located in the Sirius 830 frame Fig 55 Sirius 830 Input and Output Module Locations Front View Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 92 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Module Locations 8 2 4 Sirius 830 Rear Input Output Connector Configuration Frames that are not fully populated with input or output rear panels have blanking plates fi
111. 13 Fig 9 Sirius 830 frame with BNC Input Output Rear View Ethernet Video Monitor Not Used 43 2 1 Ld 4321 Audio Monitor Fig 10 Sirius 830 1237 Monitoring Outputs For details of the 1237 monitoring outputs see section 13 9 For details of the Sirius 830 BNC rear connectors see section 8 3 For details of the Sirius 830 Fiber rear connectors see section 8 3 Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 35 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Product Overview 3 7 Sirius 840 Frame Overview 3 7 1 Frame Architecture Fig 11 shows the main features of a non expandable Sirius 840 router frame 48 96 or 140 Multiviewer Outputs Multiviewer Outputs DIN 1 0 2 3 and gt and Monitoring Outputs Up to 4 Input Output Monitoring Outputs BNC Video Inputs Up to 576 video and up to 18432 and lt audio inputs depending on Audio Inputs configuration 576 Redundant Video Y 4 x Main Video Crosspoint Modules 1 x Redundant Video Crosspoint Crosspoint Matrix Module Optional 1 x Main Audio Crosspoint Module 2 i i Audio V 1 x Redundant Audio Crosspoint p Module Optional Up to 576 video and up to 18432 3 audio outputs depending on configuration Video Outputs T and Audio Outputs Fig 11 Sirius 840 Router Frame Architecture Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 36 2014 Snel
112. 14 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Nucleus Router Control Modules Using RollCall Note e f RollCall does not connect to the router controller check that the controller is enabled for RollCall see section 14 3 9 for details Use the RollCall application or the RollCall web applet to connect to the router Double click on the controller in the network tree and select the Comms Setup screen Available Settings Unit IP Address set the IP address of the controller e Subnet Mask set to match the network e Default Gateway Address if unknown or not required enter 0 0 0 0 e DCCP Port if blank then the network port will be the default value which is 2007 Note The changes will not take effect until the controller has been restarted Click on the Restart Unit button to restart the Nucleus2 router control module e Having changed the controller IP address remember to use its new IP address to connect to it e Ifthe controller is one of a pair in the router the other controller s replication address details must be changed to match the new IP address details set see section 14 3 6 for details 14 3 8 Setting the Network Communication Speed of a Nucleus2 Controller The Nucleus2 network communication speed is set using the Workbench Online Editor in the IP address configuration section see section 14 3 7 for details Issue 5 Rev2 Page 245 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellg
113. 295 Sirius 800 Video MADI BNC Output Rear Panel The 1295 Sirius 800 video MADI BNC output rear panel has 24 BNC outputs The 1295 rear panel is used with either the 4929 4925 12 channel MADI output module with AHP a duplicate of each MADI channel is output along with the main output or 5923 video output module 24 channel video with re clocking Video Output 1 when used with a 5923 video output module MADI Output 1a MADI Output 2a MADI Output 1b MADI Output 2b When used with a 4929 4925 audio output module MADI Output 11a MADI Output 12a MADI Output 11b MADI Output 12b sirius 850 Expansion Connectors a l f f f f i f m f b Video Output 24 C when used with a When used with a 5923 video output module 5923 video output module MADI channel a Main output MADI channel b Duplicate output See section 11 1 1 for details Fig 117 1295 Sirius 800 Video MADI BNC Output Rear Panel All the BNC connectors on the output rear panel have Snell s unique Catsii feature that illuminates each connector See section 6 for details of the Catsii functionality Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 188 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Output Modules and Output Rear Panels 11 7 1296 Sirius 800 Video MADI Fiber Output Rear Panel The 1296 Sirius 800 video MADI fiber output rear panel has 12 fiber SFP
114. 3 Sirius 840 Output Monitoring Only no multiviewer outputs e 5933 qty 1 Output Monitor module Video Audio Outputs f 1x 5933 See section For details of the Monitor 1 to 4 BNC connections see section 16 2 Monitor 1t04 Output Monitoring selected from either the input or the output of the module pre or post processing See section 5 6 3 for details on how to configure this using the router Door PC Fig 138 Output Monitoring Only No Multiviewer outputs Option Sirius 840 850 13 3 4 Sirius 840 Input Output Monitoring Only no multiviewer outputs e 5930 qty 1 Input Monitor module 5933 qty 1 Output Monitor module Video Audio Outputs c 0 1 x 5933 Far 1 x 5930 See section 13 8 1 See section Pr 8 ocess Video Audio Inputs Monitor 1t04 For details of the Monitor 1 to 4 BNC connections see section 16 2 Input Output Monitoring selected from either the input or the output of the module pre or post processing See section 5 6 3 for details on how to configure this using the router Door PC Fig 139 Input Output Monitoring Only Option Sirius 840 850 Issue 5 Rev2 Page 215 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Multiviewer and Input Output Monitoring Modules 13 4 Sirius 850 Monitoring and Multiviewer 13 4 1 Sirius 850 Multiviewer Outputs Only no monitoring 5902 qty 1 Multiviewer Crosspoint module 5931 qty 1 t
115. 315 B 5 2 Sirius 850 1292 MV Link Rear Panel 316 B 5 2 1 Sirius 850 Multiview Link Outputs LL 317 Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 9 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Contents Appendix C Specifications ccc eee 319 CT Inp ts ce ns ke Ee dace t es e Rare Scd e d 319 C 1 1 Video Inputs LL 319 C 1 2 Video AHP Inputs i 320 C 1 3 AHP Audio Inputs rr dope Rue Rete emma 323 eas c C 324 C 2 1 Video Outputs 2 0 0 2 e 324 C 2 2 Video AHP Outputs LL 325 C 2 3 AHP Audio Outputs LL 327 C 2 4 Multiviewer and Additional Coax Outputs 577 to 1152 330 C 3 Control 22 nere nU RUM xao eue PARERE De DE dou FU ROS es 331 7 4 Physical ii cn coi ER E Edere ded CR Re Og te Rel ee weet 332 Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 10 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com About this Manual 1 About this Manual 1 1 This manual describes the Sirius 800 router range and the configuration of the various modules that can be added to the range Refer to the individual Installation and Quick Start manuals for details on how to unpack install and test the Sirius 800 routers and the Sirius 800 Maintenance amp Upgrade manual for maintenance information Refer to the Workbench manual for details on configuring hardware and software panels If you have any questions regarding the installation and setup of your product please refer to the Customer Service contact details see sect
116. 4 will work with any of the crosspoint modules e The 5901 and 5905 video crosspoint module variants can be mixed in a frame for details see section 10 Front Module Sirius 800 AES MADI input module 120 AES Pairs and up to 3 MADI Inputs MADI inputs not supported by 1299 and 1297 rear panels 4915 Section 9 12 or 12 MADI Main amp Redundant Sirius 800 AES MADI output module with audio delay 120 AES Pairs and up to 3 MADI outputs MADI outputs not supported by 1298 rear 4929 panel Section 11 1 or 12 MADI Main amp Redundant Rear Panel Sirius 830 1354 Balanced AES see section 9 9 1 1357 Unbalanced AES see section 9 10 1 1299 Balanced AES see Appendix B 1 1 Sirius 840 850 1352 Balanced AES see section 9 9 2 1355 Unbalanced AES see section 9 10 2 1297 Balanced AES see Appendix B 1 2 Sirius 830 1303 BNC See section 9 3 1304 Fiber See section 9 4 Sirius 840 850 1285 BNC See section 9 5 1286 Fiber See section 9 6 1353 Balanced AES see section 11 8 1356 Unbalanced AES see section 11 9 1298 Balanced AES see Appendix B 4 1 1295 BNC See section 11 6 1296 Fiber See section 11 7 Table 13 New Router Systems Front Module and Rear Panel Compatibility Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 87 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Module Locations Front Module 5917 Section 5919 Section 9 14 5926 Section 11 2 5928
117. 40 850 the crosspoint fan assembly must also be opened to access the input modules 2 Toremove the module from its socket pull on the two levers and slide the module out of the frame 3 Toinsert the module lift the levers and locate in the frame 4 Pushthe levers to fully lock the module 5 Close the front fan frame assembly making sure not to trap any wires Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 105 Module Locations 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Module Locations 8 5 Inserting and Removing Horizontal Modules Electrostatic Damage Static precautions must be observed when inserting and removing all system modules Remove Insert Fig 68 Inserting and Removing Horizontal Modules The horizontal module levers locate into the metalwork of the Sirius 800 frame allowing easy insertion and removal 1 To access the modules the associated module front fan assembly must be opened first Note e The fan assembly should be placed back into the closed position as soon as possible after opening as this ensures correct ventilation of the frame Failure to do this will result in failure e In practice the maximum time that a fan assembly can be left open will depend on a number of factors such as ambient temperature frame loading crosspoint routings etc To ensure correct operation under all conditions the fan assemblies should be left open for no more than 4 minutes at a ti
118. 44 5902 Sirius 800 Series Multiviewer Crosspoint Module There is no crosspoint redundancy protection Sirius 830 Output Monitoring is not available on the Sirius 830 when it is equipped with multiviewer outputs Sirius 840 850 If Input pre processing is monitored using the monitor outputs then multiviewer outputs should not be routed from inputs 1 3 5 and 7 of any video input module as they will display duplicates of the four monitoring outputs The multiviewer output of the 5902 is connected to up to three 5931 Sirius 850 up to two multiviewer output modules see section 13 6 for details Sirius 840 850 only The 5902 Sirius 800 series multiviewer crosspoint module provides up to four signals for input monitoring to the 5933 output monitor module see section 13 8 2 The 5933 output monitor module passes the signals onto the BNC monitor connectors on the control panel rear see section 16 2 Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 219 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Multiviewer and Input Output Monitoring Modules 13 5 2 5902 Sirius 800 Multiviewer Crosspoint Module LED Information Table 49 shows the LED color code on the 5902 Multiviewer Crosspoint Module and Fig 145 shows the front edge of the module LED Color Function Detail Normal Working Status Power OK Power to the module On Solid working correctly Command Command from the Control Flashing receiving inf
119. 49 and 5925 Video AHP Output Modules Video Processing 5949 only optional Licensed features see section 3 5 Video Processing License Snell Order Code S8AHP VF 1 license 8 assignable channels assigned to any input or output channels Frame Line Sync and Video Delay Frame Sync offset set in frames lines and pixels or milliseconds Line Sync offset set in pixels or milliseconds Video Delay set in pixels The video processing block can be used for frame line sync or video delay on a channel by channel basis but they cannot both be used on the same channel Input Standard 1125 1080 50P A amp B Level B dual link only 1125 1080 59P A amp B Level B dual link only 1125 1080 29i 1125 1080 25i 750 720 59P 750 720 50P 525 480 28i 625 576 25i Default Video Output Standard Last known good Controls per channel Genlock amp Video Delay Genlock Mode Lock to Reference Lock to Input Genlock H Phase 0 5H in pixel clock steps Genlock V Phase 0 5F in 1 line steps Video H Delay 0 1 Line in pixel clock steps Video V Delay 0 1 Frame in 1 line steps Video Delay 0 14 Pictures Picture Frame in progressive formats Picture Field in interlaced formats Reference Select Mode Configured for each input or output any of 4 looping references or internally derived references Other Controls Action on Freeze Black configurable Loss of Input HANC Data Blank On Off On removes all HANC data Note this includes r
120. 4x4 XPT Offset Derived Reference EN None 2 1080i B 720 B 10809 Audio Reference Configure References i a le s ed Fig 31 Reference Status Nucleus2 2463 only Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 61 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Door PC Derived Reference Control Nucleus2 2463 only This screen is used to configure the router video references the configuration is displayed dynamically so that you have a pictorial representation of the reference setup Before making any configuration changes please see section 3 9 Derived Reference Control External Reference 4x4 XPT Offset Derived Reference From Extemal Ref Denved Format Denved Reference ML wo gt enc Ref 3 I E Reference cu A cone Fig 32 Reference Configuration Nucleus2 2463 only The router has up to four derived references that can be configured to be used by the router when switching video signals Each of the four derived reference configurations work in the same way and are described below From External Ref drop down menus Select one of the four external BNC references BNC Ref 1 to BNC Ref 4 to be used for the derived reference BNC external references can be used for one or more derived references Derived Format drop down menus None The selected BNC external reference signal is passed straight through to the derived reference SD the selected external refe
121. 5914 Sirius 840 850 Standard Video Fiber Yes Yes Yes input module not Sirius 830 not Sirius 830 not Sirius 830 5915 Sirius 800 Video AHP input module Yes Yes No 5916 Sirius 830 Standard Video BNC Fiber vs vas Yos nou module not Sirius not Sirius not Sirius P 840 850 840 850 840 850 5917 Sirius 800 Standard Video BNC Fibre Yes Yes Yes input module 5919 Sirius 800 Video AHP input module Yes No No with delay and sync capability 4915 Sirius 800 AES MADI input module 120 AES Pairs and up to 3 MADI inputs or Yes Yes No 4915 Sirius 800 AES MADI input module 12 MADI Main amp Redundant Output Modules 5923 Sirius 840 850 Standard Video BNC Yes Yes Yes output module not Sirius 830 not Sirius 830 not Sirius 830 5924 Sirius 840 850 Standard Video Fiber Yes Yes Yes output module not Sirius 830 not Sirius 830 not Sirius 830 5925 Sirius 800 Video AHP output module Yes Yes No 5926 Sirius 800 Standard Video output module non expandable Mes Yes Nes 5937 Sirius 830 Standard Video BNC Fiber c a bed output module not Sirius not Sirius not Sirius 840 850 840 850 840 850 5938 Sirius 850 Standard Video output module expandable Yes Yes Yes Only fitted if expansion is required between not Sirius 830 not Sirius 830 not Sirius 830 two Sirius 850 frames 5949 Sirius 800 Video embedding amp AHP output module with delay and sync Yes No No capability Table 75 Control Fan
122. 6 x 576 Multiviewer S Outputs 1 t Video Outputs 1153 to 1292 16370 Multiviewer to 16373 outputs Monitoring Outputs Fig 163 Sirius 850 Single Router Diagram Noexpansion outputs used Main video inputs and outputs are 1 576 Expansion outputs used Main video inputs are 1 576 and outputs are 1 1152 e Outputs 16370 Monitor row 1 e Outputs 16371 Monitor row 2 e Outputs 16372 Monitor row 3 e Outputs 16373 Monitor row 4 e No expansion outputs used Mon Row Sources 0 575 outputs 0 575 Mon Row Sources 576 1151 inputs 0 575 Expansion outputs used Mon Row Sources 0 1151 outputs 0 1151 Mon Row Sources 576 1151 inputs 0 575 Single frame Outputs 1153 1292 are multiviewer outputs All numbers with an Asterisk against them are Base 0 Issue 5 Rev2 Page 263 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Nucleus Router Control Modules 14 6 1 4 Sirius 850 Dual Frame Sirius 850 dual routers connected together Sirius 850 Dual Frame System 1152 x 1152 Sirius 850 Frame 1 Sirius 850 Frame 2 576 x 576 P 576 x 576 Expansion K Expansion Outputs d Outputs a ES o a ES o TOEN H 576 x 140 Multiviewer Multiviewer i Outputs Outputs Video Outputs 1153 to 1292 Multiviewer 1293 to 1432 Multiviewer 16370 to 16373 outputs outpu
123. 625 SD SDI EN50083 9 DVB ASI SMPTE 292M 720p and 1080i HD SDI SMPTE 424M 1080p 3G SDI Impedance 750 Data rate 3 Mb s 3 Gb s Standard video rates re clocked all other rates auto bypassed Return loss gt 15dB 10MHz to 1 5GHz gt 10dB 1 5GHz to 3GHz Amplitude 800mV p p nominal DC offset lt 5V Cable Equalisation Automatic for Up to 350 m 1150 feet Belden 1694A PSF1 2M at SD rates Up to 200 m 650 feet Belden 1694A at HD Up to 140 m 460 feet Belden 1694A at 3G Table 98 Main Coax Video Inputs 5917 5919 5914 5915 and 5916 Video Input Modules used with 1236 1286 or 1305 Main Optical Input Rear Panels Number and type 24 per module re clocked removable video SFP modules Note Specifications are based on fitting standard SFP receivers Snell Order Code SRR 3 Connectors LC PC single mode fiber connection as standard Wavelength Wideband receiver 1260 1620 nm nominal Sensitivity 18 dBm Typical link length 10km 3 Gb s 20km 1 5 Gb s 30km 270MBit s Standards supported SMPTE 259M 525 and 625 SD SDI EN50083 9 DVB ASI SMPTE 292M 720p and 1080i HD SDI SMPTE 424M 1080p 3G SDI Table 99 Main Optical Video Inputs Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 319 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Specifications C 1 2 Video AHP Inputs 5919 and 5915 Video AHP Input Modules Video Processing 5919 only optional Licensed features see
124. 69 93 or 117 AES Unbalanced Output 22 46 70 94 or 118 AES Unbalanced Output 23 47 71 95 or 119 AES Unbalanced Output 24 48 72 96 or 120 21 62 AES stereo pair Groupings GND Ae T ALL other pins GND Chassis Not Connected Fig 122 Unbalanced AES Rear Panel 62 Way High Density Socket Viewed from the Rear of the Router Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 195 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Output Modules and Output Rear Panels Socket1 AES Socket2 AES Socket3 AES Socket4 AES Socket 5 AES ARIE Unbalanced Unbalanced Unbalanced Unbalanced Unbalanced Output Output Output Output Output 24 1 25 49 73 97 25 GND GND GND GND GND 22 2 26 50 744 98 23 GND GND GND GND GND 1 34 274 51 75 99 43 GND GND GND GND GND 2 4 28 52 76 100 44 GND GND GND GND GND 3 5 29 53 77 101 45 GND GND GND GND GND 4 6 30 54 78 102 46 GND GND GND GND GND 5 7 31 55 79 103 47 GND GND GND GND GND 6 8 32 56 80 104 48 GND GND GND GND GND 7 9 33 57 81 105 49 GND GND GND GND GND 8 10 34 58 82 106 50 GND GND GND GND GND 9 11 35 59 83 107 51 GND GND GND GND GND 10 12 36 60 84 108 52 GND GND GND GND GND 11 13 37 61 85 109 53 GND GND GND GND GND 12 14 38 62 86 110 54 GND GND GND GND GND 13 15 39 63 87 111 55 GND GND GND GND GND 14 16 40 64 88 112 56 GND GND GND GND GND 15 17 41 65 89 113 57 GND GND GND
125. 8 Input Signals Ch Signal Ch Signal a a Em L9 3 Ce gt a ud m 9 1 2 d Ome s E m Fig 27 Video Inputs Slot 1 vo aa a N IMI Video Input Switching Point References This screen displays the switch point reference configured for each video input of the selected module For details on using switch point references see section 3 9 Use the Next and Previous buttons to move through the modules Touch the Signal Formats button to view the incoming video signals for the selected module see Fig 27 Input Signals Ch Signal Ch Signal 1 Internal Ref 1 13 Ref Auto 2 Internal Ref 1 14 Ref Auto 3 Internal Ref 1 15 Ref Auto 4 Internal Ref 1 16 Ref Auto 5 Internal Ref 1 17 Ret Auto 6 Ref Auto 18 Ref Auto 7 Ref Auto 19 Ref Auto m 8 Ref Auto 20 Ref Auto 9 Ref Auto 21 Ref Auto 10 Ref Auto 22 Ref Auto 11 Ref Auto 23 Ref Auto 12 Ref Auto 24 Ref Auto iz E Menu seg Formats Fig 28 Video Input Reference Switching Points Slot 1 Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 58 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Door PC 5 3 2 MADI Inputs This screen displays details of the main and redundant MADI input signals for each audio input module fitted in the router See the on screen Key for details The main and redundant inputs are detailed on the rear panel drawings detailed in Table 7 MADI channel a Main input MADI channel b Du
126. 80150 set to Ref 1 so a 1080150 signal will use frame sync settings in the 1080i FS tab 1080159 set to Lock to Input so a 1080159 signal will use delay settings in the 1080i Delay tab 1080160 set to Lock to Input so a 1080160 signal will use delay settings in the 1080i Delay tab Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 181 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Output Modules and Output Rear Panels Function Function Description XXXX Delay tab where XXXX is the video standard eg 1080i Delay Video standard configuration tabs for Delay Select the number of frames of video delay Only available if Sync Frame Offset Function is selected as Frame If Line is selected then the frame slider is not visible Select the number of lines of video delay Only available if Sync Line Offset Function is selected as Frame If Line is selected then the frame slider is not visible Pixel Offset Select the number of pixels of video delay Delay ms Select the video delay in milliseconds When setting any one of the above values the other settings will automatically change to reflect the setting being made Lock to Input Select Lock to Input to enable video delay for the Reference video standard Reference 1 to 4 Not used for Delay Freeze Frame in the event of input signal loss the last good frame is Input Loss behavior output Black Screen in the event of input signal loss a black screen is output Table 40 Video Delay Conf
127. 850 routers e The Expansion Video Crosspoint Matrix Status screen displays the expansion video crosspoint modules in the remote frame expansion frame when a dual frame Sirius 850 system is being used The operation of the screen is essentially the same for all of the Sirius 800 routers and is described in this section e For information on replacing a failed crosspoint card see section 10 4 1 Main Crosspoint Matrix Status F Redundancy Enabled Presence FI Redundancy Available YwCamene 00 r iind XpntCardRedundant830 all Fail Found green ok XpntCardMain830 Fi E FI Fault Present green ok I More Click to bypass a crosspoint First Failure Detected Yellow when a crosspoint Failed Source 0 has failed or bypassed Total Routes Redundant Crosspoint 0 Failed Action MoveFailedRoute If a single route has been moved to the redundant foul Led poser at to the redundant crosspoint Click when fault is Green when a freeing the failed crosspoint Em chc sneli operation us Fig 34 Sirius 830 Crosspoint Matrix Status and Crosspoint Switching Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 64 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Door PC Main Crosspoint Matrix Status Redundancy Enabled E Presence Power XpntCardOddToOdd 1 mu FI Fail Found green ok XpntCardEvenToOdd 2 mu Fault Present green ok 9 XpntCardRedundant R mu First Failure Detected XpntCardOddToEven 3 mH Failed Source 0
128. ADI Main and Redundant Inputs Each MADI rear panel has 12 main and 12 redundant MADI input connectors If you have duplicate feeds for the MADI input channels these can be connected to the redundant MADI input connectors The main and redundant connections are shown in the rear panel diagrams listed in Table 21 Rear Panel See Figure Number Sirius 830 1303 BNC rear panel See Fig 71 on page 109 1304 Fiber rear panel See Fig 72 on page 110 Sirius 840 850 1285 BNC rear panel See Fig 73 on page 111 1286 Fiber rear panel See Fig 74 on page 112 Table 21 MADI Main and Backup Connections If a main MADI input fails the input module will automatically switch to the redundant input for that feed Once it has switched the input module will continue to use the redundant input even if the main input is restored If subsequently the redundant input fails the input module will automatically switch back to the main MADI input If required the MADI input used can also be manually changed using Workbench or the Door screen see section 5 3 2 Issue 5 Rev2 Page 127 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Input Rear Panels and Input Modules 9 12 2 AES Audio Functions Up to 120 balanced or unbalanced AES inputs dependant on rear panel fitted at a nominal sample rate of 48 kHz Passes all input audio channels including VU amp C Validity User and Channel status data to the audio crosspoint Passes AES audio asynchronously transpa
129. AES Balanced Input 6 30 54 78 or 102 0O AES Balanced Input 8 32 56 80 or 104 O AES Balanced Input 10 34 58 82 or 106 0 AES Balanced Input 12 36 60 84 or 108 9 O AES Balanced Input 14 38 62 86 or 110 0O AES Balanced Input 16 40 64 88 or 112 0O AES Balanced Input 18 42 66 90 or 114 AES Balanced Input 20 44 68 92 or 116 AES Balanced Input 22 46 70 94 or 118 AES Balanced Input 24 48 72 96 or 120 Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 117 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Input Rear Panels and Input Modules Socket1 AES Socket2 AES Socket3 AES Socket4 AES Socket 5 AES ED Er Balanced Balanced Balanced Balanced Balanced Input Input Input Input Input bt 25 49 73 97 25 1 25 49 73 97 22 2 26 50 74 98 23 2 26 50 74 98 1 34 27 51 75 99 43 3 27 51 75 99 2 4 28 52 76 100 44 4 28 52 76 100 3 5 29 53 77 101 45 5 29 53 77 101 4 6 30 544 784 102 46 6 30 54 78 102 5 7 31 55 79 103 47 7 31 55 79 103 9 8 32 56 80 104 48 8 32 56 80 104 d 9 33 57 81 105 49 9 33 57 81 105 8 10 34 58 82 106 50 10 34 58 82 106 i Ma 35 59 83 107 51 11 35 59 83 107 ba 124
130. D type connectors shall have metal shells making good RF contact with the cable screen Connectors having dimples which improve the contact between the plug and socket shells are recommended Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 19 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Warnings and Precautions Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 20 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Product Overview 3 Product Overview Snell continues to lead the way in video and audio signal routing with its innovative Sirius 800 router range The large scale multi format routers incorporate many technological firsts the Sirius 800 routers offer multi format operation up to 3 Gb s in one frame Sirius 830 15U Sirius 840 27U Sirius 850 34U non expandable router non expandable router expandable router Fig2 Sirius 800 Router Range Note The router height in Fig 2 does not include the power supply shelves which are a further 2U each in height Between one and three power supply shelves are used with the Sirius router depending on the router configuration and local mains voltage The Sirius 800 routers support a range of different configurations based on a common module format The router range is made up of the non expandable Sirius 830 and Sirius 840 routers and the field expandable Sirius 850 router The Sirius 850 can be equipped as 576 x 1152 in a single frame or is field expandable up to 1152 x 1152 video d
131. Density AES Connector Pin Outs Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 192 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Output Modules and Output Rear Panels Socket1 AES Socket2 AES Socket3 AES Socket 4 AES Socket 5 AES EUR Balanced Balanced Balanced Balanced Balanced Output Output Output Output Output 20 224 464 70 94 118 62 22 46 70 94 118 41 23 474 71 95 119 42 23 47 71 95 119 39 24 48 72 96 120 40 24 48 72 96 120 21 N C N C N C N C N C 26t038 Signal GND Signal GND Signal GND Signal GND Signal GND Table 42 Balanced AES Rear Panel 62 Way High Density AES Connector Pin Outs Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 193 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Output Modules and Output Rear Panels 11 9 Note 1356 Sirius 800 Unbalanced AES Output Rear Panel with MADI Outputs The 1356 Sirius 800 balanced AES output rear panel has 5 x 62 way female high density sockets for balanced AES audio outputs and HD BNC connectors for up to 3 MADI outputs If balanced AES outputs are required see section 11 8 for details The 1356 rear panel is used with the 4929 4925 120 channel AES MADI output module For the wiring details for the 62 way D Type sockets see section 11 9 1 and for details of the MADI inputs see section 11 10 n i see section 11 10 for MADI 1 details Sockets 1 Outputs 1 to 24 Sockets 2 Outputs 25 to 48 Sockets 3 Outputs 49 to 72 Sockets 4 Outputs 73 to
132. E RERREPESE 165 11 1 4 MADI Audio Outputs 0 0 165 11 1 5 Audio Processing on the Output Module 00005 166 Til Ol Audio Delay 3 2 etit cala i bas dore poe qe Rus 167 11 1 5 2 Sample Rate Conversion LL 167 11 1 5 3 Gain Control and Phase Invert 00 0 cece eee eee 171 11 1 5 4 Stereo Mode 171 11 1 6 4929 Connections to the Audio Crosspoints 171 11 1 7 4929 Output Module LED Information 172 11 2 5926 Sirius 800 Standard Video Output Module Non Expandable 174 11 2 1 5926 Output Module LED Information 175 11 3 5949 Sirius 800 Video Embedding amp AHP Output Module with Delay and Sync Capability LL 177 11 3 1 Processing on the Output Module 178 11 3 1 1 Frame Line Sync and Video Delay eese 179 11 9 1 2 16 Channel Mixer 4 zs a iene RE E ER OD Re Rr RU EE nds 182 11 3 1 3 Channel Swap Shuffle 182 11 3 1 4 Gain control and Phase Invert 0 0 eese 182 11 3 1 5 Embedded Audio Delay 182 11 3 2 5949 Connections to the Audio Crosspoints 20005 183 11 3 3 5949 Output Module LED Information 183 11 4 1294 Sirius 800 Video BNC Output Rear Panel 186 11 5 1302 Sirius 800 Video Fiber Output rear panel 187 11 6 1295 Sirius 800 Video MADI BNC Output Rear Panel 188 11 7 1296 Sirius 800 Video MADI Fiber Output Rear Panel 189 11 8 1353 Sirius 800 Balanced AES Output Rear Panel with MADI Outputs 190
133. ERE bias ES ere kde eg 24 3 2 Router Configuration and Control LL 25 3 2 OVeIVIOW su iii E an E ERA eX E RI 25 3 2 2 Router System Configuration LL 25 3 2 9 Routing Controls so d ispiri Riu e a 27 3 3 Sirius 800 Input Output Modules 27 3 3 1 Input Modules 0 0 cee te eae 27 3 3 2 Output Modules 27 3 4 Sirius 800 Features LL 28 3 4 1 Sirius 830 Router 28 3 4 2 Sirius 840 Router 28 3 4 3 Sirius 850 Router 28 3 4 4 All Sirius 800 Routers LL 29 3 0 AHP Licernsing wits i nae tret INE pad Rt RUE ao meee 31 3 5 1 Video Module Licensing Options LL 31 3 5 2 Audio Module Licensing Options LL 32 3 6 Sirius 830 Frame Overview 0 33 3 6 1 Frame Architecture 0 2 nh 33 3 6 2 Signal Flow Through the Router 34 3 6 3 Rear Connectors 35 3 7 Sirius 840 Frame Overview 36 3 7 1 Frame Architecture llle 36 3 7 2 Signal Flow Through the Router 37 3 7 8 Rear Connectors 38 3 8 Sirius 850 Frame Overview 39 3 8 1 Frame Architecture llle 39 3 8 2 Signal Flow Through the Router 40 3 8 8 Rear Connectors 0 2 0 0 nen 41 3 9 Video Reference Inputs liliis 42 3 9 1 Derived Video References Nucleus2 Controllers Only 42 3 9 2 Video Switching Point References cece eee eens 43 Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 3 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Contents 3 9 3 Reference Offset Nucleus2 Controllers Only
134. Error Remove module and refit to force a reboot Eight Diagnostic LEDs Snell Use Only Normal LED Pattern Sequence 1 All LEDs On for one Second 2 All LEDs Off except the top LED 3 All LEDs Off except the second LED from the top 4 This sequence continues until all LEDs are Off except for the bottom LED 5 All LEDs Off for 10 Seconds 6 Return to Step 1 Any other pattern abnormal operation contact Snell Customer Support Table 29 5919 Input Module LED Information Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 143 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Input Rear Panels and Input Modules Power OK Local Command OK Local Error Remote Command OK Remote Error Fugue Status Top LED Diagnostic LEDs x 8 Snell use only Bottom LED Fig 95 5919 Input Module LEDs Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 144 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Crosspoint Modules 10 Crosspoint Modules 10 1 Video Crosspoint Modules The Sirius 800 routers all use the same video crosspoint modules with the larger routers fitted with more video crosspoint modules to cope with the higher number of routes that can be set See section 10 2 for details of the Sirius 830 video crosspoint module arrangement and section 10 3 for the Sirius 840 850 video crosspoint module arrangement There are two Video Crosspoint Module versions the 5901 and the 5905 The crosspoint modules are functional
135. Example 3 Slot 12 MADI 3 Connector First MADI Channel 12 x 768 768 705 9216 768 705 8448 705 9153 First MADI Channel 9153 Last MADI Channel 9153 63 9216 Last MADI Channel 9216 Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 198 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Sirius 850 Video Expansion 12 Sirius 850 Video Expansion 12 1 Note The Sirius 850 is field expandable up to either 576 x 1152 in a single frame or up to 11522 video dependant on input output card configuration by linking two Sirius 850 frames together using expansion cables No other external splitters or combiners are required and expansion can be carried out while the system is in use This section describes both expansion methods Single Sirius 850 frame up to 576 x 1152 See section 12 1 for details Dual Sirius 850 frames up to 11522 See section 12 2 for details Single Sirius 850 Frame up to 576 x 1152 Video To expand a Sirius 850 router up to 576 x 1152 video dependant on input output card configuration the following extra modules are required e 4x 5905 5901 Video Crosspoint Modules mounted in upper part of the frame a fifth crosspoint module is optional and provides redundancy for the video expansion crosspoint matrix See section 10 1 for module details e Up to 24 x 5928 Sirius 850 Standard Video Expansion Output Modules depending on the number of extra video outputs required Fitted in t
136. Failed Destination 0 XpntCardEvenToEven 4 IB IH Total Routes More Main Crosspoint 48 Click to bypass a crosspoint Redundant Crosspoint 0 Yellow when a crosspoint has failed or bypassed Failed Action MoveFailedRoute If a single route has been moved to the redundant COMES NE 1 te to the redundant crosspoint _ Click when fault is Green when a freeing the failed crosspoint pe no longer present to crosspoint is Menu snell irs to emet bypassed Fig 35 Sirius 840 850 Crosspoint Matrix Status and Crosspoint Switching Screen Item Description Indicators Redundancy Enabled Green Redundant crosspoint checking enabled Red Redundant crosspoint checking is not enabled The video crosspoint redundancy algorithm is disabled by default For details on enabling the video crosspoint redundancy algorithm see section 10 6 Redundancy Available Green A full set of crosspoint modules is configured for the matrix Sirius 830 1 main and 1 redundant Sirius 840 850 4 main and 1 redundant Red A full set of crosspoint modules is not configured for the matrix and therefore there is no crosspoint redundancy Note If the Sirius 800 is configured for redundancy and when powered up one or more crosspoint modules are missing or faulty the indications displayed will be Redundancy Available displays Green Fail Found displays Red Fail Found Green A failure has not occurred in the crosspoint matrix gree
137. Fig 149 5939 Sirius 830 Video amp Audio Input amp Output Monitoring Module LEDs Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 224 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Multiviewer and Input Output Monitoring Modules 13 8 13 8 1 Note 5930 Sirius 840 850 Input and 5933 Output Monitoring Modules Monitoring can only be used if a 5933 output monitor module is present This module enables the four monitor outputs on the Control Rear Panel see section 16 2 to be routed from any of the 576 main router outputs or from any input via a 5902 Multiviewer Crosspoint Module or 5930 input monitoring crosspoint module 5930 Sirius 840 850 Input Monitoring Crosspoint Module e The 5930 Sirius 840 850 input monitoring crosspoint module must be configured in Workbench before it can be used The 5930 module is configured from the Local Router Hardware tab Advanced Configuration Edit Module Configurations See the Workbench user manual for module configuration details e The Modules Present screen of the Door PC can be used to check that the 5930 module is correctly configured see section 5 2 2 Connectors to the Motherboard LEDs Fig 150 5930 Sirius 840 850 Input Monitoring Crosspoint Module Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 225 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Multiviewer and Input Output Monitoring Modules 13 8 1 1 5930 Sirius 840 850 Input Monitoring Crosspoint Mo
138. Fig 64 shows a mix of fiber and BNC output rear panel connectors on the rear of a Sirius 840 850 router Audio 18432 1129 to 1152 I EL IE COE DEDE De 0E DE Ra I AES ea EXE SE del G IP es OE SE ed rN O o O s QN O 0 o st N CN CN QN rr rr e WM ums uuo oe 65955575 58222525 o o ooo o 2290000 NNNANN I NOM wow 2 wv 4 4 YH D 2252 2 2 25 2 2 2 2 2 aaa oO OQ oc oc o0 o o Oc cc c E EE E E E S To T PITE Moro NU CO uo e ERE VI E er o o ooo o 2255 22 00000 0 00105 0500 Video 553 aaadadad 23332382 Audio 17665 Ss E S S s Ih qa Gdo LEO Wo WW Spo spp qo D NON ON ON NON CH esr o of ne af n qu mm DR o O llo o og od als OK o OK Outputs o Video 576 The channel numbers for all of the rear panel connectors are listed in Table 16 Fig 64 Example Sirius 840 850 Mixed BNC Fiber Output Rear Panel Connectors Video 1 Audio 1 Sirius 850 only Fiber Rear Panel Expansion Inputs Video 24 Audio 768 C Sirius 850 only BNC Rear Panel Expansion Inputs 577 to 600 Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 101 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Module Locations 8 3 7 3 Input Output and Expansion Connections by Slot Input Output Channels Input Output Rear Panel Slot Embedded Audio Sirius 850 only Video Number Video Channels Channels Expansion Inputs a b c
139. I Output Modules Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 329 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Specifications C 2 4 Multiviewer and Additional Coax Outputs 577 to 1152 5931 Multiviewer Output Module used with 1291 or 1309 MV DIN 1 0 2 3 Coax Output Rear Panels 5928 Standard Video Expansion Output Module Sirius 850 Only used with 1293 DIN 1 0 2 3 Coax Output Rear Panels for Additional Outputs 577 to 1152 Type Multiviewer 48 per module re clocked Additional Outputs 24 per module re clocked Connectors DIN 1 0 2 3 Gold plated Standards Supported SMPTE 259M 525 and 625 SD SDI EN50083 9 DVB ASI SMPTE 292M 720p and 1080i HD SDI SMPTE 424M 1080p 3G SDI Impedance 75Q Data Rate 3 Mb s 3 Gb s Standard video rates re clocked all other rates auto bypassed Return Loss gt 15dB 10MHz to 1 5GHz gt 10dB 1 5GHz to 3GHz Amplitude 800 mV p p 10 Rise Fall time 270ps HD 800ps SD Timing Jitter 0 3UI 1 5G and 3G 0 15UI SD Alignment Jitter 0 2UI 1 5G and 3G 0 1UI SD DC Offset oOV 0 5 V Table 106 Multiviewer and Additional Coax Outputs Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 330 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Specifications C 3 Control Nucleus2 2463 Serial 4 x RS485 on 9 way D type Support for SW P 02 SW P 06 RS 485 multi drop panel protocol SW P 08 Default 38 4 kbaud Ethern
140. Innovation in the Multi Screen World A Ouantel Company User Manual Sirius 800 Router Range Sirius 830 840 and 850 routers snellgroup com Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Issue 5 Rev2 Page 2 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Contents Contents 1 About this Manual 11 1 1 Software and Firmware Release Details liliis isses 11 1 1 1 Export System Information Nucleus2 2463 11 142 Contact Details s auei is eo eae eid awa ek Yeh e de epu ia 12 1 3 Copyright and Disclaimer 12 2 Warnings and Precautions eese 13 2 1 Explanation of Safety Symbols LL 15 2 2 Safety Warnings LL 15 2 9 Lithium Batteries la CR Pa a 15 2 4 Fiber Output Modules Warning 16 2 5 Cable Management 16 2 6 Power Supplies 16 2 7 Earth Cables ios REALE paa EHE d eb a i 17 2 7 1 Important Protective Earth Information 17 2 7 2 Important Functional Earth Information 17 2 8 VentllatiOri cio xcu cece ge RR a eae eee RU ai en ee wee ee RR 18 2 9 Safety Standards ves e e Sle ie eed ee 19 3 Product Overview sss weed kx py A 21 9 1 Signal FOW z xui tem ceri oer ERFURT RU DICERE x haere ee 22 3 1 1 Input Modules aaan a aa a a daa aea A nh 22 3 1 2 Video CrOsspoints i 22 3 1 9 Audio Crosspoints iii i Lr Heed ee Vad ss 23 3 1 4 Output Modules 23 3 1 5 Audio Processing 0 23 3 1 6 Audio Phasing liiis 24 3 1 7 Video Processing x osse Re
141. Interface Module Compatibility Table Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 267 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Control Fan Interface Module 2457 2458 2455 2456 2452 2453 Control Fan Control Fan Control Fan Modules Interface Interface Interface Module Module Module Compatibility Compatibility Compatibility 4925 Sirius 800 AES MADI output module no audio delay 120 AES Pairs and up to 3 MADI outputs or Yes Yes No 4925 Sirius 800 AES MADI output module no audio delay 12 MADI Main amp Redundant 4929 Sirius 800 AES MADI output module with audio delay 120 AES Pairs and up to 3 MADI outputs or Yes Yes No 4929 Sirius 800 AES MADI output module with audio delay 12 MADI Main amp Redundant Crosspoint Modules 5901 5905 Sirius 800 Series Video Yes Yes Yes crosspoint module 5903 Sirius 800 Audio crosspoint module Yes Yes No Table 75 Control Fan Interface Module Compatibility Table 15 1 1 Fan Out The control bus is fanned out to the router motherboard The return signals from each module are combined together and sent back to the control modules This functionality is copied making it dual redundant Only one of these modules can be active so an active inactive changeover is implemented similar to that on the controller itself 15 1 2 Sirius 850 Control Fan Interface Module in a Two Frame System All the signals to the bottom motherboard are routed from the local controller In a single fram
142. ND GND GND 7 9 33 57 81 105 49 GND GND GND GND GND 8 10 34 58 82 106 50 GND GND GND GND GND 9 11 35 59 83 107 51 GND GND GND GND GND 10 12 36 60 84 108 52 GND GND GND GND GND 11 13 37 61 85 109 53 GND GND GND GND GND 12 14 38 62 86 110 54 GND GND GND GND GND 13 15 39 63 87 111 55 GND GND GND GND GND 14 16 40 64 88 112 56 GND GND GND GND GND 15 17 41 65 89 113 57 GND GND GND GND GND 16 18 42 66 90 114 58 GND GND GND GND GND 17 19 43 67 91 115 59 GND GND GND GND GND 18 20 44 68 92 116 60 GND GND GND GND GND 19 21 45 69 93 117 61 GND GND GND GND GND Table 18 Unbalanced AES Rear Panel 62 Way High Density AES Socket Pin Outs Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 123 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Input Rear Panels and Input Modules 9 10 4 Socket1 AES Socket2 AES Socket3 AES Socket 4 AES Socket 5 AES NORUNT Unbalanced Unbalanced Unbalanced Unbalanced Unbalanced Input Input Input Input Input 20 22 46 70 94 118 62 GND GND GND GND GND 41 23 474 71 95 119 42 GND GND GND GND GND 39 24 48 72 96 120 40 GND GND GND GND GND 21 N C N C N C N C N C 26t038 Signal GND Signal GND Signal GND Signal GND Signal GND Table 18 Unbalanced AES Rear Panel 62 Way High Density AES Socket Pin Outs FGAEY 2502910A Unbalanced 62 Way AES to BNC Breakout Cable The optional breakout cable converts a single unbalanced 62 way high density AES con
143. Nucleus or 2463 Nucleus2 Control Modules x 1 or 2 see section 14 2 Output slots populated with any combination of the following modules 4929 5926 5949 4925 5925 5937 see section 11 12 Input slots populated with any combination of the following modules 4915 5917 5919 5915 5916 see section 9 Fig 53 Sirius 830 Front Module Locations See section 8 1 for details on which rear panels that can be used with which front module Important Early Sirius 830 routers must be modified by Snell before they can be used for audio routing and processing 4915 5919 4929 5949 4925 5915 5925 or 5903 modules in use See section 3 11 to check if the router needs modifying Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 90 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Module Locations 8 2 2 Sirius 830 Rear Panel Locations Frames that are not fully populated with input or output rear panels have blanking plates fitted in their place A of electrical signal connection to the router Cables connected to the router must be fitted with adequate vertical and horizontal strain relief to avoid twisting of the rear panels causing damage to the router connectors and loss 1309 Multiviewer Coax Rear Panel up to 3 or 136 Input Fiber Rear x 12 1308 Input BNC Rear x 12 1304 Input Fiber Rear x 12 or or or or or or or or or Fig 54 Sirius 830 Rear Module Locations
144. R LED G Power OK Command OK Error Video Ref 1 Video Ref 2 Video Ref 3 Video Ref 4 AES Ref Fig 186 4925 Sirius 800 AES MADI Output Module no audio delay LEDs Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 301 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Modules No Longer Supplied With New Systems B 3 2 5923 4 Sirius 840 850 Standard Video Output Module Note The 5923 and 5924 video output modules were supplied with earlier Sirius 840 850 router systems and are shown here for users that already have them fitted e The 5923 and 5924 video output modules can be supplied as replacements for these earlier systems if required e On newer systems the 5926 video output module can be used instead of either the 5923 or 5924 but the 5926 requires different rear panels so is not a direct replacement See section 11 2 for details The 5923 Sirius 840 850 standard video BNC output module connects to the 1295 rear panel See section 11 6 which has 24 BNC outputs The 5924 Sirius 840 850 standard video BNC output module connects to the 1296 rear panel See section 11 7 which has 24 Fiber outputs which are split into 12 dual channel transmitters Connectors to the Motherboard Connectors to the 1295 or 1296 Rear Module LEDs Fig 187 5923 5924 Sirius 840 850 Standard Video Output Module The 5923 video output module is compatible with the 1295 BNC rear panel see section 11 6 The 5924
145. Rear Panel Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 129 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Input Rear Panels and Input Modules 9 12 4 1 9 12 4 2 9 12 5 Gain Control and Phase Invert Gain Gain is applied to an audio input channel as Silence mute or in steps of 0 1dB in a range of 72 dB to 30 dB Phase Invert Phase invert will invert the audio waveform Stereo Mode Stereo Mode is used to manipulate stereo pairs Options include Left Right Swap Left Both Right Both and Mono Mix Left Right Swap Left Right swap is used to swap the two audio channels of an AES pair over Left Both amp Right Both Left Both and Right Both are used to duplicate the selected channel of a stereo pair and pass the two identical output channels on in place of the original pair Mono Mix Mono mix is used to mix a stereo pair together to create a single mono signal This single mono signal is then passed to the router for each of the mixed channels The Mono Mixis A B 2 4915 Connections to the Audio Crosspoints The 4915 Audio input module creates two identical multiplexed audio transport streams each of which contains all of the audio channels on the input module up to 768 mono channels One transport stream is sent to the main audio crosspoint module and a duplicate transport stream is sent to the redundant audio crosspoint module Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 130 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup co
146. S Balanced Output 22 46 70 94 or 118 AES Balanced Output 24 48 72 96 or 120 Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 191 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Output Modules and Output Rear Panels Socket1 AES Socket2 AES Socket3 AES Socket4 AES Socket 5 AES ER Sf Balanced Balanced Balanced Balanced Balanced Output Output Output Output Output a H 25 49 73 97 25 1 25 49 73 97 22 24 26 50 74 98 23 2 26 50 74 98 1 3 27 514 754 99 43 3 27 51 75 99 2 4 28 52 76 100 44 4 28 52 76 100 3 5 29 53 77 101 45 5 29 53 77 101 4 6 30 54 78 102 ae 6 30 54 78 102 5 7 31 55 79 103 47 7 31 55 79 103 9 8 32 56 80 104 48 8 32 56 80 104 T 9 33 57 81 105 49 9 33 57 81 105 8 10 34 58 82 106 50 10 34 58 82 106 9 11 35 59 83 107 51 11 35 59 83 107 10 12 36 60 84 1084 52 12 36 60 84 108 11 13 37 61 85 109 53 13 37 61 85 109 12 14 38 62 86 110 54 14 38 62 86 110 13 15 39 63 87 111 55 15 39 63 87 111 14 16 40 64 88 112 56 16 40 64 88 112 15 17 41 65 89 1134 57 17 41 65 89 113 16 18 42 66 90 114 58 18 42 66 90 114 17 19 43 67 91 115 59 19 43 67 91 115 18 20 44 68 92 116 60 20 44 68 92 116 19 21 45 69 93 117 61 21 45 69 93 117 Table 42 Balanced AES Rear Panel 62 Way High
147. See section 9 9 2 for details of the 1352 rear panel e If unbalanced AES inputs are required see section 9 10 2 for details The 1297 rear panel is used in the Sirius 840 850 with the 4915 120 channel AES MADI input module For the wiring details for the 62 way D Type sockets see section 9 9 3 mu Used Socket 1 Inputs 1 to 24 Socket 2 Inputs 25 to 48 Socket 3 Inputs 49 to 72 Socket 4 Inputs 73 to 96 Socket 5 Inputs 97 to 120 Fig 175 1297 Balanced AES Input Rear Panel Sirius 840 850 only Issue 5 Rev2 Page 282 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Modules No Longer Supplied With New Systems B 2 B 2 1 Note Input Modules 5913 4 Sirius 840 850 Standard Video Input Module e The 5913 and 5914 Sirius 840 850 standard video input modules were supplied with earlier Sirius 840 850 router systems and are shown here for users that already have them fitted The 5913 and 5914 Sirius 840 850 standard video input modules can be supplied as replacements for these earlier systems if required On newer systems the 5917 video input module can be used instead of either the 5913 or 5914 but the 5917 requires different rear panels so is not a direct replacement See section for details The 5913 Sirius 840 850 standard video BNC input module has 24 BNC input channels and can handle SD ASI and HD signals up to 3Gb s The 5914 Sirius 840 850 standard video fiber
148. Service see section 1 2 for contact details Export System Information Nucleus2 2463 Router system information can be exported to a CSV file by right clicking on the controller in the configuration screen of Workbench System information saved includes hardware module types hardware versions firmware versions software versions Workbench details and database location information See the Workbench manual for information on using Workbench Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 11 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com About this Manual 1 2 1 3 Contact Details Customer Support For details of our Regional Customer Support Offices please visit the Snell web site and navigate to Support Customer Support Contacts http www snellgroup com support customer support Customers with a support contract should call their personalized number which can be found in their contract and be ready to provide their contract number and details Copyright and Disclaimer Copyright protection claimed includes all forms and matters of copyrightable material and information now allowed by statutory or judicial law or hereinafter granted including without limitation material generated from the software programs which are displayed on the screen Such as icons screen display looks etc Information in this manual and software are subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of Snell Limited The software
149. Status Multiviewer Menu m iore Fig 23 Modules Power Status Sirius 840 Router shown Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 55 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Door PC Module Licensing Status This screen displays the License status of each AHP module fitted in the router See the on screen Key for details Note Non AHP modules are displayed as Licensing Status Not Available this is not a fault Modules License Status ks mA beds Crosspoints m Menu m oc ak Lis aces Fig 24 Modules License Status Sirius 840 Router shown Module Firmware This screen displays the firmware version of each AHP module fitted in the router Use the Inputs Outputs and Audio Xpts buttons to select the modules to be viewed Use the Next and Previous buttons to move through the modules See the firmware release note for details of the Module Firmware screen content of each module type Note The number of Firmware Pages containing information varies depending on the AHP module being viewed The number of pages that should contain information is shown in Firmware pages line see Fig 25 Firmware pages that are not used will be empty Touch the Modules button to return to the modules screen Module Firmware Information Slot 1 Module 05915 Hardware 8 Temperature 40 Number of Firmware pages for Avg D this moduletppe MET Ls un Firmware Page 1 FUGUE TIA Cosi Firmwar
150. TE 424M 1080p 3G SDI Impedance 750 Data rate 3Mb s 3 Gb s Standard video rates re clocked all other rates auto bypassed Return loss gt 15 dB 10 MHz to 1 5 GHz gt 10dB 1 5 GHz to 3 GHz Amplitude 800 mV p p 10 Rise Fall time 90ps 3G 180ps HD lt 650ps SD Timing Jitter 0 25UI 1 5G and 3G 0 15UI SD Alignment Jitter 0 15UI 1 5G and 3G 0 1UI SD DC offset OV 0 5V Table 102 Main Coax Video Outputs Type 5926 5938 5949 5924 and 5925 Video Output Modules used with 1296 or 1302 Main Router Optical Video Output Rear Panels 24 per module re clocked removable video SFP modules Order Code ST31ST31 3 Note Fiber MADI specifications are based on fitting standard SFP transmitters Connector LC PC single mode connection as standard Wavelength 1310nm Output Power Typical 2dBM Other power and CWDM options available contact factory Standards supported SMPTE 259M 525 and 625 SD SDI EN50083 9 DVB ASI SMPTE 292M 720p and 1080i HD SDI SMPTE 424M 1080p 3G SDI Data rate 3Mb s 3 Gb s Standard video rates re clocked all other rates auto bypassed Table 103 Main Optical Video Outputs Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 324 Specifications 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Specifications C 2 2 Video AHP Outputs 59
151. The expansion video signals are then output from the 1290 rear panels to the output modules 5938 5949 or 5925 in the other frame using the supplied expansion cables Each 1290 rear panel must be connected to the expansion inputs of the corresponding output module 5938 5949 or 5925 in the other Sirius 850 frame i e slot 1 to slot 1 slot 2 to slot 2 etc The expansion input connectors are located below the output module rear panel connectors 1 to 24 and are marked a b and c The connections on the 1290 rear panel are marked A B and C The expansion cables connect A to a B to b and C to c See Fig 126 The expansion video signals are output from the rear panel connectors of the selected module Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 202 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Sirius 850 Video Expansion Important The following figure shows the cabling for expansion from slot 1 between routers as an example A single 1290 expansion output from each router is shown for clarity and the method can be applied to any of the other 1290 expansion outputs Expansion Out connectors Expansion Out connectors A B and C for outputs 1 to 24 in slot 1 A B and C for outputs 1 to 24 in slot 1 33333 een ose a RJ45 Local Local A to Remote A z Local B to Remote B RJ45 Local Remote A to Local A Remote B to Local B Expansion In connectors Ex
152. Video Outputs 1 to 576 Destination 0 to 575 Multiviewer Outputs 1 to 140 Destination 1152 to 1291 Monitoring Outputs 1 to 4 Destination 16370 to 16373 Video Destinations 577 to 1152 are not used and do not respond to any control Nucleus2 only Audio Inputs 1 to 18432 Source 0 to 18431 Nucleus2 only Audio Outputs 1 to 18432 Destination 0 to 18431 Table 62 Sirius 840 Input and Output Port Mapping Page 241 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Nucleus Router Control Modules 14 3 5 3 Sirius 850 Input and Output Port Mapping Sirius 850 Single Frame Frame 1 of 1 Frame ID Switch set to 0 see section 16 3 1 Table 63 shows the Sirius 850 crosspoint address mapping for Frame 1 of 1 Input Output Range Addresses Video Inputs 1 to 576 Source 0 to 575 Main Video Outputs 1 to 576 Destination 0 to 575 Expansion Video Outputs using 5928 expansion modules amp 577 to 1152 576 to 1151 1293 expansion output rear panels Multiviewer Outputs using two 1291 multiviewer 1 to 96 amp rear panels Destination 1224 to 1271 Multiviewer Outputs 1152 to 1291 only if two 1292 multiviewer MV Link rear panels are fitted no longer supplied Destination 1152 to 1199 Monitoring Outputs 1to4 Destination 16370 to 16373 Audio Inputs 1 to 18432 Source 0 to 18431 Nucleus2 only Aupito cU pu 1 to 18432 Destination 0 to 18431 Nucleus2 only Ta
153. W P 02 The General Switcher Communication Protocol can be used to control Snell routers It uses numbers in the range 0 to 16383 when in extended mode to set acknowledge and poll crosspoints via a single Nucleus control module Master router ports must be configured for this protocol if the router is to be controlled by a Centra or Aurora control system If the system is a multi level router and configured as such in it s database all levels may be controlled using a destination offset appropriate to its level position in the Nucleus database settings In order for Centra or Aurora or any system using General Switcher protocol to control a multi level Nucleus system the user must have knowledge of the local database in use only then can the router control module direct the correct the data to the correct crosspoints The full specification for this protocol is available from the Customer Support section of the Snell web site ht p www snellgroup com support customer support SW P 02 Routing Monitoring O Ps amp MV Destination Control e The information in this section is only correct if the Sirius 800 router is fitted with Nucleus 2450 router controllers with the default database Databases can be modified including the SW P 02 information If this is the case please see the database configuration for details When the Sirius 800 router is fitted with 2463 router controllers using the default database the number scheme will be dif
154. abase Server with Multiple Client PCs and Router s Fig 6 shows an example a stand alone installation where everything resides on a single Client Server PC The Workbench and or RollCall PC can be used for router control Router control module s and Door screen running LiveRunner Client PC running RollCall for router control optional RollCall 4 Fig 6 Example Single Client Server PC with Router s and a RollCall Client Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 26 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Product Overview 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 2 Routing Control The router can be controlled from Workbench Softpanels RollCall Panels and third party control systems Softpanels are usually used from a PC running Liverunner which is a client only version of Workbench The client only version can t be used for router configuration When Workbench Softpanel control is used the Softpanels need to connect to the Workbench database on power up after which they talk to the router directly Hardware panels and RollCall clients talk to the router directly Video and audio routing is achieved by the use of matrices levels and associations Inhibits can be set up to prevent unwanted routes from being set and routes can be automatically or manually protected if required Salvos or Snapshot can be configured to bring the router back to a known state The Workbench configuration tools allow you to desi
155. ages Sirius 830 840 850 no expansion Error from remote Nucleus Off Expansion not used control module the Sirius 850 expanded to second frame Nucleus controller in the Off normal state frame linked to this Flashing the command message from frame the remote router controller is corrupt or hasn t been received This communications error could be caused by a hardware failure or incorrect insertion Check that the module is inserted correctly and the four RJ45 connections between the frames are fitted correctly see section 12 2 If the Remote Error LED is flashing at the same time as the Hemote Command OK LED is flashing it suggests a mismatch in the configuration of the Nucleus controller Check controller configuration Fugue CPU status Flashing sequence Green Green Blue Status normal operation the CPU is programmed and running Brief Red Flash at startup normal Flashing Red CPU Error Remove module and refit to force a reboot Table 41 5949 Output Module LED Information Issue 5 Rev2 Page 184 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Output Modules and Output Rear Panels LED Color Label Detail Normal Working Status Eight Diagnostic LEDs Snell Use Only Normal LED Pattern Sequence 1 All LEDs On for one Second 2 All LEDs Off except the top LED 3 All LEDs Off except the second LED from the top 4 This sequence continues until all LEDs are Off except for the
156. ain Expansion Monitoring o Outputs Outputs Outputs Outputs cc P P 1 2 x 1291 The before or after processing Monitor Input Module 5930 only required if the option is only available for Multiviewer Crosspoint Module 5902 is not fitted processing modules Fig 15 Sirius 850 Signal Flow Diagram Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 40 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Product Overview 3 8 3 Rear Connectors Fig 16 shows a fully populated Sirius 850 frame with BNC Inputs and Outputs See section 8 3 3 for rear panel input output connector configuration details Cables connected to the router must be fitted with adequate vertical and horizontal strain relief to avoid twisting of the rear panels causing damage to the router connectors and loss of electrical signal connection to the router Expansion Outputs 1290 see section 8 3 8 1 RAR ODOC Hd JACO h namamana or 1293 see section 8 3 8 2 Multiviewer Outputs 48Vdc Power Connectors Not Used Alarm Rear Panel Inputs Video 1 to 288 Inputs Video 289 to 576 Audio 9217 to 18432 Audio 1 to 9216 7 ee Control Rear Panel Outputs Video 1 to 288 Audio 1 to 9216 Expansion Inputs Fig 16 Sirius 850 frame with BNC Input Output Rear View For details of the Sirius 850 BNC and Fiber rear connectors see section 8 3 7 For details of the Sirius 850 inter frame expansion r
157. al by the output module Real Output button selects the actual output from the router after any processing has been applied to the signal by the output module The Pre audio processing button is present for all output modules but is only used for video AHP modules The button setting is ignored for all other output modules Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 78 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Catsii Functionality 6 Catsii Functionality Catsii LED s are a unique feature to the Sirius 800 router range and allow easy identification of the status of an input or output They can be lit in different color states depending on the signal type and can be used in a Cross Hair formation to highlight and pinpoint a specific input or output Catsii LEDs are fitted to the Video and MADI rear panels for the main inputs and outputs The expansion output rear panels are not fitted with Catsii LEDs The Catsii LEDs have two functions e To indicate signal status To identify a specific BNC or Fiber connector The Catsii LED s switch between these two functions so they never operate at the same time If any port identification is active the port identification function is operational If all the port identifications are inactive the signal status function is operational Fig 43 Examples of Catsii BNC LEDs Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 79 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Catsii Functionalit
158. al can set to frame or line sync to a video reference signal physical or derived as long as the video output signal and reference frame rates match An offset can be applied to the output signal relative to the frame or line sync to allow for delays later in the system The offset for frame sync is set in frames lines and pixels or in milliseconds The offset for line sync is set in pixels or in milliseconds The offset settings can be preset for each standard of video signal that might be expected to be routed to the output Video offset is set in steps of 0 00001 ms up to a maximum of 14 frames for progressive video standards or 14 fields for interlaced video standards The embedded audio can be sourced from before or after the frame sync block using the Pre Post Selector as required Each video standard has a tab for frame sync configuration and a tab for delay configuration The signal standard is auto detected and the channel uses the settings defined in the appropriate Frame sync or Delay tab for that standard Summary Frame Sync Enabled Audio Selection Sync Function Eni M Video processing on thes 1080 FS 1080150 1080i59 1080i60 Frame Offset Frame Offset Frame Offset _ C B V 2 M 0 EE m o RM 0 xel Offset T wxei Offset m 9 y ms ms _ Delay ms 40 3336666 3332233 behaviour behavicur behaviour Fig 112 Example Workbench 1080i Frame Sync Settings Tab
159. ancy is enabled or disabled the configuration must be pushed by Workbench to the controller for the new setting to take effect If the action on fail setting see section 10 7 for video or audio needs to be changed make these changes at the same time and only one push is then required e Ina dual controller system use the Push Config to Controller s button in Workbench to make sure both controllers are set the same Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 159 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Crosspoint Modules 10 6 2 Important Audio Redundancy Nucleus2 2463 Controller Only The audio redundant crosspoint algorithm is enabled or disabled by using the Online Editor See the Workbench manual for information on using the Online Editor Nucleus2 2463 Controller Navigate to Devices Devices 1 LocalRouterDevice LocalRouterControl RouterSpecificControl Sirius800Control RedundantAudioXpntControl Enabled True Select the required action from the drop down menu e Redundant crosspoint algorithm enabled True e Redundant crosspoint algorithm disabled False e If audio redundancy is enabled or disabled the controller must be reset for the new setting to take effect e Ifthe action on fail setting see section 10 7 for video or audio needs to be changed make these changes at the same time and only one database push is then required e Ina dual controller system both controllers must have the same
160. and or audio signals by using the video and audio crosspoint modules The Sirius 850 can be fitted with Multiviewer outputs and Input Output monitoring as required Fig 15 Full details of the options are shown sections 13 4 1 13 4 2 13 4 3 and 13 4 4 Multiviewer Outputs If the Multiviewer Crosspoint Module is fitted it receives signals from the input modules after any processing has been carried out Input Output Monitoring Outputs If an Input Output Monitoring Module is fitted each monitoring output can be independently configured to display either an input or an output signal Each monitoring output can also be independently configured to display a signal before or after processing has been applied to it processing modules only Up to four monitor signals are passed to the BNC connectors on the 1287 Control rear panel see section 16 2 o ab x I S o Input Rear Panels usi 3 iL L tc a Input Monitor amp MV fF T Crosspoint Crosspoint ui Modules use the Kama c Modules Modules annor same router slot rosspoin a Lower Upper Module therefore only one Module o 1x5930 module can be fitted eee o a ae eee OO c or after processing Expansion era Output Output Multiviewer Pus ut Modules Monitor Output Sri Module Modules Outputs 1 x 5933 1 2 x 5931 before or after processing o Vv I c 5 o Multiviewer tu M
161. anels in the remote router See section 12 3 for 5938 section 11 3 for 5949 and appendix B 3 3 for 5925 module details e The 1290 expansion cables cannot be connected to the 5926 output module e The 5926 module can be directly replaced by the 5938 module as it uses the same rear panels Second Sirius 850 Frame 2 of 2 The second Sirius 850 frame must be equipped with the expansion modules as listed above as well as the usual input modules crosspoint modules etc Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 200 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Sirius 850 Video Expansion 12 2 1 Control of a Dual Frame System To link two Sirius 850 frame together they must both be fitted with the same router controller type either the Nucleus 2450 or the Nucleus2 2463 The Nucleus modules control the main crosspoint modules of the local router and the expansion crosspoint modules of the remote router Connecting the control busses of both frames together Fig 125 enables the controllers to route the video input signals in the remote frame to the outputs of the local frame The controller in the second frame works in the same way enabling control of up to 1152 x 1152 video across the two frames In a dual frame system the controllers are connected using standard Cat 5e Ethernet cables see Table 45 for connections as follows Frame 1 Frame 1 Local Local A A Local Local B B 4 f REMOTE A Remote Remote A A Remote Remote
162. annel 1310nm 5 to 0 dBm output power For 3G HD SD amp MADI Max 12 per rear panel A number of CWDM Fiber SFP transmitter modules are also available contact your local Snell representative for details Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 189 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Output Modules and Output Rear Panels 11 8 Note 1353 Sirius 800 Balanced AES Output Rear Panel with MADI Outputs The 1353 Sirius 800 balanced AES output rear panel has 5 x 62 way female high density sockets for balanced AES audio outputs and HD BNC connectors for up to 3 MADI outputs If unbalanced AES outputs are required see section 11 9 for details The 1353 rear panel is used with the 4929 4925 120 channel AES MADI output module For the wiring details for the 62 way D Type sockets see section 11 8 1 and for details of the MADI inputs see section 11 10 n i see section 11 10 for MADI 1 details Sockets 1 Outputs 1 to 24 Sockets 2 Outputs 25 to 48 Sockets 3 Outputs 49 to 72 Sockets 4 Outputs 73 to 96 Sockets 5 Outputs 97 to 120 For the wiring details for the 62 way D Type sockets see section 11 8 1 Fig 119 1353 Sirius 800 Balanced AES Output Rear Panel Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 190 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Output Modules and Output Rear Panels 11 8 1 62 Way High Density Balanced AES Socket Pin Outs AES Balanced Output 1 25 49 73 or 97
163. are failure or incorrect insertion Check that the module is inserted correctly If the Local Error LED is flashing at the same time as the Local Command OK LED is flashing it suggests a mismatch in the configuration of the Nucleus controller Check the controller configuration Remote Receiving messages Sirius 830 840 850 no expansion Command from remote Nucleus Off Expansion not used OK control module the Sirius 850 expanded to second frame Nucleus controller inthe Flashing receiving information and frame linked to this working correctly frame Remote Error with messages Sirius 830 840 850 no expansion Error from remote Nucleus Off Expansion not used control module the Sirius 850 expanded to second frame Nucleus controller in the Off normal state frame linked to this Flashing the command message from frame the remote router controller is corrupt or hasn t been received This communications error could be caused by a hardware failure a or incorrect insertion Check that the module is inserted correctly and the four RJ45 connections between the frames are fitted correctly see section 12 2 If the Remote Error LED is flashing at the same time as the Hemote Command OK LED is flashing it suggests a mismatch in the configuration of the Nucleus controller Check the controller configuration Table 85 5913 5914 Sirius 840 850 Standard Video Input Module LED Informati
164. at can be used with which front module Important Early Sirius 850 routers must be modified by Snell before they can be used for audio routing and processing 4915 5919 4929 5949 4925 5915 5925 or 5903 modules in use See section 3 11 to check if the router needs modifying Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 97 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Module Locations 8 3 4 Sirius 850 Rear Panel Locations Frames that are not fully populated with input output or expansion rear panels have blanking plates fitted in their place relief to avoid twisting of the rear panels causing damage to the router connectors and loss Cables connected to the router must be fitted with adequate vertical and horizontal strain of electrical signal connection to the router 290 or 1293 Expansion Rear Panel 1291 Multiviewer Coax Rear Panel up to 2 or 1292 Multiviewer MV Link Rear Panel x 1 no longer supplied 1285 Input BNC Rear x 24 1286 Input Fiber Rear x 24 1349 1289 Input BNC Rear x 24 1958 Input Fiber Rear x 24 1352 Input Balanced AES Rear x 24 1355 Input Unbalanced AES Rear x 24 1297 Input Balanced AES Rear x 24 Alarm Rear Panel 1295 Output BNC Rear x 24 1296 Output Fiber Rear x 24 1964 Output BNC Rear x 24 1302 Output Fiber Rear x 24 1353 Output Balanced AES Rear x 24 1356 Output Unbalanced AES Rear x 24 1298 Output Balanced AES Rear 24 lt ontrol Rear Panel
165. ate Flashing the command message from the remote router controller is corrupt or hasn t been received This communications error could be caused by a hardware failure a or incorrect insertion Check that the module is inserted correctly and the four RJ45 connections between the frames are fitted correctly see section 12 2 If the Remote Error LED is flashing at the same time as the Remote Command OK LED is flashing it suggests a mismatch in the configuration of the Nucleus controller Check the controller configuration Fugue Status CPU status Flashing sequence Green Green Blue normal operation the CPU is programmed and running Brief Red Flash at startup normal Flashing Red CPU Error Remove module and refit to force a reboot Eight Diagnostic LEDs Snell Use Only Normal LED Pattern Sequence 1 All LEDs On for one Second 2 All LEDs Off except the top LED 3 All LEDs Off except the second LED from the top 4 This sequence continues until all LEDs are Off except for the bottom LED 5 All LEDs Off for 10 Seconds 6 Return to Step 1 Any other pattern abnormal operation contact Snell Customer Support Table 93 5925 Sirius 800 Video AHP Output Module LED Information Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 309 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Modules No Longer Supplied With New Systems Power OK Local Command OK Local Error Remote Command OK Remote Erro
166. ates the other controller is configured differently from the controller receiving the data or it has no configuration e Red Pulses Error received data with invalid format Check both controllers are running the same version of CentraController rtb software Workbench can be used to check the controller software versions loaded Serial Data Replication Local Router Device The Serial Link is used to replicate LocalRouter device data between the active and idle controllers Replicated data includes crosspoint status module configuration and port configuration e Off Active Controller 5 Flashing Green Idle controller receiving background update data Flashing Orange Idle controller data synchronisation with Active controller in progress Note Do not fail over to the idle controller until data synchronization is complete and the LED is flashing green on the idle controller as there is a risk that data will become corrupted and affect the operation of the router 6 Not used 7 Not used Table 59 Nucleus2 Router Control Module LEDs Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 239 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Nucleus Router Control Modules 14 3 3 14 3 4 2463 Nucleus2 Router Control Module LEDs at Startup Reset When the controller starts up or is reset the Power OK LED will illuminate first and then LEDs 1 to 6 will start to flash as the controller goes through its boot process They will reach the state shown in Table 60
167. ation as the Sirius 840 and also has a second set of video crosspoint modules mounted above the input modules that send signals to the expansion modules four are used as actual crosspoint modules the fifth is optional and for redundancy For Sirius 850 video crosspoint module locations see section 8 3 3 e In order to route any input to any output a minimum of four crosspoint modules must be fitted Fitting a fifth crosspoint will give the router redundancy Video signals passing through the main crosspoint modules are routed to output channels 1 to 576 e Video signals passing through the expansion crosspoint modules are routed to expansion output channels 577 to 1152 The crosspoint modules are mapped to inputs or outputs as shown in Table 31 The redundant crosspoint module can take the place of any of the four main crosspoints in the unlikely event of a failure If the redundant crosspoint has become active due to the failure of another crosspoint the system is no longer redundant Output Odd Odd Any Crosspoint Input Odd Even Any Odd Even Sirius 840 850 Crosspoint Arrangement Even Blow TN Even Table 31 If the redundant video crosspoint module has become active due to a failure of another crosspoint module the system is no longer redundant When the failed crosspoint is replaced the user must move routes from the redundant crosspoint back to the main crosspoint
168. ations 8 3 3 Sirius 850 Module Locations The Sirius 850 architecture allows different formats to be configured up to 576 x 576 video channels and up to 18432 x 18432 audio channels depending on configuration in a single 34U frame 5928 Expansion O P Modules x 24 5901 5905 Video Crosspoint Modules up to 5 5931 5932 Multiviewer Output Modules up to 2 5902 Multiviewer Crosspoint Module x1 or 5930 Input Monitor Module x 1 24 Input slots populated with any combination of the following modules 4915 Audio Input Modules 5917 Video Re clocking Input Modules 5919 Video Re clocking De embedder Input Modules 5913 BNC 5914 Fiber Video Re clocking Input Modules 5915 Video Re clocking De embedder Input Modules 2452 2456 or 2458 blue Fan out Control Modules x 1 or 2 5903 Audio Crosspoint Modules up to 2 5901 5905 Video Crosspoint Modules up to 5 24 Output slots populated with any combination of the following modules 4929 Audio Output Modules 5926 Video Re clocking Output Modules 5949 Video Re clocking Embedder Output Modules 4925 Audio Output Modules 5923 BNC 5924 Fiber Video Re clocking Output Modules 5925 Video Re clocking Embedder Output Modules 933 O P Monitor Module 2450 Nucleus or 2463 Nucleus2 Control Modules x 1 or 2 Fig 59 Sirius 850 Front Module Locations See section 8 1 for details on which rear panels th
169. atively touch either the Fans or Power Supplies status boxes on the main menu screen see section 5 1 Alarms Front Fans Rear Fans rear view References Locked Both Control Fan Out Modules OK p Fig 21 Alarms Sirius 840 Router shown Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 54 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Door PC 5 2 2 Modules Touch the Modules button on the main menu screen to view details of the modules mounted in the router see section 5 1 The most recently viewed module screen will be displayed Touch the buttons at the bottom of the screen to navigate to the module screen you want to display Modules Present This screen displays the configuration status of each module slot See the on screen Key for details Note e Modules are configured from the Local Router hardware tab Advanced Configuration Edit Module Configurations in Workbench See the Workbench manual for full details Seethe Sirius 800 Maintenance amp Upgrade manual for an example of adding one or more modules to the router Modules Present Menu Fag Fig 22 Modules Present Sirius 840 Router shown Module Power Status This screen displays the power status for each module See the on screen Key for details Note Unpopulated slots configured or unconfigured are displayed as Power Status Not Available this is not a fault Modules Power
170. atus Flashing sequence Green Green Blue normal operation the CPU is programmed and running Brief Red Flash at startup normal Flashing Red CPU Error Remove module and refit to force a reboot FPGA status Flashing rapidly between Red amp Green 2 Hz each LED starting up Green On Solid amp Red Off normal state working correctly Green Off amp Red On Solid FPGA programming fault found Remove module and refit to force a reboot Red amp Green Flashing very rapidly in sync 4 Hz each LED A change has been made to the module settings database in RAM but it has not yet been written to flash memory This is not a fault and the flash memory will be updated after 10 seconds of no audio setting changes being made Do not remove power from the module while this indication is present as the flash may become corrupted Other indications are displayed when performing a firmware upgrade see the Sirius 800 Maintenance amp Upgrade manual for details Power OK Power to the module On Solid working correctly Receiving messages from local Nucleus control module the Nucleus controller in this frame Flashing receiving information and working correctly Error with messages from local Nucleus control module the Nucleus controller in this frame Table 36 4929 Output Module LED Information Off normal state Flashing the command message from the router controlle
171. audio module Audio processing is controlled from Workbench Fig 85 and Fig 86 show the order that the processing is applied to the audio signals Audio Transport Stream to Main Audio Crosspoint card MADI Inputs x 3 o 8 o o a a Ed z Generator AES Input x 120 Gain amp Phase Invert Stereo Mode Audio Transport Stream to Redundant Audio Crosspoint card Audio Transport Stream To Input Output ar To Input Output Monitoring Monitoring Module License Color Code Free License with Module Input Output Monitoring selected from either the input or the output of the module pre or post processing See section 5 6 3 for details on how to configure this using the router Door screen Fig 85 Audio Channel Processing Block Diagram AES Rear Panel Audio Transport Stream to Main MADI Inputs x 12 Main Audio Crosspoint x 12 Redundant card Autoswitched MADI Decoder Stereo Mode Audio Transport Stream to Redundant Audio Crosspoint card Gain amp Phase Invert Audio Transport Stream Generator To Input Output or To Input Output Monitoring Monitoring Module License Color Code Free License with Module Input Output Monitoring selected from either the input or the output of the module pre or post processing See section 5 6 3 for details on how to configure this using the router Door screen Fig 86 Audio Channel Processing Block Diagram MADI
172. ay the Monitor Dial Up panel The monitor dial up panel is used to route any video or audio signal to any one of the four monitor outputs on the Input Output monitoring rear panel see Section 13 Monitor Dial Up Panel m Output V12 Destination em umm nni M2 Une Nees M3 E DST ke SRC 4 5 6 lt gt M4 Source Co I i Matrix Selection Input Position Output Position Take Clear 0 Real input RECON __ Post audio x essi Real ouput a aa pe Lie Tom Fig 42 Monitor Dial Up Panel Routing a signal to a monitoring output Each monitoring output must be configured to output either a video signal including embedded audio or discrete audio signal see Table 48 on page 211 for details This means that you must know how each monitoring output is configured so that you route the correct signal type to each monitoring output 1 Touch the button for the monitoring output that the signal will be routed to button M1 to M4 on the door PC screen The monitor output button will change to red to indicate that it has been selected If the selected monitor output is already set to output a signal the current settings for that output are displayed as red buttons on the door PC see Fig 42 These settings can now be changed if required see steps 7 or 8 or a new input output signal can be selected see step 4 From the Matrix Selection box touch
173. be pushed to the single active controller All communication with the router controller will be lost during the database push of the configuration changes and subsequent reset Because of this the crosspoints cannot be switched and tallies are not reported during this process Video and audio processing is unaffected The following description assumes that the controllers are set to automatically reset after a database push This can be checked and changed by using the Workbench Online Editor In a dual controller system remember to check that both controllers are set the same 2463 Nucleus2 Router Control Module Navigate to ConfigurationItems MiscellaneousFeatures ResetControllerAfterConfigurationPush Reset after database push enabled True e Reset after database push disabled False While the database is being pushed the LEDs will operate as normal see Table 60 Pushing a large database can take up to 5 minutes Once the push is complete the controller will automatically reset and the LEDs will operate as they do during a normal reset described in section 14 3 3 The exception to this is when the database is pushed to the first controller of a pair In this case the database will not match the database in the active controller and so LED 4 will be Pulsing Orange showing there is a mismatch between the databases in the two controllers The mismatch will be corrected as soon as the database is pushed to the other controller in the pa
174. bility Output connector type dependant on rear panel fitted Audio Output Module e 4929 Sirius 800 AES MADI Output Module with audio delay 120 AES Pairs and 3 MADI Output Channels or 12 MADI Main amp Redundant Output connector and outputs type dependant on rear panel fitted Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 27 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Product Overview 3 4 Sirius 800 Features 3 4 4 Sirius 830 Router e Up to 288 x 288 video and up to 9216 x 9216 mono audio depending on input output card configuration in a non expandable 15U frame with full video and audio crosspoint redundancy Not including power supply height A typical Sirius 830 router might be 240 x 240 Video router with a 240 x 240 AES 3 4 2 Sirius 840 Router Up to 576 x 576 video and up to 18432 x 18432 mono audio depending on input output card configuration in a non expandable 27U frame with full video and audio crosspoint redundancy Not including power supply height A typical Sirius 840 router might be 480 x 480 Video router with a 480 x 480 AES 3 4 8 Sirius 850 Router e Upto 576 x 576 video and up to 18432 x 18432 mono audio dependant on input output card configuration in an expandable 34U frame with full video and audio crosspoint redundancy Not including power supply height Field expandable to 1152 x 1152 video dependant on input output card configuration by the addition of a further single Sirius 850 34U frame Signal
175. ble 63 Sirius 850 Input and Output Port Mapping Frame 1 of 1 Sirius 850 Dual Frames Frame 1 of 2 Frame ID Switch set to 1 see section 16 3 1 Table 64 shows the Sirius 850 crosspoint address mapping for Frame 1 of 2 Input Output Range Addresses Video Inputs 1 to 1152 Source 0 to 1151 Main Video Outputs using 5928 expansion modules amp 1 to 576 Destination 0 to 575 1290 expansion output rear panels Multiviewer Outputs using two 1291 multiviewer 1 to 96 amp rear panels Destination 1224 to 1271 Destinations 577 to 1152 are not used and do not respond to any control Multiviewer Outputs 1152 to 1291 only if two 1292 multiviewer MV Link rear panels are fitted no longer supplied Destination 1152 to 1199 Monitoring Outputs 1t04 Destination 16370 to 16373 Anaig Inputs 1 to 18432 Source 0 to 18431 Nucleus2 only Auai Outputs 1 to 18432 Destination 0 to 18431 Nucleus2 only Table 64 Sirius 850 Input and Output Port Mapping Frame 1 of 2 Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 242 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Nucleus Router Control Modules Sirius 850 Dual Frames Frame 2 of 2 Frame ID Switch set to 2 see section 16 3 1 Table 65 shows the Sirius 850 crosspoint address mapping for Frame 2 of 2 Input Output Range Addresses Video Inputs 1 to 1152 Source 0 to 1151 Main Video Outputs daing
176. cable and connect to one of the four RS485 connectors on the Control Rear Panel For configuration details refer to the Workbench manual These RS485 connectors correspond to COM 3 to COM 6 in Workbench For details on switch settings refer to the User Manuals supplied with the control panel Each serial port can be configured to connect to up to 16 panels Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 85 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com External Control 7 3 Default Serial Port Configuration When the sample default database is loaded on the router control module s the four RS485 serial communications ports on the rear of the router see section 16 are configured as shown in Table 12 If a custom database is loaded on the router control module s the ports may be configured differently Port configuration can be checked and modified using the Workbench software see the Workbench User Manual for details RS485 1 COM 3 General Switcher In SW P 02 for Centra or Aurora control e RS4852 COM 4 General Switcher In SW P 02 for Centra or Aurora control RS4853 COM 5 Panel Protocol for up to 16 controllers on addresses 1 to 16 as shown in the table below Address Controller Sources Destinations 1 Dial up X Y panel All All 2 Dial up Multibus 8 Bus panel All 1t08 3 Dial up Multibus 6 Bus panel AII 1to6 4 Dial up Multibus 4 Bus panel All 1 to 4 5 Dial up Multibus 2 Bus panel All 1 and 2 6 16 x 1 BPX panel
177. ce lock only mode AES SRC settings required for reference lock only mode on a group of eight AES pairs locked to video reference 1 See Fig 104 on page 167 for setting locations SRC rate Any SRC Reference Ref 1 SRC Enable Unchecked Use SRC Unchecked Example reference lock only mode MADI SRC settings required for reference lock only mode on a MADI stream locked to the AES reference See Fig 105 on page 167 for setting locations SRC Rate Any SRC Reference Ref 5 SRC Enable Unchecked Use SRC Unchecked Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 170 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Output Modules and Output Rear Panels 11 1 5 3 11 1 5 4 11 1 6 Important Gain Control and Phase Invert Gain Gain is applied to an audio output channel as Silence mute or in steps of 0 1dB in a range of 72 dB to 30 dB Phase Invert Phase invert will invert the audio waveform Stereo Mode Stereo Mode is used to manipulate stereo pairs Options include Left Right Swap Left Both Right Both and Mono Mix Left Right Swap Left Right swap is used to swap the two audio channels of an AES pair over Left Both amp Right Both Left Both and Right Both are used to duplicate the selected channel of a stereo pair and pass the two identical channels out of the router in place of the original pair Mono Mix Mono Mix is used to mix a stereo pair together to create a single mono signal This single mono si
178. ce this has happened the redundant crosspoint cannot take the place of any of the other three main crosspoint modules If more routes fail on the main crosspoint that has already been substituted by the redundant crosspoint then they can move to the redundant crosspoint The algorithm will continue to check the crosspoint module with the failure for further failures The other three main crosspoint modules are no longer checked At this point the crosspoint matrix is still capable of setting all 5762 routes but redundancy has been lost This failure must be addressed immediately to regain redundancy for the crosspoint matrix Additionally if any one of the following situations occur the router controller will move all routes to the redundant crosspoint module e A main crosspoint module is removed from the router e The router controller looses communications with a main crosspoint module e A crosspoint module reports one or more of its power rails has a fault To replace a failed crosspoint module all the routes on the failed module must be moved to the redundant crosspoint module see section 10 4 1 for details Checking of all of the main crosspoint modules will be resumed when the failed crosspoint module has been replaced Example Router pre configured to move the failed route to the redundant crosspoint module e Output 1 on Main Crosspoint 1 fails Output 1 on the output module switches to the redundant path e Output 7 on Main Cross
179. changed the controller must be reset for the new settings to take effect e If video or audio redundancy is enabled or disabled see section 10 6 make these changes at the same time and push the configuration to the controller using Workbench a reset is not be required after the push e Ina dual controller system both controllers must have the same redundancy settings Issue 5 Rev2 Page 161 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Crosspoint Modules Issue 5 Rev2 Page 162 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Output Modules and Output Rear Panels 11 Output Modules and Output Rear Panels 11 1 4929 Sirius 800 Audio AES MADI Output Module with Audio Delay Important Early Sirius 800 routers must be modified by Snell before they can be used with the 4929 See section 3 11 to check if the router needs modifying The 4929 Sirius 800 Audio AES MADI output module with audio delay can transmit either 120 AES outputs balanced or unbalanced with up to 3 MADI output channels or 12 channels of MADI outputs depending on the rear panel fitted The 4929 Output Module is compatible with the rear panels listed in Table 34 Rear Panel See Section Up to 120 AES outputs and up to 3 MADI output channels 1353 Balanced AES HD BNC MADI rear panel See section 11 8 1356 Unbalanced AES HD BNC MADI rear panel See section 11 9 1298 Balanced AES rear panel no MADI No longe
180. com Nucleus Router Control Modules 14 3 10 Enable Disable Auto Change Over of Controller Ethernet Connection If a Nucleus2 2463 controller looses its Ethernet connection the system will auto change over to the second Nucleus2 controller if a second controller is fitted and auto change over is enabled The auto change over function using the Generic Online Editor Auto change over is disabled by default 2463 Nucleus2 Router Control Module Navigate to ConfigurationItems MiscellaneousFeatures AutoChangeoverIfNoNetworkTime 1 see below for details Auto change over can be enabled by setting the parameter to a number greater than or equal to Zero This number is the time in seconds that the controller will wait after loosing network connection before changing over to the second controller Note The default Auto Change Over Time is 1 disabled e Changes will not take effect until the controller has been reset If two Nucleus2 controllers are fitted in a router then the second one must also be configured with the same auto changeover settings e TheAutoChangeOverIfNoNetworkTime setting under the Features node is not used 14 3 11 Further Information The Sirius 800 Maintenance amp Upgrade manual contains details on Updating the controller software firmware Issue 5 Rev2 Page 247 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Nucleus Router Control Modules 14 4 Nucleus 2450
181. configured as ReferenceControl If the module address isn t configured correctly derived references will not work Configured in Workbench Edit Configuration Local Router Hardware Advanced Configuration Edit Module Configurations See the Workbench user manual for full setting details Video reference signals are derived created from the BNC video reference inputs on the rear of the router These derived video references can be a different format than the signal on the BNC reference input but they must share the same frame rate as the original reference signal they are created from Each router has a maximum of four references in total in any mix of BNC and Derived references See section 5 3 3 for details on setting references for the router using the Door screen Alternatively Derived references can be configured in Workbench from Edit Configuration Local Router Hardware Advanced Configuration Edit Derived References See the Workbench user manual for full setting details Example also shown in Fig 17 e 525 59 Hz BNC Video Ref 1 used directly as a video reference This uses up one of the four available references e 625 50 Hz BNC Video Ref 2 used to produce a 720P 50 Hz derived reference and a 1080i 50 Hz derived reference This uses up two of the four available references e 1080P 60 Hz BNC Video Ref 3 used to produce a 720P 60 Hz derived reference This uses up one of the four available references e BNC Vi
182. contains up to 64 mono audio channels Each fiber input and output rear panel has 12 SFP cages with two inputs or outputs per fiber SFP module The main redundant MADI streams alternate between the fiber SFP modules meaning that if one SFP module fails either the main or redundant MADI stream will still be available See sections 9 6 and 9 12 1 inputs or sections 11 1 1 and 11 7 outputs for details Fig 63 shows a mix of fiber and BNC input rear panel connectors on the rear of a Sirius 840 850 router C onog T N N r r T O Or w EU N lo aS o o o a 5 9 o ogg 00 000000 DNNGZANDN 555555 5555535 oO Oo Oococ oa QQ O oo oc o ce ff ccf Fa ale uf Td els I T Mi Ae Fed ded I EN 22m gg 7 Not Used 1 mmm Li Video 553 n Video 1 Audio 17665 mi Audio 1 Inputs Oo JO Video 576 JOO Video 24 Audio 18432 Audio 768 ANNA 000 0409 PP PR Es uper per ves ne fot 0 O O O GO O rN Oc OO s NO cO oO st A NN N rr rr STU e 4 4 2599955 B B o dB ID m DNNNDNN NV ii es 522325 2 2 252 22 2 2 2 Q OQ Q Q Oo a oco o oOoccc c SS SS Sa Te The channel numbers for all of the rear panel connectors are listed in Table 16 Fig 63 Example Mixed BNC Fiber Input Rear Panel Connectors Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 100 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Module Locations 8 3 7 2 Outputs
183. crosspoint has failed Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 71 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Door PC 5 5 Nucleus Info This screen displays summary information for the Nucleus controllers fitted in the router Touch the Nucleus Info button on the main menu screen to display this screen Nucleus Controller Information Active Controller Name Snell Centra Controller Description Controller of the devices c 2004 2013 Snell Lid e Jun 32013 15 40 15 Software Version 3 0 0 Firmware Version PA1002H Controller Status Connection State Primary Ready Secondary Ready Database Info Based on Database Sinus 830 Version 10 mr Fig 37 Nucleus Information Issue 5 Rev2 Page 72 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Door PC 5 6 Miscellaneous 5 6 1 The Miscellaneous box on the main menu screen contains the Catsii Dial Up Routing Video and Dial Up Monitor buttons Catsii Touch the Catsii button on the main menu screen to display the Catsii Control screen This screen is used to switch Global Catsii On and to locate input output connectors on the rear of the router For detailed information on Catsii functionality see section 6 Catsii LEDs are fitted to the video and MADI rear panels for the main Inputs and outputs The expansion output rear panels are not fitted with Catsii LEDs Catsii Control Casi Colours P Notes Press Normal to s
184. ct ventilation of the frame Failure to do this will result in failure e n practice the maximum time that a fan assembly can be left open will depend on a number of factors such as ambient temperature frame loading crosspoint routings etc To ensure correct operation under all conditions the fan assemblies should be left open for no more than 4 minutes at a time e Take care not to trap any cables when opening and closing the fan door If one or more routes fail on a video crosspoint module this will be displayed on the Main or Expansion Video Crosspoint Matrix Status screen Sirius 830 see Fig 34 on page 64 for button and parameter locations Sirius 840 850 see Fig 35 on page 65 for button and parameter locations A typical example of how the buttons will look is listed below Fail Found indicator Red Fault Present indicator Red First Failure Detected Failed Source and Destinations will display the first failed route XpntCardNone Grey Sirius 830 XpntCardMain830 Yellow indicates the crosspoint has failed e Sirius 840 850 XpntCardxxxToxxx x Yellow where xxx is the failed crosspoint module Issue 5 Rev2 Page 152 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Crosspoint Modules Touch the Free Failed Crosspoint button to move all of the routes from the failed video crosspoint module to the redundant video crosspoint if Workbench has not been configured to do this auto
185. ction to the protective earth and the equipment must be connected to that means Aservice person must check that the socket outlets that the equipment is to be powered from provide a connection to the protective earth If not the service person must arrange for the installation of the protective earth wire in the building Warning High leakage current the Protective Earth connection is essential before connecting the supply 2 7 2 Important Functional Earth Information Up to three earth cables 636027 are supplied with the Sirius 800 depending on how many power supply shelves are fitted One should be fitted from each power supply shelf to the Sirius 800 router frame this is called a Functional Earth Note e The Functional Earth on the power supply shelf is indicated by this symbol _ located on the left side of the power supply shelf see Fig 1 Functional Earthing is the earthing of a point on the equipment or system which is necessary for purposes other than safety Warning The Functional Earth cable from the power supply shelf to the Sirius frame must be fitted Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 17 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Warnings and Precautions 2 8 AN Ventilation A fully populated Sirius 800 is ventilated by groups of fan modules mounted in the front and rear of the router The vents in the front sides and rear must not be obstructed and should be periodically clean
186. d Not connected 9 LTC Table 82 RS485 9 Way D Type Socket COIN DM ci BR OIN Note e Physically only one AES reference balanced or unbalanced should be connected Connecting both will stop the audio router module s functioning correctly 16 4 3 Alarm Relay Output 25 Way D Type Socket Pins Function Pins Function 1 Alarm 1 Normally Open 14 Alarm1 Common Alarm 1 Normally Closed 15 Alarm 2 Normally Open Alarm 2 Common 16 Alarm 2 Normally Closed Alarm 3 Normally Open 17 Alarm 3 Common Alarm 4 Common 19 Alarm 4 Normally Closed Alarm 5 Normally Open 20 Alarm 5 Common 2 3 4 5 Alarm 3 Normally Closed 18 Alarm 4 Normally Open 6 7 8 Alarm 5 Normally Closed 21 Alarm 6 Normally Open 9 Alarm 6 Common 22 Alarm 6 Normally Closed 10 Alarm 7 Normally Open 23 Alarm 7 Common 11 Alarm 7 Normally Closed 24 Alarm 8 Normally Open NO 9 e coy come SNO 12 Alarm 8 Common 25 Alarm 8 Normally Closed NC NC 13 Not Connected Table 83 Alarm Relay Output 25 Way D Type Socket Alarm Number Alarm Description Fans Front Fans Rear Controller Failure ok if both controllers are operational Spare later this could be implemented as a General Purpose Fault Power Supply 1 amp PSU 5 if present Power Supply 2 amp PSU 6 if present Power Supply 3 amp PSU 7 if pres
187. d no longer supplied Expanded Sirius 850 Two Frame System Sirius 850 frame one of two Frame ID Switch set to 1 see section 16 3 1 Table 70 shows the Sirius 850 crosspoint address mapping for Frame 1 of 2 Input Output Range Addresses Video Inputs 1 to 1152 Source 0 to 1151 Main Video Outputs using suco Spes modue d 1 to 576 Destination 0 to 575 1290 expansion output rear panels Multiviewer Outputs Destination 1152 to 1199 using two 1291 multiviewer 1 to 96 amp rear panels Destination 1224 to 1271 Monitoring Outputs 1to4 Destination 16370 to 16373 Destinations 577 to 1152 are not used and do not respond to any control Table 70 Sirius 850 Input Output Port Mapping Frame 1 Of 2 Multiviewer Outputs 1152 to 1291 only if two 1292 multiviewer MV Link rear panels are fitted no longer supplied Issue 5 Rev2 Page 251 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Nucleus Router Control Modules Note 14 4 3 Sirius 850 frame two of two Frame ID Switch set to 2 see section 16 3 1 Table 71 shows the Sirius 850 crosspoint address mapping for Frame 2 of 2 Input Output Range Addresses Video Inputs 1 to 1152 Source 0 to 1151 Main Video Outputs daing See Crna son modules 577 to 1152 Destination 576 to 1151 1290 expansion output rear panels Multiviewer Outputs Destination 1292 to 1339 using two 1291 multiviewer 1 to 96 am
188. d OK LED is flashing it suggests a mismatch in the configuration of the Nucleus controller Check the controller configuration Fugue Status CPU status Flashing sequence Green Green Blue normal operation the CPU is programmed and running Brief Red Flash at startup normal Flashing Red CPU Error Remove module and refit to force a reboot Eight Diagnostic LEDs Snell Use Only Normal LED Pattern Sequence 1 All LEDs On for one Second 2 All LEDs Off except the top LED 3 All LEDs Off except the second LED from the top 4 This sequence continues until all LEDs are Off except for the bottom LED 5 All LEDs Off for 10 Seconds 6 Return to Step 1 Any other pattern abnormal operation contact Snell Customer Support Table 87 5915 Sirius 800 Video AHP Input Module LED Information Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 290 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Modules No Longer Supplied With New Systems 1 2 3 4 Power OK Local Command OK Local Error Remote Command OK Remote Error Fugue Status Top LED Diagnostic LEDs x 8 Snell use only Fig 180 5915 Sirius 800 Video AHP Input Module LEDs Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 291 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Modules No Longer Supplied With New Systems B 2 3 5916 Sirius 830 Standard Video BNC Fiber Input Module Note e The 5916 video input module was supp
189. dard Video BNC 1295 BNC See section 11 6 Section B 3 2 output module 5924 Sirius 840 850 Standard Video Fiber 1296 Fiber See section 11 7 Section B 3 2 output module 5925 1294 BNC See section 11 4 Section B 3 3 Sirius 800 Video AHP output module 1302 Fiber See section 11 5 5937 Sirius 830 Standard Video BNC Fiber 1294 BNC See section 11 4 Section B 3 4 Output module 1302 Fiber See section 11 5 Table 14 Early Router Systems Front Module and Rear Panel Compatibility Important Early Sirius 800 routers must be modified by Snell before they can be used for audio routing and processing 4915 5919 4929 5949 4925 5915 5925 or 5903 modules in use See section 3 11 to check if the router needs modifying Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 89 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Module Locations 8 2 Sirius 830 8 2 1 Sirius 830 Module Locations The Sirius 830 architecture allows different formats to be configured up to 288 x 288 video channels and up to 9216 x 9216 audio channels depending on configuration in a single 15RU frame 5931 Multiviewer Output Modules see section 13 10 5902 Multiviewer Crosspoint Module see section 13 2 1 or 5939 Input Output Monitoring Module see section 13 2 2 5901 5 Video Crosspoint Modules see section 10 1 5903 Audio Crosspoint Modules see section 10 5 2453 2455 or 2457 blue Fan out Control Modules x 1 or 2 see section 15 450
190. deo AHP Output Module e The 5925 Sirius 800 video AHP output module was supplied with earlier Sirius 800 router systems and is shown here for users that already have them fitted e The 5925 Sirius 800 video AHP output module can be supplied as a replacement for these earlier systems if required The 5925 module heat sink can get very hot during normal operation When removing the 5925 module from a router do not touch the heat sink until it has had time to cool down The 5925 Sirius 800 video AHP output module with audio embedder and re clocking has 24 video output channels and can handle SD DVB ASI and HD signals up to 3Gb s The audio embedder synchronously re inserts up to 16 mono audio channels per video output channel 16 for SD and HD giving up to 768 audio channels per 5925 output module The 5925 AHP video output module contains a powerful processing engine that can manipulate the individual audio channels passing through it see Appendix B 3 3 1 Audio processing is a licensed feature which must be purchased for each module it is needed on See section 3 5 1 for licensing details The 5925 output module synchronizes routed audio channels by drop repeat to re time to the video signal for embedding All VANC Vertical Ancillary data and all non audio HANC Horizontal Ancillary data is removed Connectors to the Motherboard Connectors tothe 1294 or 1302 Rear Modules Fugue LED Eight Diagnosti LEDs Snell U
191. deo Ref 4 not available as the maximum of four references are already in use e A BNC video reference input can be used to create between one and four derived video reference signals for use in the router e Each router has a maximum of four video references in total in any mix of BNC and derived references Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 42 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Product Overview External Video References on the BNC Connectors Video Reference Signals available in the Router BNC Ref 1 BNC Reflnput1 525 59 Hz Signal 525 59 Hz Signal BNC Ref 2 625 50 Hz Signal BNC Ref 3 1080P 60 Hz Signal Derived Reflnput2 720P 50 Hz Signal Derived Reflnput3 1080i 50 Hz Signal BNC Ref 4 Not available as the maximum of four references are already in use Derived Reflnput4 720P 60 Hz Signal Fig 17 References Example Nucleus2 2463 Controller Only 3 9 2 Video Switching Point References Table 4 lists the video switching point references Video Reference Video Signal Sets the reference type based on the signal type detected on the input Rerauto All inputs are set to RefAuto in the default database Ref525i59 525 interlaced 59 Hz Ref625i50 625 interlaced 50 Hz Ref720p60 720 progressive 60 Hz Ref720p59 720 progressive 59 Hz Ref720p50 720 progressive 50 Hz Ref1080i60 1080 interlaced 60 Hz Ref1080i59 1080 interlaced 59 Hz Ref1080i50 1080 interlaced 50 Hz Ref1080
192. deo output module contains a powerful processing engine that can manipulate the individual audio channels passing through it see section 11 3 1 The output module also contains frame line synchronizers allowing video signals to be synchronized with router references see section 11 3 1 1 Audio and video processing are licensed features which must be purchased for each module they are needed on See section 3 5 1 for licensing details The 5949 output module synchronizes routed audio channels by drop repeat to re time to the video signal for embedding All VANC Vertical Ancillary data and all non audio HANC Horizontal Ancillary data is removed Connectors to the Motherboard Connectors to the 1294 or 1302 Rear Modules Fugue LED Eight Diagnosti LEDs Snell Use Only Firmware Licensing SD SDHC Card see the Sirius 800 Maintenance amp Upgrade manual for details Fig 109 5949 24 Channel Video Output Module with Audio Embedding Jumpers and Headers are present on the video output module and these are for Snell Use Only n normal operation no jumper links or headers are fitted The 5949 Output Module is compatible with the 1294 BNC rear panel See section 11 4 and the 1302 Fiber rear panel See section 11 5 Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 177 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Output Modules and Output Rear Panels
193. deo signal is done synchronously to the video signal All video signals operate independently to each other Ancillary Data All VANC data is removed All non audio HANC Horizontal Ancillary data is removed Embedded Audio Delay 5949 only optional Licensed feature see section 3 5 Embedded Audio Delay License Snell Order Code S8AHP VD 1 per module 24 channels Audio Delay Per audio input channel in steps of 0 25 ms ina range of 0 to 5 46 Seconds Video Format Audio Channels Format 525 625 Up to 16 SMPTE ST259 carrier Audio to SMPTE ST272 level A 20 bits Synchronous to video at 48 kHz sample rate nominal 4 audio groups maximum for 525 59 94 or 525 60 720p Up to 16 SMPTE ST292M carrier SMPTE ST296M 720p 4 2 2 10 bit 50 59 94 60 progressive frames s Embedded Audio to SMPTE ST299M Synchronous to video at 48 kHz sample rate nominal 1080i Up to 16 SMPTE ST292 carrier SMPTE ST274 1080i 4 2 2 10 bit 25 29 97 30 interlaced frames s Embedded Audio to SMPTE ST299 Synchronous to video at 48 kHz sample rate nominal Table 104 5949 and 5925 Video AHP Output Modules Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 326 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Specifications C 2 3 5949 and 5925 Video AHP Output Modules 1080p Up to 16 SMPTE 424M carrier SMPTE 425M Level A 1080p 4 2 2 10 bit 50 59 94 60 progressive frames s Mapping structure 1 Embedded Audio to SMPTE ST299 1 and ST299 2 Synchronous to video at 48
194. dio Processing on the Output Module The 4925 audio output module can manipulate the audio channels received from the audio crosspoint before outputting them This makes it possible to manipulate the audio output channels within the router The audio processing functions allow gain control phase invert and stereo mode left right swap left both right both or mono mix The audio processing is standard for each audio module Audio processing is controlled from Workbench RollCall or RollPod panels Fig 184 and Fig 185 shows the order that the processing is applied to the audio signals Audio Transport Stream from Main Audio Crosspoint card MADI Outputs x 3 AES Output x 120 Audio Crosspoint Auto Changeover Switch Stereo Mode Audio Transport Stream from Redundant Audio Crosspoint card Audio Transport Stream Decoder Gain and Phase Invert To Input Output To Input Output Monitoring Monitoring Module License Color Code Free License with Module Input Output Monitoring selected from either the input or the output of the module pre or post processing See section 5 6 3 for details on how to configure this using the router Door screen Fig 184 Audio Channel Processing Block Diagram AES Rear Panel Audio Transport Stream from Main Audio Crosspoint card MADI Outputs x 12 Main x 12 Copies Stereo Mode MADI Encoder Audio Crosspoint Auto Changeover Switc
195. dule LEDs Table 53 shows the LED color code on the 5930 input monitoring crosspoint module and Fig 151 shows the front edge of the module LED Color Function Power OK Detail Power to the module Normal Working Status On Solid working correctly Command OK module Command from the Control Flashing receiving information and working correctly Command Error Control module Error with command from the Off normal state Flashing the command message from the router controller is corrupt or hasn t been received Contact Snell Customer Support see section 1 2 for contact details Switch switching a route Flashes on a take signal when Off normal state Flashes each time a route is set PAL OK FPGA is working correctly Flashes and signals that the Flashing the FPGA is working correctly Table 53 5930 Sirius 840 850 Input Monitoring Crosspoint Module LEDs 5930 Command Error Command OK Switch Power OK PAL OK Fig 151 5930 Input Monitoring Module LEDs Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 226 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Multiviewer and Input Output Monitoring Modules 13 8 2 5933 Sirius 840 850 Output Monitoring Module Note The 5933 does not have any way of determining signal format so there are only a limited number of options the Catsii LED s on the control rear panel BNC monitor
196. e Nucleus controller Check the controller configuration Table 88 5916 Standard Video BNC Fiber Input Module LED Information Issue 5 Rev2 Page 293 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Modules No Longer Supplied With New Systems Power OK Local Command OK Local Error Remote Command OK Remote Error Fig 182 5916 Standard Video BNC Fiber Input Module LEDs Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 294 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Modules No Longer Supplied With New Systems B 3 B 3 1 Important Output Modules 4925 Sirius 800 AES MADI Output Module no audio delay The 4925 audio output module was supplied with earlier Sirius 800 router systems and is shown here for users that already have them fitted e The 4925 audio output module can be supplied as a replacement for these earlier systems if required The 4925 Sirius 800 AES MADI output module no audio delay can transmit either 120 AES outputs balanced or unbalanced with up to 3 MADI output channels or 12 channels of MADI outputs depending on the rear panel fitted The 4925 Output Module is compatible with the rear panels listed in Table 89 Rear Panel See Section Up to 120 AES outputs and up to 3 MADI output channels 1353 Balanced AES HD BNC MADI rear panel See section 11 8 1356 Unbalanced AES HD BNC MADI rear panel See section 11 9 1298 Balanced AES rear panel no MADI No longer suppl
197. e 1 StartupDelay 5 SharePort 2050 BridgePort 2600 BridgeRemoteAddress 128 1 1 1 BridgeAutoConnect 0 Name 2450 Information1 Info1 Information2 Info2 NetNibbles 1000 UseLongNames 0 The Force10M flag specifies whether the network speed of the controller is limited to 10Mbits per second or 100Mbits per second For Sirius 800 routers this must be set to 1 this is the default value and sets the network communication speed to 10 Mbps This specifies a standard 4 byte IPv4 address This value is not used if UseDHCP is set to 1 This specifies a standard 4 byte IPv4 subnet mask This value is not used if UseDHCP is set to 1 This specifies a standard 4 byte IPv4 address of the default gateway This value is not used if USeDHCP is set to 1 This specifies a standard 4 byte IPv4 address of the domain name server This value is not used if UseDHCP is set to 1 The UseDHCP parameter is used to specify if the Nucleus controller should obtain an IP address via DHCP as opposed to the address specified in the ini file If this is set to 1 then the IP address of the controller is assigned by the local DHCP server and the IPAddress SubNetMask DefaultGateway and DNSAddress settings in the ini file are ignored If it is set to 0 then the ini file settings is used If UseDHCP is not specified in the ini file then it defaults to 1 The UseSNMP flag enables or disables the SNMP features on the cont
198. e Catsii inputs and outputs can be identified using the door PC Fig 44 Catsii Functionality Catsii Control Global Catsii Catsii or On Off Colours Current Input 0 LED ID Current Entry 8 rm Notes Press Normal to switch to showing signal format Menu snell I Enter sequence and press Take to activate LED Identification Press Clear to erase current sequence entry Catsii Colour Configuration Colour Configuration Catsii Standard Colour No Signal Solid Red Remo DVB ASI Yellow_Pulsed_Off Control SD No Audio Solid_Yellow SD With Audio Yellow Pulsed White 720p No Audio Green Pulsed Off 720p With Audio Green Pulsed White 1080i No Audio Solid Green 1080i With Audio Green Pulsed White 1080p No Audio Solid Blue 1080p With Audio Blue Pulsed White MADI 56 44 1k Yellow Pulsed Blue MADI 56 48k Yellow Pulsed Off MADI 56 other Yellow Pulsed Red MADI 64 44 1k Green Pulsed Blue MADI 64 48k Green Pulsed Off MADI 64 other Green Pulsed Red PP Note These parameters Mi cannot be changed in run snell mode Fig 44 Door PC Catsii Control 6 3 Workbench Catsii Control To apply a user assigned color configuration through Workbench from a remote PC 1 In Workbench Configuration mode click on Edit Controller Config select the Generic tab and click on the Edit Controller button This opens the Generic Editor Nucleus 2450 Controllers Navigate
199. e Page 2 NAO0884 00 06 Firmware Page 3 PA0698 02 02 Firmware Page 4 PAO957 0125 Firmware Page 5 PA0956 01 27 Firmware Page 6 PA0956 01 27 Firmware Page 7 PA0956 01 27 Menu Fag Delle Sos Modules Fig 25 Module Firmware Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 56 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Door PC 5 2 3 Temperature This screen displays the temperature of each module fitted in the router Slot color indicates module presence and does not change with temperature see the on screen Key for details Temperature vae RM Ee ae ISTA DEEMETISISISISITENECISIGISISITISISENMO WKE W LITT cc e m EM occ Fig 26 Module Temperatures Sirius 840 Router shown Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 57 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Door PC 5 3 Note 5 3 1 Signals The Signals box on the main menu screen contains the Video Inputs MADI Inputs and References buttons Modules are configured from the Local Router hardware tab Advanced Configuration Edit Module Configurations in Workbench See the Workbench manual for full details Video Inputs Video Inputs This screen displays details of the video input signals for each module fitted in the router Use the Next and Previous buttons to move through the modules Touch the Switch References button to view the switching point references used by the incoming video signals for the selected module see Fig 2
200. e button on the left Dial Up keypad 4 The connector for channel 35 will be in the centre of the cross hair on the rear of the router 5 Once you have located the connector touch the Clear button on the left Dial Up keypad to remove the cross hair The Clear button must also be touched before entering a new source or destination 6 Touch the Normal button on the left Dial Up keypad to return the Catsii LEDs to their previous state Catsii Color Configuration This screen shows the Catsii colors used on your system Touch the Catsii Colours button on the Catsii Control screen see Fig 38 The Catsii colors can be changed from Workbench see section 6 3 for details Catsii Colour Configuration Colour Confiquration Catsit Standard Colour No Signal Solid Red ic DVB ASI Yellow Pulsed Off Control SD No Audio Solid Yellow SO With Audio Yellow Pulsed Wnite 720p No Audio Green Pulsed Off 720p With Audio Green Pulsed Wh amp e 10801 No Audio Solid Green 10801 With Audio Green Pulsed Wh e 1080p No Audio Solid Blue 1080p With Audio Blue Pulsed White MADI 56 44 1k Yellow Pulsed Blue MADI 56 48k Yellow Pulsed Off MADI 56 other Yellow Putsed Red MADI 64 44 1k Green Pulsed Blue MADI 64 48k Green Pulsed Off MADI 64 other Green Pulsed Red pe Note These parameters cannot be changed in run Ment lt a mose Fig 40 Catsii Color Configuration Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 74 2014 S
201. e is inserted correctly If the Local Error LED is flashing at the same time as the Local Command OK LED is flashing it suggests a mismatch in the configuration of the Nucleus controller Check the controller configuration Table 87 5915 Sirius 800 Video AHP Input Module LED Information Issue 5 Rev2 Page 289 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Modules No Longer Supplied With New Systems LED Color Label Detail Normal Working Status Remote Command OK Receiving messages from remote Nucleus control module the Nucleus controller in the frame linked to this frame Sirius 830 840 850 no expansion Off Expansion not used Sirius 850 expanded to second frame Flashing receiving information and working correctly Remote Error Error with messages from remote Nucleus control module the Nucleus controller in the frame linked to this frame Sirius 830 840 850 no expansion Off Expansion not used Sirius 850 expanded to second frame Off normal state Flashing the command message from the remote router controller is corrupt or hasn t been received This communications error could be caused by a hardware failure or incorrect insertion Check that the module is inserted correctly and the four RJ45 connections between the frames are fitted correctly see section 12 2 If the Remote Error LED is flashing at the same time as the Remote Comman
202. e router The default is YES Setting this to NO means that status response 1 to 4 are returned depending on what router the 2450 is connected to See SW P 02 for which routers return which responses This is intended for use with existing equipment that does not support the status response 5 message Used to switch on or off unsolicited connects on the TCP connection When set to false a connected messages are only sent on a TCP port in response to a connect on that TCP port When set to true it behaves more like the serial ports in that whenever a crosspoint is set a connected is sent on all open TCP connections even if not set by a command on that port for example a panel The default true Enables the multi cast address used for connecteds Default true Enables the multi cast address used for status 5 changes Default true Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 253 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Nucleus Router Control Modules 14 4 4 Nucleus 2450 Network ini File Each Nucleus 2450 controller has its own configuration file that defines the network connections The Network ini file can be edited using a text editor for setting the IP address for example The following fields are required in the Network ini file NETWORK Force10M 1 IPAddress nnn nnn nnn nnn SubNetMask nnn nnn nnn nnn DefaultGateway nnn nnn nnn nnn DNSAddress nnn nnn nnn nnn UseDHCP 1 UseSNMP 1 ROLLCALL Enabl
203. e router frame as if it is a standard physical video reference input Video reference signals are derived created from the BNC video reference inputs on the rear of the router These derived video references can be at a higher or lower resolution than the signal on the BNC reference input but they must share the same frame rate as the original reference signal they are created from For further details on derived video references see section 3 9 The pictorial status screen displays the video standard of each of the external BNC reference inputs The screen also shows whether the external references are passed straight to one of the four internal references or are used to create one or more derived references Any of the references can have an offset applied if required The audio reference input status is also displayed Touch the Configure References button to make configuration changes to the video references see Fig 32 If the Configure References button is not displayed on the door screen it is not possible to configure the references from the door screen This will be the case when the screen has been edited by the system administrator to stop references being modified from the router door screen Alternatively references can be configured from Workbench and pushed to the controllers see the Workbench manual for information For details on configuring the audio reference see section 3 10 Derived References External Reference
204. e router frame before inserting the front modules The rear panel fastening screws should not require any pressure when screwing them into the router frame They should screw in without any resistance until the Screw head secures the rear panel to the frame If a rear panel fastening screw binds up then it should be removed and the screw alignment should be checked before the screw is refitted Do not overtighten the rear panel fastening screws Electrostatic Damage Static precautions must be observed when inserting and removing all system modules Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 104 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com i AT 4 Remove t T e Fig 67 Inserting and Removing Vertical Modules The vertical module levers locate into the metalwork of the Sirius 800 frame allowing easy insertion and removal 1 To access the modules the associated front fan assembly must be opened first e The fan assembly should be placed back into the closed position as soon as possible after opening as this ensures correct ventilation of the frame Failure to do this will result in failure e In practice the maximum time that a fan assembly can be left open will depend on a number of factors such as ambient temperature frame loading crosspoint routings etc To ensure correct operation under all conditions the fan assemblies should be left open for no more than 4 minutes at a time Sirius 8
205. e system the control signals are sent to all the modules in the frame In a two frame system control signals are distributed to the local and remote busses If the control signals from the remote bus fail the data to the expansion outputs and crosspoints is substituted by the local control In a single frame system the input module never illuminates the Control Error LED In a two frame system the input module illuminates this Control Error LED if the remote bus fails Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 268 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Control Fan Interface Module 15 1 3 Control Fan Interface Module LEDs Table 76 shows the LED color code on the control fan interface module and Fig 166 shows the module LEDs LED Color Function Power OK Local Command OK Local Error Remote Command OK not 2453 2455 2457 Detail Power to the module Receiving messages from local Nucleus control module Error with messages from local Nucleus control module Receiving messages from remote Nucleus control module Table 76 Control Fan Interface Module LED Indication Normal Working Status On Solid working correctly Flashing receiving information and working correctly Off normal state Flashing the command message from the router controller is corrupt or hasn t been received This communications error could be caused by a hardware failure although this is unlikely Check that the module is
206. ear connectors see section 8 3 8 1 For details of the Sirius 850 DIN 1 0 2 3 expansion rear connectors see section 8 3 8 2 Issue 5 Rev2 Page 41 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Product Overview 3 9 Important 3 9 1 Important Note Video Reference Inputs The video reference signal inputs are used to ensure that the router crosspoint switch is compliant to SMTPE RP168 2009 for that video standard The Nucleus controller automatically detects the incoming signal and therefore it can be configured to switch on a specific standard The Workbench Switch Point Editor specifies which reference type the signal can switch from Set from Edit Configuration Routers Advanced Configuration References See the Workbench user manual for details on how to configure the switching points If there is no reference signal the router will crash switch on receiving the switch command The Sirius 800 router has four analogue BNC video reference inputs e 4x analogue video all auto sensing to 525 and 625 B amp B or HD tri level reference See section 16 2 for the video reference connector locations Derived Video References Nucleus2 Controllers Only Derived video references enable the router to use a reference signal standard that is not available from outside of the router frame as if it is a standard physical video reference input Ensure module address 279 is
207. ection For details of the Monitor 1 to 4 BNC connections see section 16 2 Monitor 1t04 Output Monitoring selected from either the input or the output of the module pre or post processing See section 5 6 3 for details on how to configure this using the router Door PC Fig 142 Output Monitoring Only No Multiviewer outputs Option Sirius 840 850 13 4 4 Sirius 850 Input Output Monitoring Only no multiviewer outputs e 5930 qty 1 Input Monitor module 5933 qty 1 Output Monitor module Video Audio Outputs c 0 1 x 5933 Far 1 x 5930 See section 13 8 1 See section Pr 8 ocess Video Audio Inputs Monitor 1t04 For details of the Monitor 1 to 4 BNC connections see section 16 2 Input Output Monitoring selected from either the input or the output of the module pre or post processing See section 5 6 3 for details on how to configure this using the router Door PC Fig 143 Input Output Monitoring Only Option Sirius 840 850 Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 218 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Multiviewer and Input Output Monitoring Modules 13 5 Note 13 5 1 5902 Sirius 800 Series Multiviewer Crosspoint Module The 5902 Sirius 800 series multiviewer crosspoint module is a 576x144 crosspoint taking all the input signals and routing them to a multiviewer output module Connectors to the Motherboard LEDs Fig 1
208. ed AES input 110 Q termination Only one audio reference balanced or unbalanced should be connected to the router Connecting both audio references will stop the audio routing from functioning correctly A controller can be configured to distribute an AES reference around the router so that the audio output modules can lock to it The AES reference generated is either a free running clock set to an AES clock rate of 48 kHz or it can be locked to a physical input reference on the router either the AES reference or one of the video references The audio reference is configured in Workbench from Controller Configuration Local Router Hardware Advanced Configuration Edit Derived References See the Workbench user manual for full setting details These values are part of the database configuration so will need to be pushed to the controller along with the rest of the configuration data Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 45 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Product Overview 3 11 Audio Routing and AHP Router Modifications Note Early Sirius 800 routers must be modified by Snell before they can be used for audio routing processing and video processing see Table 5 to identify your current frame configuration and the level of routing and processing it is capable of Modifications to the router frame are carried out by Snell and include Front and Rear Fans upgraded blue fan casings Output Module fan
209. ed and kept free from the build up of dust All the fan modules are monitored for failure Air is pulled in through the ventilation slots in the front door and circulated through the router passing over the modules and then expelled by the rear fans air is also expelled out at points on each side of the frame where the crosspoint modules are situated The power supply shelves have their own integral cooling system e Ensure the flow of air is not restricted through the vents and fan exhausts Do not obstruct the air vents situated on both sides of the frame and allow a minimum of 50 mm 2 inches clearance to allow air flow The air that is exhausted from the sides must be able to flow past the rear of the router frame without being obstructed This also applies to the PSU shelves e The fan assemblies should be placed back into the closed position as soon as possible after opening as this ensures correct ventilation of the frame Failure to do this will result in failure e In practice the maximum time that a fan assembly can be left open will depend on a number of factors such as ambient temperature frame loading crosspoint routings etc To ensure correct operation under all conditions the fan assemblies should be left open for no more than 4 minutes at a time Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 18 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Warnings and Precautions 2 9 Safety Standards This equipment complies with the
210. eee eee 127 9 12 2 AES Audio Functions LL 128 9 12 3 MADI Audio Functions lille 128 9 12 4 Audio Processing on the Input Module 129 9 12 4 1 Gain Control and Phase Invert LL 130 9 12 4 2 Stereo Mode res 130 9 12 5 4915 Connections to the Audio Crosspoints 04 130 9 12 6 4915 Input Module LED Information 131 9 13 5917 Sirius 800 Standard Video BNC Fiber Input Module 133 9 13 1 5917 Input Module LED Information 134 9 14 5919 Sirius 800 Video AHP Input Module with Delay and Sync Capability 136 9 14 1 Advanced Hybrid Processing on the 5919 Input Module 137 Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 5 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Contents 9 14 1 1 Frame Line Sync and Video Delay 138 9 14 1 2 Embedded Audio Delay 141 9 14 1 3 Gain Control and Phase Invert LL 141 9 14 1 4 16 Channel Mixer eh 141 9 14 1 5 Channel Swap Shuffle 141 9 14 2 5919 Connections to the Audio Crosspoints 141 9 14 3 5919 Input Module LED Information LL 142 10 Crosspoint Modules cect eee 145 10 1 Video Crosspoint Modules 0 0 0 cece eee 145 10 1 1 5901 Sirius 800 Series Video Crosspoint Module 145 10 1 2 5905 Sirius 800 Series Video Crosspoint Module 146 10 1 3 Video Crosspoint Module LED Information 147 10 2 Sirius 830 Video Crosspoint Arrangement 0 eee eee 149 10 2 1
211. els received from the input rear panels before outputting them to the video and audio crosspoint modules This makes it possible to customize the audio input channels to a house standard within the router Processing is a licensed option and must be purchased for each module it is used on See section 3 5 for details Processing is configured in Workbench Fig 179 shows the order that the processing is applied to the audio To Input Output Monitoring To Input Output To Multiviewer Monitoring Output or To Video ES E Crosspoint o Video with g Embedded F E 5 X Audio E E E 5 Audio Transport T o 2 Stream to p 3 amp Main Audio o E S lt 2 9 a 3 29 Crosspoint card amp 2 o 2g S Ss e So t S O fr 2 ot o o o9 E g Audio Transport o Stream to Redundant Audio Signal Color Code Crosspoint card Module License Color Code S8AHP VA AHP License Input Output Monitoring selected from either the input or the output of the module pre or post processing See section 5 6 3 for details on how to configure this using the router Door PC Fig 179 Processing Block Diagram If any embedded audio channels are asynchronous to the video signal the input module will use drop repeat to synchronize the audio channels with the video signal Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 287 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Modules No Longer Supplied Wi
212. emale 11 10 HD BNC MADI Output Connectors The HD BNC connector details are the same for the balanced and unbalanced AES rear panels see section 11 8 or 11 9 for rear panel details The first and last MADI Channels in the following table assume that the HD BNC breakout cables are connected to an AES rear panel located in output slot 1 of the router HD BNC Plug First MADI Channel Last MADI Channel Marking Slot 1 Slot 1 MADI 1 577 640 MADI 2 641 704 MADI 3 705 768 Table 44 Starting and Ending MADI Channels for Slot 1 Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 197 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Output Modules and Output Rear Panels 11 10 1 11 10 2 11 10 3 Use the following formula to calculate the first and last MADI channels for any other router output slot First MADI Channel Slot Number x 768 768 X Where X the First MADI channel for the required MADI connector Last MADI Channel First MADI Channel 63 Please see the following examples to see how this works in practice Example 1 Slot 5 MADI 1 Connector First MADI Channel 5 x 768 768 577 8840 768 577 3072 577 3649 First MADI Channel 3649 Last MADI Channel 3649 63 3712 Last MADI Channel 3712 Example 2 Slot 9 MADI 2 Connector First MADI Channel 9 x 768 768 641 6912 768 641 6144 641 6785 First MADI Channel 6785 Last MADI Channel 6785 63 6848 Last MADI Channel 6848
213. emoval of embedded audio VANC Data Blank On Blank all VANC interval Off Pass VANC except SMPTE defined switching line and line following Other Functions DVB ASI Handling Automatically detected and passed transparently Synchronization Method Video and audio frame drop repeat Audio Selection Pre or post video synchronization Freeze Field on interlaced standards Frame in progressive standards Minimum Delay Reference lock or 2 us to 7 us for all formats dependent on hysteresis free run state Synchronizer Hysteresis Window 5 US Table 104 5949 and 5925 Video AHP Output Modules Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 325 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Specifications 5949 and 5925 Video AHP Output Modules Embedded Audio Processing including embedding 5949 amp 5925 optional Licensed features see section 3 5 Embedded Audio Processing License Snell Order Code S8AHP VA 1 per module 24 channels Audio Mixing Up to 16 mono channels per mix Selectable from incoming video or separately routed audio Gain adjustment range per channel Silence or 72 to 30 dB in 0 1 dB steps Channel Swap Shuffle Change the channel order of up to 16 audio outputs Audio phase Invert Available per mono or stereo signal NORMAL INVERT control on off Audio Gain adjustment Per mono or stereo signal Silence or 72 to 30 dB in 0 1 dB steps Audio Embedding Embedding onto each vi
214. en the sysLocation SNMP request 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 6 is received by the card This can be set to the physical location of the equipment in the facility The SysName variable is the text that is returned when the SysName SNMP request 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 5 is received by the card This can be set to the name by which the equipment is locally referred to The NumberCommunityGetNames variable is used to specify how many community get names are listed in the ini file using the CommunityGetNameN variable Up to 2 community strings of up to 20 characters in length can be specified for get operations This is typically set to 1 The NumberCommunitySetNames variable is used to specify how many community get names are listed in the ini file using the CommunitySetNameN variable Up to 2 community strings of up to 20 characters in length can be specified for set operations This is typically set to 1 The TrapManager variable is used to specify how many trap manager addresses are listed in the ini file using the TrapManagerAddrN variable Up to 10 trap manager addresses can be specified Any more than this is ignored This is typically set to 1 The TrapManagerAddrN variable is used to specify the IP address for trap managers The N should be replaced by the number of the trap manager 1 10 The CommunityGetNameN variable is used to specify 1 of the community strings used for get operations The N should be replaced by a unique digi
215. ence 4 pairs each with passive loop through B B and Tri level Note No internal termination RS485 1 COM 3 to 4 COM 6 Female 9 Pin D Type socket x4 Serial Control these correspond to ports COM 3 to COM 6 in Workbench Door Fuse amp Spare Fuse 5 A Anti Surge Ceramic fuse 5 mm x 20 mm Door Ethernet RJ45 Ethernet connects the door PC to an external network Table 77 Sirius 830 Control Rear Panel Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 271 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Control and Alarm Rear Panel Connections Connector Function AES Reference 9 Pin D Type socket AES reference 110 balanced termination and LTC input termination Physically only one AES reference balanced or unbalanced should be connected Connecting both will stop the audio router module s functioning correctly Table 77 Sirius 830 Control Rear Panel 16 2 Sirius 840 850 Control Connections AES Unbalanced Reference Balanced LTC Controller A Ethernet Controller B Connectors 1 2 Video 3 References 4 1 COM 3 2 COM 4 RS485 Ports 3 COM 5 4 COM 6 Ethernet Not Used EXP 1 Not Used Monitor Outputs o 4 Fig 168 Sirius 840 850 Control Rear Panel Connector Function Unbal BNC AES reference 75 Q termination BAL LTC 9 Pin D Type socket AES reference 110 Q balanced termination and LTC input termination Physically only one AES ref
216. ent Power Supply 4 amp PSU 8 if present Table 84 Alarm Description co 0o0 oy A wo dp Under normal operating conditions where everything is working correctly the relay contacts are in their normally closed NC position Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 275 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Control and Alarm Rear Panel Connections Issue 5 Rev2 Page 276 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Router and Power Supply Shelf Dimensions Appendix A Router and Power Supply Shelf Dimensions A 1 Sirius 830 Frame Dimensions Make sure that sufficient space is available for the Sirius 830 For ventilation purposes there must be an additional 50 mm 2 inch gap on the left and right sides The full height of the Sirius 830 is 668 mm 26 3 inches Allow an additional 200 mm 8 inches behind the unit for power control and signal cables Dimensions are of full size system without the power supplies Dimensions are in millimeters inches 17 60 447 i Noa C7 N 9 N D g 2077 18 94 527 5 481 abado aristi IS Sx 6 82 vol ag 173 3 uj L Pi ct e ssi SN 22 61 574 4 Fig 170 Sirius 830 Frame Dimensions Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 277 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Router and Power Supply Shelf Dimensions
217. ent FTP program such as FileZilla or SmartFTP Open an FTP connection to either one of the Nucleus controllers in the router using the IP address of the Nucleus and the normal login User 2450 Password xyz 3 If no changes are required the ini file can simply be opened with a text editor such as Microsoft Notepad viewed and then closed again without saving Before making any changes backup the ini file to be modified to the computer using the FTP software It is a good idea to modify the backup filename with a date in case it is required at a future date 4 Copy the ini file to be modified from the controller to your computer using the FTP software and open it using a text editor such as Microsoft Notepad e Make any changes required to the ini file and Save the modified file to the computer D Copy the modified ini file back to the controller using the FTP software and confirm that the file is to be overwritten when prompted 7 Now use the FTP program to connect to the second Nucleus controller if it is fitted and repeat the process so that both controllers contain the modified ini file 8 Now with the modified ini file on both controllers check which of the controllers is Idle using Workbench and reset the idle controller from the controller Reset button or Workbench If the router is only fitted with a single controller the controller will be Active rather than Idle 9 If only one controller is fitted t
218. ependant on input output card configuration by linking two Sirius 850 routers together using multi way cables No other external splitters or combiners are required Issue 5 Rev2 Page 21 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Product Overview 3 1 3 1 1 Signal Flow The Sirius 800 routers are large scale multi format video and audio routers The Sirius 800 routers enable you to mix and match different signal formats 3 Gb s and 1 5 Gb s HD and SD video and embedded AES and MADI audio in the same frame Different video signal formats can also be freely mixed within individual video input output modules BNC and Fiber connections are available for video and MADI signals and high density 62 way D type sockets for AES In addition to video and audio Advanced Hybrid Processing AHP modules allow adjustment and processing of input and output signals Video Crosspoint Audio Crosspoint Signal Color Code Fig 3 Audio and Video Signal Routing n Input Modules The standard non AHP video input modules 5917 5913 5914 amp 5916 route the video and embedded audio through to the video crosspoint cards The AHP video input modules 5919 amp 5915 de embed up to 16 mono audio channels per video input Both the embedded and de embedded audio channels can be manipulated directly on the input module before being routed through the video and audio crosspoint cards respect
219. er is applied If a fiber cable e g patchcord is already connected to an output make sure that the cable s other end is connected too before powering up the board Do not look in the end of a fiber to see if light is coming out The laser wavelengths being used are totally invisible to the human eye and can cause permanent damage Always use optical instrumentation such as an optical power meter to verify light output Cable Management It is important that the cabling to and from the router is correctly labelled and routed This will simplify the work required if the installation needs to be changed or added to at a future date Cables connected to the router must be fitted with adequate vertical and horizontal strain relief to avoid twisting of the rear panels causing damage to the router connectors and loss of electrical signal connection to the router Cables connected to the router should be routed so they do not cover any of the frame fan exhausts as this can restrict airflow through the router Power Supplies The power supply shelves are separate 2RU modules Power supply shelves are rack mountable and can be placed above below or remote from the Sirius frame Ensure that the power supply shelves are correctly earthed see section 2 7 for details The power supply units are sealed and do not contain any serviceable items Power supply shelves are heavy so it is advised that two people are needed to support the weight o
220. erates an error if one or more of the configured modules in the router fails to power up Errors are displayed on the Door screen see section 5 2 2 and the router controller LEDs see Table 6 for LED color and Fig 18 for LED position Router Controller LED LED Color Nucleus2 2463 4 Pulsing Orange Nucleus 2450 D15 Steady Red Table 6 Controller Mismatch Notification If the Door screen and router controller indicate that the configuration is not as expected i e modules added or missing then this can be resolved using Workbench For details of how to add modules to the router see the Sirius 800 Maintenance amp Upgrade manual Starting the Door PC Manually The Door PC starts automatically when the Sirius 800 is powered up If the Door PC has been shut down and needs starting manually the following procedure should be used 1 With the Sirius 800 running open the frame door 2 Inside the back of the door is the power switch for the Door PC see Fig 19 3 Switch the Door PC on by pressing and releasing the Door PC power switch it will not latch in place Wait until the computer is fully booted up before proceeding further LED Power Indicator Door PC Power Switch Exhaust Fan Power Connector Fig 19 Door PC Rear View Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 51 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Powering the Sirius 800 Routers 4 2 Powering Down the Sirius 800 Im
221. erence balanced or unbalanced should be connected Connecting both will stop the audio router module s functioning correctly Ethernet A B RJ45 x2 Ethernet for controller A and B If two Nucleus controllers are fitted both the Ethernet A and Ethernet B ports must be connected to the network Video Ref BNC x8 Video reference 4 pairs each with passive loop through B B and Tri level Note No internal termination RS485 1 COM 3 to4 9 Pin D Type socket x4 Serial Control these correspond to ports COM 6 COM 3 to COM 6 in Workbench Table 78 Control Rear Panel Sirius 840 850 Issue 5 Rev2 Page 272 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Control and Alarm Rear Panel Connections Connector Ethernet Function Not Used EXP Not Used Monitor Outputs 1 4 BNC x 4 Supports 3G SD HD video and AES audio output monitoring see section 13 7 for configuration requirements Table 78 Control Rear Panel Sirius 840 850 16 3 Sirius 840 850 Alarm Rear Panel Connections The Alarm Rear Panel contains all the alarm control connectors for the Router Fig 169 Alarm Rear Panel Connections 4 x RJ45 Connectors Sirius 840 Not Used Sirius 850 Used when expanding between two Sirius 850 frames see section 12 2 1 for details Alarms PSU Status B PSU Status A Frame ID Door Ethernet Door Fuse Spare Fuse Connector 4 x RJ45 Connectors Function Sir
222. escription Channel Configuration Applies to all video standards Detected Standard Displays the detected video standard for the selected video channel Summary button Click on the Summary button to return to the summary screen Check the box to enable frame line sync on the selected video Frame Sync Enabled channel Select the embedded audio from before or after the frame sync block Audio SBIBCHOR by clicking on the required option Sync Function Select to sync to frame or to line by clicking on the required option Table 26 Frame Sync Delay Summary Screen Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 138 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Input Rear Panels and Input Modules Function Function Description Summary tab Standard amp Mode for each video input standard Green when frame sync is enabled for the video standard Frame Syne nara Red when frame sync is not enabled for the video standard Green when video delay is enabled for the video standard Delay mdicator Red when video delay is not enabled for the video standard Table 26 Frame Sync Delay Summary Screen Frame Line Sync A video output signal can set to frame or line sync to a video reference signal physical or derived as long as the video output signal and reference frame rates match An offset can be applied to the input signal relative to the frame or line sync to allow for delays later in the system The offset for frame sync is set in frames
223. ess enter the IP address of the controller that will be the replicated peer as shown on the Workbench configuration screen IPPort if blank then the network port will be the default value which is 2007 ConnectionState True or False this is a status and is read only Active True or False this is a status and is read only Note e Changes will not take effect until the controller has been reset Issue 5 Rev2 Page 243 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Nucleus Router Control Modules Using RollCall Note e f RollCall does not connect to the router controller check that the controller is enabled for RollCall see section 14 3 9 for details Use the RollCall application or the RollCall web applet to connect to the router Double click on the controller in the network tree and select the Comms Setup screen Available Settings e Redundant Peer IP Address enter the IP address of the controller that will be the redundant peer replicated peer Redundant Peer DCOP Port if blank then the network port will be the default value which is 2007 Note The changes will not take effect until the controller has been restarted Click on the Restart Unit button to restart the Nucleus2 router control module 14 3 7 Changing the IP Address of a Nucleus2 Controller If the current IP Address of the Nucleus2 controller is known then that IP address can be changed by using the Workbench online editor
224. et 1 x RJ45 per controller 10 100Base T SW P 02 SW P 08 IN RollCall third party control systems using SW P 02 amp SW P 08 SNMP Control and SNMP Monitoring support plus DCCP connection to Workbench Table 107 Nucleus2 2463 Router Control Module Nucleus 2450 Serial 4 x RS485 on 9 way D type Support for SW P 02 SW P 02 IN time stamped crosspoint set SW P 06 RS 485 multi drop panel protocol SW P 08 GVG ES Control and Harris Passthrough Default 38 4 kbaud Ethernet 1 x RJ45 per controller 10 100Base T SW P 02 IN IP RollCall third party control systems using SW P 02 SNMP Control SNMP Monitoring support plus DCCP connection to Workbench Table 108 Nucleus 2450 Router Control Module Alarms Alarms Relay changeover for PSU fan and Controller failure Comprehensive alarms reporting and auto failure recovery via Workbench Table 109 Alarms Reference Inputs Number and Type 4 x analogue video all auto sensing to 525 and 625 B amp B or HD tri level reference 1 x AES reference 48 kHz only Switch timing to SMPTE RP168 Sources individually assignable to each reference or internally derived reference or auto detected Internally derived reference Nucleus2 2463 only Table 110 Reference Inputs Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 331 2014 Snell Limited
225. ete rov KivOuvo nAckrpomAnt ac unv EKOETETE rr TUGKEUT ac Bpoxri rj vypao a b N vra va efaogaAiZere rr OWOTH yeiwon rc auokeurjc Kal rr OWOTH o v ton rov ouv opwv Tpopodogiac gt OefomAop g mp nei va Trogosonita am va g otnpa rpogodogiag mou va t agqoAic i MPOETATEYTIKH FEINEH it 4 ket va yer ka amp opiop vtc 0 otic OUSETEPOU Kai onc bo t omAicp c mov rpoqo orti t cuc kcurj Oa mp mei va fjp akerar KOVT OTN GUGKEUI Kai va givar i t koAc mpocf cipioc Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 14 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Warnings and Precautions 2 1 A 2 2 2 3 Note Explanation of Safety Symbols This symbol refers the user to important information contained in the accompanying literature This symbol indicates that hazardous voltages are present inside No user serviceable parts inside This system should only be serviced by trained personnel Safety Warnings Servicing instructions where given are for use by qualified personnel only To reduce the risk of electric shock do not perform any actions on this equipment other than contained in the operating instructions unless you are qualified to do so Refer all servicing to qualified personnel To reduce the risk of electric shock do not expose this appliance to rain or moisture Always ensure that the unit is properly earthed and power connections correctly made This equipment mus
226. ets for balanced AES audio inputs The 1299 Sirius 830 Balanced AES input rear panel was supplied with earlier Sirius 830 router systems and is shown here for users that already have them fitted The 1354 Sirius 830 Balanced AES input rear panel can be supplied as direct replacement for the 1299 if required See section 9 9 1 for details of the 1354 rear panel f unbalanced AES inputs are required see section 9 10 1 for details The 1299 rear panel is used in the Sirius 830 with the 4915 120 channel AES MADI input module For the wiring details for the 62 way D Type sockets see section 9 9 3 Not Used ay Socket 1 Inputs 1 to 24 Socket 2 Inputs 25 to 48 Socket 3 Inputs 49 to 72 Socket 4 Inputs 73 to 96 Socket 5 Inputs 97 to 120 Fig 174 1299 AES Balanced Input Rear Panel Sirius 830 only Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 281 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Modules No Longer Supplied With New Systems B 1 2 Sirius 840 850 1297 Balanced AES Input Rear Panel The 1297 balanced AES input rear panel has 5 x 62 way female high density sockets for balanced AES audio inputs Note e The 1297 Sirius 840 850 Balanced AES input rear panel was supplied with earlier Sirius 840 850 router systems and is shown here for users that already have them fitted e The 1352 Sirius 840 850 Balanced AES input rear panel can be supplied as direct replacement for the 1297 if required
227. f 0 1dB in a range of 72 dB to 30 dB Phase Invert Phase invert will invert the audio waveform 9 14 1 4 16 Channel Mixer There are 16 Mixers available per video input channel and each mixer can mix up to 16 channels of audio Each 16 channel mixer is used to mix two or more audio input channels together to create a single mono signal that is output from the mixer 9 14 1 5 Channel Swap Shuffle The channel shuffler is used to change the channel order of one or more of the audio channels 9 14 2 5919 Connections to the Audio Crosspoints The 5919 video input module creates two identical multiplexed audio transport streams each of which contains all of the audio channels on the input module up to 768 mono channels One transport stream is sent to the main audio crosspoint module and a duplicate transport stream is sent to the redundant audio crosspoint module Issue 5 Rev2 Page 141 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Input Rear Panels and Input Modules 9 14 3 5919 Input Module LED Information Table 29 shows the LED color code on the 5919 Input Module and Fig 95 shows the front edge of the input module LED Color Label Deiail Normal Working Status Each Pair of FPGA LEDS Flashing rapidly between Red amp Green 1 FPGA 1 status 2 Hz each LED starting up Green On Solid amp Red Off normal state working correctly Green Off amp Red On Solid FPGA programming fault fo
228. f the power supply shelves during installation To prevent damage power supply shelves should not be mounted using just the front ears and should have support at the rear of the shelves The power supply alarm cable s and 48 V DC cables are supplied by Snell and can be ordered as either 2 5 meter cables or 8 meter cables Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 16 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Warnings and Precautions 2 7 Earth Cables Functional Earth 48 V DC power Protective Earth Point see section connectors Point see 2 7 2 i section 2 7 1 x TT PowerCon AC Input 25 Way D Type Connectors x4 Alarms Connector Fig 1 Power Supply Shelf Rear Panel 2 7 4 Important Protective Earth Information Due to the high leakage current ensure that all of the power supply shelves are grounded to the protective earth Earth studs are provided on the rear of each power supply shelf for this purpose These studs have M6 size nuts and are suitable to take an eyelet crimp Note The Protective earth is indicated on the power supply shelf by this symbol D located on the right side of the power supply shelf see Fig 1 Protective Earthing is a conductor in the building installation wiring or in the power supply cord connecting a main protective earthing terminal to an earth point in the building installation PROTECTIVE EARTH The building installation must provide a means for conne
229. f the router needs modifying Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 95 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Module Locations 8 3 2 Sirius 840 Rear Panel Locations Frames that are not fully populated with input or output rear panels have blanking plates fitted in their place A of electrical signal connection to the router Cables connected to the router must be fitted with adequate vertical and horizontal strain relief to avoid twisting of the rear panels causing damage to the router connectors and loss ERN yatt L x 1 gne EE ru Te Q0 Ihe l fi Fig 58 Sirius 840 Rear Module Locations 1309 Multiviewer Coax Rear Panel up to 3 1285 Input BNC Rear x 24 1286 Input Fiber Rear x 24 en 289 Input BNC Rear x 24 1305 Input Fiber Rear x 24 1352 Input Balanced AES Rear x 24 1355 Input Unbalanced AES Rear x 24 1287 Input Balanced AES Rear x 24 Alarm Rear Panel 1295 Output BNC Rear x 24 1296 Output Fiber Rear x 24 1264 Output BNC Rear x 24 1202 Output Fiber Rear x 24 1353 Output Balanced AES Rear x 24 1956 Output Unbalanced AES Rear x 24 1298 Output Balanced AES Rear 24 Control Rear Panel e See section 8 1 for details on which rear panels that can be used with which front module e See section 8 3 7 for BNC and Fiber rear panel channel numbers and layout Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 96 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Module Loc
230. ference e When sample rate converting AES to 32 kHz or 48 kHz the output can be locked to any video reference or to the AES reference but not an AES reference of 44 1 kHz e MADI Sample rate conversion is applied to all pairs in the MADI output stream rather than individual channels All pairs in the MADI stream will be synchronous to each other and output at the same selected sample rate Supports conversion to 48 kHz Channels within a pair must be the same initial sample rate and synchronous to each other If they are asynchronous to each other then sample drop or repeat is used on the right channel to match the left channel Pairs within an AES group or MADI output stream can be asynchronous to each other and can be different sample rates to each other when they enter the sample rate conversion process The output from the sample rate conversion can be locked to the AES reference input or one of the four physical video reference inputs e f no reference signal is present on the selected reference input all the SRCs on the 4929 module using that reference input will be free running and independent of any other module in the frame Dolby Signals e Dolby signals must be routed as a synchronous AES pair The Dolby signal will automatically bypass the SRC even if the pair is selected for sample rate conversion Any near rate reference locking is achieved by dropping or repeating Null samples in the guard band E
231. ferent Please see the database configuration for details Extended commands Interrogate 65 Connect 66 Tally 67 Connected 68 For all these commands the monitor rows are mapped onto destinations starting at 16370 Ox3FF2 All numbers with an Asterisk against them are Base 0 e Destination 16370 Monitor row 1 Destination 16371 Monitor row 2 Destination 16372 Monitor row 3 e Destination 16373 Monitor row 4 Alternatively use the New Monitor Row Interrogate or connect commands in SW P 02 issue 32 and above The sources are mapped the same way as the standard commands however all of the inputs are now accessible Monitor Row Source Numbering Some older routers only had output monitoring which was addressed as sources 0 to 575 When the input monitoring feature was added to routers the input monitoring sources had to be added on top of the existing range to maintain compatibility with the older routers and controllers Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 260 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Nucleus Router Control Modules 14 6 1 1 Sirius 830 Sirius 830 Router 288 x 140 Multiviewer Outputs 288 x 288 Video Inputs 1153 to 1292 16370 Multiviewer to 16373 outputs Monitoring Outputs Fig 161 Sirius 830 Router Diagram Main video inputs and outputs are 1 288 e Outputs 16370 Monitor row 1 e Outputs 16371 Monitor row 2 e Outputs 16372
232. following standards EN60950 1 2006 Safety of information Technology Equipment Including Electrical Business Equipment UL1419 3rd Edition UL File E193966 Standard for Safety Professional Video and Audio equipment EMC Standards This unit conforms to the following standards EN55103 1 1996 Environment E4 Electromagnetic Compatibility Product family standard for audio video audio visual and entertainment lighting control apparatus for professional use Part 1 Emission EN55103 2 1996 Environment E2 Electromagnetic Compatibility Product family standard for audio video audio visual and entertainment lighting control apparatus for professional use Part 2 Immunity Federal Communications Commission Rules 47 CFR 2009 Part 15 Subpart B Class A EMC Performance of Cables and Connectors Snell products are designed to meet or exceed the requirements of the appropriate European EMC standards In order to achieve this performance in real installations it is essential to use cables and connectors with good EMC characteristics All signal connections including remote control connections shall be made with screened cables terminated in connectors having a metal shell The cable screen shall have a large area contact with the metal shell COAXIAL CABLES Coaxial cables connections particularly serial digital video connections shall be made with high quality double screened coaxial cables such as Belden 1694A or Belden 1505A D TYPE CONNECTORS
233. front edge of the module If the active LED is not illuminated it is safe to remove the video crosspoint module without affecting any active routes LED Color Detail Status 5905 only Config G 5905 only FPGA status Flashing rapidly between Red amp Green 2 Hz each LED starting up Green On Solid amp Red Off normal state working correctly Green Off amp Red On Solid FPGA programming fault found Remove module and refit to force a reboot Red amp Green Flashing very rapidly in sync 4 Hz each LED A change has been made to the module settings database in RAM but it has not yet been written to flash memory This is not a fault and the flash memory will be updated after a period of inactivity Do not remove power from the module while this indication is present as the flash may become corrupted Other indications are displayed when performing a firmware upgrade see the Sirius 800 Maintenance amp Upgrade manual for details Power to the module On Solid working correctly FPGA Working Flashing the FPGA is working correctly Command from the Control module Flashing receiving information and working correctly Error with command from the Control module Off normal state Flashing the command message from the router controller is corrupt or hasn t been received If all of the crosspoint modules indicate a Command Error check that the router con
234. g 117 on page 188 1296 Fiber rear panel See Fig 118 on page 189 Table 90 MADI Main and Backup Connections Configuring MADI to 56 or 64 Channels Individual MADI channels are configured to output in 56 or 64 channel MADI using the Workbench Online Editor 2463 Nucleus2 Router Control Module Navigate to Controller Devices Devices 1 LocalRouterDevice LocalRouterConfig ModuleConfigurations ModuleConfiguration XXX AudioOutput MADIControl MADIControl YY Format Where XXX the Module ID of the Audio Output Module see the Workbench manual for details YY the MADI channel 1 to 12 being configured Select the number of MADI channels from the drop down menu MADI56 configures the MADI channel to 56 channels e MADI64 configures the MADI channel to 64 channels e Ensure both 2463 router control modules are configured the same by using the Copy to Partner function in Workbench once configurations changes have been made Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 296 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Modules No Longer Supplied With New Systems B 3 1 3 AES Audio Outputs Up to 120 balanced or unbalanced AES outputs dependant on rear panel fitted Re generates the AES clock from incoming data nominal 48 kHz VU amp C Validity User and Channel status flags are regenerated to a default standard on each channel when re aligning audio See Table 105 on page 327 for default standard details
235. g destinations 577 to 1152 Expansion Output Ports labelled Connects to 5928 Expansion Output Module Fig 131 1290 Expansion Output Rear Panel A video input signal passes through the 5928 expansion output module and out from the 1290 expansion rear panel to an output 577 to 1152 in the second frame Output from a frame to the expanded frame is via three expansion cables per 1290 expansion output rear panel The three expansion cables are supplied with each 1290 expansion rear panel that is purchased the cables are six meters 19 feet long Spare expansion cables can be ordered using Snell order code FGAEY WDS6THIN Each 1290 rear panel must be connected to the expansion inputs of the corresponding output module in the second Sirius 850 frame i e slot 1 to slot 1 slot 2 to slot 2 etc The expansion input connectors are located below the output module rear panel connectors 1 to 24 and are marked a b and c The connections on the 1290 rear panel are marked A B and C The expansion cables connect A to a B to b and C to c See section 12 2 for further information Note tis not possible to mix the 1290 and 1293 Output Rear Panels in a frame Issue 5 Rev2 Page 208 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Sirius 850 Video Expansion 12 6 1293 Sirius 850 Video DIN 1 0 2 3 mini Coax Output Rear Panel The 1293 Sirius 850 Video DIN 1 0 2 3 mini Coax Output rear panel has 24 x DIN
236. ge 48 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Powering the Sirius 800 Routers 4 Powering the Sirius 800 Routers 4 1 Important 4 1 1 Note Before powering the router on ensure that the router has been installed in accordance with the appropriate Sirius 800 Installation and Quick Start guide and local safety regulations Powering Up the Sirius 800 When power is connected to the Sirius 800 the controllers and fans switch on immediately The main signal modules within the Sirius 800 start to power up one second after the 48 V DC supply has been switched on To avoid overloading the individual external power supply units make sure that you power them all up as quickly as possible and at least half of the power supply units within one second of each other Power Sequencing To reduce the inrush current when the whole unit is powered up the modules in the router power up over a period of six seconds starting with the controllers and fans and ending with the audio crosspoints When hot plugging in a module to the Sirius 800 there is a delay before the module powers up Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 49 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Powering the Sirius 800 Routers 4 1 2 Power Up and Initialization Once the controller has booted see Fig 18 for LED states when the controller is running it is ready to setup Router Configuration is carried out using Workbench
237. ges backup the ini file to be modified to the computer It is a good idea to modify the backup filename with a date in case it is required at a future date 7 Openthe ini file to be modified using a text editor such as Microsoft Notepad 8 Make any changes required to the ini file and Save the modified file to the Compact Flash card 9 Eject the Compact flash card from your computer and remove the Compact flash card 10 Insert the Compact flash card back in the Nucleus controller 11 Replace the Nucleus controller in the router and it will reboot 12 If changes are also required on the second Nucleus controller if it is fitted repeat the process so that both controllers contain the modified ini file Nucleus 2450 Changing the IP Address The Nucleus controller IP address and network connection information is stored in the Network ini file on the Compact Flash card on the Nucleus controller see section 14 4 4 for details of the contents of the Network ini file The Network ini can be opened by using a text editor such as Microsoft Notepad at which point it can be viewed backed up and modified as required If the IP address is known then this can be done remotely via FTP software or if it is not known then the Compact Flash card can be removed from the controller and read locally on a computer See section 14 4 5 for details on both methods If the controller IP address is changed remember to use the new IP address to connecting
238. gn one or more audio mapping templates to quickly group and name the channel order signal types and these can then be applied to the input and output channels as required This method simplifies the configuration process which makes setting up new input and output feeds quicker and less prone to errors Sirius 800 Input Output Modules Input Modules The following input modules are available for the Sirius 800 routers input modules fitted to earlier routers are listed in Appendix B 2 Video Input Modules 5917 Sirius 800 Standard Video BNC Fiber Input Module Input connector type dependant on rear panel fitted 5919 Sirius 800 Video AHP Input Module with delay and Sync Capability Input connector type dependant on rear panel fitted Audio Input Module e 4915 Sirius 800 AES MADI Input Module 120 AES Pairs and 3 MADI Input Channels or 12 MADI Main amp Redundant input connector type and inputs dependant on rear panel fitted Output Modules The following output modules are available for the Sirius 800 routers output modules fitted to earlier routers are listed in Appendix B 3 Video Output Modules e 5926 Sirius 800 Standard Video Output Module Non Expandable Output connector type dependant on rear panel fitted 5938 Sirius 850 Standard Video Output Module Expandable Output connector type dependant on rear panel fitted e 5949 Sirius 800 Video Embedding amp AHP Output Module with delay and sync capa
239. gnal is passed out of the router on both of the original channels The Mono Mix is A B 2 4929 Connections to the Audio Crosspoints The 4929 audio output module receives two identical multiplexed audio transport streams each of which contains all of the audio channels on the output module up to 768 mono channels One transport stream is received from the main audio crosspoint module and a duplicate transport stream is received from the redundant audio crosspoint module The output module monitors the transport streams received from each of the audio crosspoint modules for errors If an error is found the output module will use the transport stream from the other audio crosspoint module if it is fitted Dueto the nature of multiplexed audio transport streams there is an extremely small delay between groups of channels as the transport stream is constructed If the audio is locked to the input these delays will need to be considered e Ifthe audio is locked to an external reference or is sample rate converted these delays are managed by the router and the audio will remain co timed Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 171 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Output Modules and Output Rear Panels 11 1 7 4929 Output Module LED Information Table 36 shows the LED color code on the 4929 Output Module and Fig 106 shows the front edge of the output module LED Color Label Detail Normal Working Status CPU st
240. h Audio Transport Stream from Redundant Audio Crosspoint card Audio Transport Stream Decoder Gain and Phase Invert To Input Output To Input Output Ri or ac Monitoring Monitoring Module License Color Code Free License with Module Input Output Monitoring selected from either the input or the output of the module pre or post processing See section 5 6 3 for details on how to configure this using the router Door screen Fig 185 Audio Channel Processing Block Diagram MADI Rear Panel Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 298 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Modules No Longer Supplied With New Systems B 3 1 6 B 3 1 7 B 3 1 8 Gain Control and Phase Invert Gain Gain is applied to an audio output channel as Silence mute or in steps of 0 1dB in a range of 72 dB to 30 dB Phase Invert Phase invert will invert the audio waveform Stereo Mode Stereo Mode is used to manipulate stereo pairs Options include Left Right Swap Left Both Right Both and Mono Mix Left Right Swap Left Right swap is used to swap the two audio channels of an AES pair over Left Both amp Right Both Left Both and Right Both are used to duplicate a single channel of a stereo pair and pass the two duplicate channels out of the router in place of the original pair Mono Mix Mono Mix is used to mix a stereo pair together to create a single mono signal This single mono signal is passed out of the router
241. h Online Editor 2463 Nucleus2 Router Control Module Navigate to Controller Devices Devices 1 LocalRouterDevice LocalRouterConfig ModuleConfigurations ModuleConfiguration XXX AudioOutput MADIControl MADIControl YY Format Where XXX the Module ID of the Audio Output Module see the Workbench manual for details YY the MADI channel 1 to 12 being configured Select the number of MADI channels from the drop down menu e MADI56 configures the MADI channel to 56 channels e MADI64 configures the MADI channel to 64 channels Ensure both 2463 router control modules are configured the same by using the Copy to Partner function in Workbench once configurations changes have been made Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 164 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Output Modules and Output Rear Panels 11 1 3 AES Audio Outputs Up to 120 balanced or unbalanced AES outputs dependant on rear panel fitted Re generates the AES clock from incoming data nominal 48 kHz VU amp C Validity User and Channel status flags are regenerated to a default standard on each channel when re aligning audio See Table 105 on page 327 for default standard details Pass asynchronous audio or Dolby E transparently at the original sample rate Asynchronous channels pass VU amp C data transparently parity is recalculated for each output Up to 3 MADI outputs are also available on HD BNC connectors with cor
242. he configuration of the Nucleus controller Check the controller configuration Remote Receiving messages Sirius 830 840 850 no expansion Command from remote Nucleus Off Expansion not used OK control module the Sirius 850 expanded to second frame Nucleus controller inthe Flashing receiving information and frame linked to this working correctly frame Remote Error with messages Sirius 830 840 850 no expansion Error from remote Nucleus Off Expansion not used control module the Sirius 850 expanded to second frame Nucleus controller in the Off normal state frame linked to this Flashing the command message from frame the remote router controller is corrupt or hasn t been received This communications error could be caused by a hardware failure or incorrect insertion Check that the module is inserted correctly and the four RJ45 connections between the frames are fitted correctly see section 12 2 If the Remote Error LED is flashing at the same time as the Remote Command OK LED is flashing it suggests a mismatch in the configuration of the Nucleus controller Check the controller configuration Table 24 5917 Input Module LED Information Issue 5 Rev2 Page 134 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Input Rear Panels and Input Modules Power OK Local Command OK Local Error Remote Command OK Remote Error Fig 89 5917 Input Module LEDs Issue 5 Rev2 Page 135 2014 Sne
243. he top section of the Sirius 850 frame each 5928 provides 24 outputs See section 12 4 for module details e Upto24 x 1293 Sirius 850 Video DIN 1 0 2 3 mini Coax Output Rear Panels one for each 5928 module fitted Fitted in the rear of the Sirius 850 frame each 1293 provides 24 DIN 1 0 2 3 coax outputs See section 12 6 for module details Video signals from the expansion video crosspoint matrix are passed to the 5928 modules destinations 577 to 1152 and the video signals are then output from the 1293 rear panels on DIN 1 0 2 3 coax connectors When 1293 cards are fitted to a Sirius 850 it is then a single frame 576 x 1152 router with no further expansion capability Fig 124 Single Sirius 850 Frame up to 576 x 1152 top section of Sirius 850 shown e Itis not possible to mix the 1290 and 1293 rear panels in a frame e If a second Sirius 850 frame is required at a future date all 1293 rear panels must be removed and replaced with 1290 expansion rear panels see section 12 2 for details Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 199 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Sirius 850 Video Expansion 12 2 Dual Sirius 850 Frames up to 1152 x 1152 Video Note The Sirius 850 is field expandable up to 1152 x 1152 video dependant on input output card configuration by linking two Sirius 850 routers together using multi way cables No other external splitters or combiners are required and expansi
244. iately to retain protection e For information on replacing the failed crosspoint card see section 10 5 5 below 10 5 5 Replacing a Failed Audio Crosspoint Module A failed audio crosspoint module can be replaced by either using the Door PC to move the routes from the failed module to the working module or without using the Door screen Both methods are described in this section e Replacing an audio crosspoint module using the Door PC see section 10 5 5 1 or Replacing an audio crosspoint module without using the Door PC see section 10 5 5 2 10 5 5 1 Replacing an Audio Crosspoint Module using the Door PC If one or more routes fail on a video crosspoint module this will be displayed on the Audio Crosspoint Matrix Status screen A typical example of how the buttons will look is listed below see Fig 36 on page 69 for button and parameter locations Fail Found indicator Red Fault Present indicator Red First Failure Detected Failed Incoming Stream and or Failed Outgoing Stream will display the first failed stream s XpntCardNone Grey e XpntCardRedundant Grey XpntCardMain Yellow indicates the main audio crosspoint has failed 1 Touch the Free Failed Crosspoint button to move all of the routes from the failed audio crosspoint module to the other audio crosspoint module Note e The fan assembly should be placed back into the closed position as soon as possible after opening as this ensures correct ventilation of the frame
245. icado para realizarlas Referir todo el trabajo de servicio a personal cualificado Para reducir el riesgo de choque el ctrico no exponer este equipo ala lluvia o humedad Siempre asegurarse de que la unidad est propiamente conectada a tierra y que las conexiones de alimentaci n est n hechas correctamente Este equipo debe ser alimentado desde un sistema de alimentaci n con conexi n a TIERRA Dy teniendo una conexi n neutra f cilmente identificable La toma de alimentaci n para la unidad debe ser cercana y f cilmente accesible Forklaring p sikkerhedssymboler Dette symbol gor brugeren opmaerksom pa vigtig information i den medf lgende manual f Dette symbol indikerer farlig sp nding inden i apparatet Ingen bruger servicerbare dele i apparatet p brugerniveau Dette apparat m kun serviceres af fagl rte personer Sikkerhedsadvarsler Serviceinstruktioner er kun til brug for fagl rte servicefolk For at reducere risikoen for elektrisk st d m bruger kun udf re anvisninger i betjeningsmanualen Al service skal udf res af fagl rte personer For at reducere risikoen for elektrisk st d m apparatet ikke uds ttes for regn eller fugt S rg altid for at apparatet er korrekt tilsluttet og jordet Dette apparat skal forbindes til en nettilslutning der yder BESKYTTENDE JORDE og 0 forbindelse skal vaere tydeligt markeret Stikkontakten som forsyner apparatet skal vere t t p apparatet og le
246. ical Usage Examples Fully Equipped Standard Video modules all Coax No monitoring or redundancy options 4500 W 576 x 1152 Fully Equipped Standard Video modules all Fiber No monitoring or redundancy options 4870 W 576 x 1152 Fiber available on first 576 outputs only Fully Equipped 50 standard Video 50 Video AHP all Coax No monitoring or redundancy options 6900 W 576 x 1152 Video AHP on 288 inputs and 288 outputs Additional Redundant Video crosspoints 50W Additional Redundant Audio crosspoints 55 W Additional 96 MV outputs 320 W Table 113 Sirius 850 Frame Details All Sirius 800 Frames Depth 590 7mm 23 26 inches Width 482mm 19 inches Physical Frame 447mm 17 6 inches Power redundancy Dual redundancy Operating Temp 0 to 40 C Storage Temp 10 to 50 C non condensing Cooling Fan cooled Front inlet rear and side exhaust Table 114 Sirius 800 Common Frame Details Power Supply Shelf Weight 24 kg 53lbs typical without packaging Height 2RU 88mm 3 46 inches Depth 619 8mm 24 4 inches Width 482mm 19 inches Physical Size 449mm 17 6 inches Input Voltage Auto ranging 100 Vac to 240 Vac 50 60Hz Table 115 Power Supply Shelf Details Page 333 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Specifications Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 334 2014 Snell Limited
247. ical or derived is present but different to the actual signal being switched for example Ref1080i50 for a 1080p50 signal then the timing must be adjusted to make sure the switch happens at the correct point Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 44 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Product Overview 3 9 6 Note 3 10 Important Reference Input Physical or Derived Selected When a reference input is selected manually a physical or derived reference the Nucleus controller will use the specified reference input Derived references are only available when Nucleus2 2463 controllers are fitted see section 3 9 1 for details Ifthe signal on the specified reference input physical or derived exactly matches the signal to be switched then the router will switch in accordance with SMPTE RP168 Ifthe signal on the specified reference input physical or derived does not exactly match the signal being switched the router will switch according to the specified reference The timing must be adjusted to make sure the switch happens at the correct point Ifthe signal on the specified reference input physical or derived is not valid the router will crash switch Audio Reference Input The Sirius 800 routers have two AES 48 kHz only audio reference inputs on the rear of the router see section 16 2 for connection details e 1xBNC unbalanced AES input 75 Q termination e 1x9 Way D Type balanc
248. ied See Appendix B 4 1 Up to 12 MADI output channels 1295 MADI Output BNC rear panel See section 11 6 1296 MADI Output Fiber rear panel See section 11 7 Table 89 4929 Rear Panel Compatibility PL2 Link fitted across two pins closest to LEDs Fugue LED LEDs Connectors to the 1353 1356 1295 1296 or 1298 Rear Modules Firmware Licensing SD SDHC Card see the Sirius 800 Maintenance amp Upgrade manual for details Fig 183 4925 Sirius 800 AES MADI Output Module no audio delay e Jumpers and Headers are present on the audio output module and these are for Snell Use Only n normal operation no jumper links or headers are fitted except for PL2 which has a link fitted across the two pins closest to the LEDs on the front of the module Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 295 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Modules No Longer Supplied With New Systems B 3 1 1 B 3 1 2 Note Duplicate MADI Outputs When fitted with the 1295 or 1296 MADI rear panels the 4925 module outputs 12 MADI channels and a further 12 duplicate MADI channels The main and duplicate channels can be used to give the MADI outputs resilience if the equipment receiving the outputs is capable of automatically switching between main and backup feeds The main and backup connections are shown in the rear panel diagrams listed in Table 90 Rear Panel See Figure Number 1295 BNC rear panel See Fi
249. iguration 11 3 1 2 16 Channel Mixer There are 16 Mixers available per video output channel and each mixer can mix up to 16 channels of audio Each 16 channel mixer is used to mix two or more audio output channels together to create a single mono signal that is output from the mixer 11 3 1 3 Channel Swap Shuffle The channel shuffler is used to change the channel order of one or more of the audio channels 11 3 1 4 Gain control and Phase Invert Gain Gain is applied to an audio output channel as Silence mute or in steps of 0 1dB in a range of 72 dB to 30 dB Phase Invert Phase invert will invert the audio waveform 11 3 1 5 Embedded Audio Delay Embedded audio delay is applied to an audio input channel in steps of 0 25 ms in a range of 0 to 5 46 Seconds Issue 5 Rev2 Page 182 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Output Modules and Output Rear Panels 11 3 2 5949 Connections to the Audio Crosspoints The 5949 video output module receives two identical multiplexed audio transport streams each of which contains all of the audio channels on the output module up to 768 mono channels One transport stream is received from the main audio crosspoint module and a duplicate transport stream is received from the redundant audio crosspoint module The output module monitors the transport streams received from each of the audio crosspoint modules for errors If an error is found the output module will use the transport stream from
250. in the 1080i Delay tab Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 140 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Input Rear Panels and Input Modules Function Function Description XXXX Delay tab where XXXX is the video standard eg 1080i Delay Video standard configuration tabs for Delay Select the number of frames of video delay Only available if Sync Frame Offset Function is selected as Frame If Line is selected then the frame slider is not visible Select the number of lines of video delay Only available if Sync Line Offset Function is selected as Frame If Line is selected then the frame slider is not visible Pixel Offset Select the number of pixels of video delay Delay ms Select the video delay in milliseconds When setting any one of the above values the other settings will automatically change to reflect the setting being made Lock to Input Select Lock to Input to enable video delay for the Reference video standard Reference 1 to 4 Not used for Delay Freeze Frame in the event of input signal loss the last good frame is Input Loss behavior output Black Screen in the event of input signal loss a black screen is output Table 28 Video Delay Configuration 9 14 1 2 Embedded Audio Delay Embedded audio delay is applied to an audio input channel in steps of 0 25 ms in a range of 0 to 5 46 Seconds 9 14 1 3 Gain Control and Phase Invert Gain Gain is applied to an audio input channel as Silence mute or in steps o
251. ing correctly Local Error Error with messages from the local Nucleus control module the Nucleus controller in this frame Table 22 4915 Input Module LED Information Off normal state Flashing the command message from the router controller is corrupt or hasn t been received This communications error could be caused by a hardware failure or incorrect insertion Check that the module is inserted correctly If the Local Error LED is flashing at the same time as the Local Command OK LED is flashing it suggests a mismatch in the configuration of the Nucleus controller Check the controller configuration Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 131 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Input Rear Panels and Input Modules LED Color Label Detail Status Remote Command OK Receiving messages from remote Nucleus control module the Nucleus controller in the frame linked to this frame Sirius 830 840 850 no expansion Off Expansion not used Sirius 850 expanded to second frame Flashing receiving information and working correctly Remote Error Error with messages from remote Nucleus control module the Nucleus controller in the frame linked to this frame Sirius 830 840 850 no expansion Off Expansion not used Sirius 850 expanded to second frame Off normal state Flashing the command message from the remote router
252. inserted correctly If the Local Error LED is flashing at the same time as the Local Command OK LED is flashing it suggests a mismatch in the configuration of the Nucleus controller Sirius 830 not fitted Sirius 840 850 no expansion Off Expansion not used Sirius 850 expanded to second frame Flashing receiving information and working correctly Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 269 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Control Fan Interface Module LED Color Function Detail Normal Working Status Sirius 830 not fitted Sirius 840 850 no expansion Off Expansion not used Sirius 850 expanded to second frame Off normal state Flashing the command message from the remote router controller is corrupt or hasn t been received Remote Error not2453 X Error with messages from remote 2455 2457 Nucleus control module This communications error could be caused by a hardware failure although this is unlikely Check that the module is inserted correctly and the four RJ45 connections between the frames are fitted correctly see section 12 2 If the Remote Error LED is flashing at the same time as the Remote Command OK LED is flashing it suggests a mismatch in the configuration of the Nucleus controller On Solid working Active Card is active correctly Table 76 Control Fan Interface Module LED Indication Remote COM OK not 2453 2455 2457 Remo
253. interface module Sirius 830 Yes No 2452 Control Fan interface module Sirius 840 850 Yes Yes 2456 Control Fan interface module Sirius 840 850 Yes No 2458 Control Fan interface module Sirius 840 850 Yes No Table 58 2463 Nucleus2 Router Control Module Compatibility Table Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 236 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Nucleus Router Control Modules 14 3 2463 Nucleus2 Router Control Module 14 3 1 USB Upgrade Connector See the Sirius 800 Maintenance amp Micro SD Card Upgrade manual Not currently used LEDs see section 14 3 2 Reset Button see section 14 3 1 for details Fig 157 2463 Nucleus2 Router Control Module Important Refer to the Workbench manual for details on configuring the Nucleus2 Router Control Module The Nucleus2 router control module has a default database use Workbench to configure the modules in the Sirius 800 Modules are configured from the Local Router hardware tab Advanced Configuration Edit Module Configurations in Workbench See the Workbench manual for full details Reset Button The Reset button resets the 2463 router control module and will also failover control to the second router control module in a dual redundant controller system See Fig 157 above for reset button location details 2463 Router control modules can be reset remotely using Workbench or a third party control system After fitting a re
254. ion 1 2 Software and Firmware Release Details This version of the Sirius 800 user manual documents the features and functions available with Workbench version 3 15 x and firmware release PA1250x These features are shown in summary in Table 1 Firmware Release Module AHP Features Supported Version 3 0 x 2463 AHP control software firmware supplied with the Workbench release Gain Phase Invert Left Right Swap Left Both Right Both PA1250x 4915 Mono Mix Audio De embedding Gain Phase Invert 16 Channel Mix and Channel Swap Shuffle Video Frame Line Sync Video Delay Gain Phase Invert Left Right Swap Left Both Right Both Mono Mix Audio Delay Sample Rate Convert 16 Channel Mix Channel Swap Shuffle Gain Phase Invert and Audio Embedding Video Frame Line Sync Video Delay Crosspoint Modules Crosspoint Modules PA1250x 5903 Audio crosspoint operation PA1250x 5919 PA1250x 4929 PA1250x 5949 PA1250x 5905 Video crosspoint operation Modules no longer supplied with new systems Audio De embedding Gain Phase Invert 16 Channel Mix and Channel Swap Shuffle Gain Phase Invert Left Right Swap Left Both Right Both Mono Mix 16 Channel Mix Channel Swap Shuffle Gain Phase Invert and Audio Embedding PA1250x 5915 PA1250x 4925 PA1250x 5925 Table 1 Firmware Release History Firmware release notes are included with the firmware and are available on request from Snell Customer
255. ir Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 240 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Nucleus Router Control Modules 14 3 5 Nucleus2 2463 Sirius 800 Input and Output Port Mapping Note The information in this section is only correct if the Sirius 800 router is fitted with Nucleus 2463 router controllers with the default database Databases can be modified including the mapping information fthe router is shipped with a custom database the mapping may vary but can be checked and edited using the Workbench software see the Workbench User Manual for details 14 3 5 1 Sirius 830 Input and Output Port Mapping Table 61 shows the Sirius 830 crosspoint address mapping Input Output Range Addresses Video Inputs 1 to 288 Source 0 to 287 Main Video Outputs 1 to 288 Destination 0 to 287 Multiviewer Outputs 1 to 140 Destination 1152 to 1291 Monitoring Outputs 1 to 4 Destination 16370 to 16373 Video Destinations 289 to 1152 are not used and do not respond to any control Nucleus2 only Audio Inputs 1 to 9216 Source 0 to 9215 Nucleus2 only Audio Outputs 1 to 9216 Destination 0 to 9215 Table 61 Sirius 830 Input and Output Port Mapping 14 3 5 2 Sirius 840 Input and Output Port Mapping Frame ID Switch set to 3 see section 16 3 1 Table 62 shows the Sirius 840 crosspoint address mapping Input Output Range Addresses Video Inputs 1 to 576 Source 0 to 575 Main
256. ith multiviewer outputs e The monitor and multiviewer do not have any redundancy Sirius 830 Input Output Monitoring is not available on the Sirius 830 when it is equipped with multiviewer outputs Sirius 840 850 If Input pre processing is monitored using the monitor outputs then multiviewer outputs should not be routed from inputs 1 3 5 and 7 of any video input module as they will display duplicates of the four monitoring outputs Inputs from Input Modules Y YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY 5902 Multi viewer Crosspoint Module Sirius 840 850 only Four signals to the LL LJ Er Pe E d 5933 output Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y monitoring module and then to the BNC 5931 Multiviewer Output Modules connectors on the control panel rear see section 16 2 YYYYYY YYYYYY Sirius 830 840 up to 3 x 1309 rear panels 140 Signals Sirius 850 up to 2 x 1291 rear panels 96 Signals YYYY Y Y VY Y Y Y Y comeciors Fig 133 Monitoring and Multiviewer A multiviewer output module does not take any routing capability away from the main crosspoint matrix the multiviewer output module takes a copy of each input signal and sends out up to 140 Sirius 850 up to 96 outputs to DIN 1 0 2 3 connectors Each monitor output port must be configured to match the type of signal it will be monitoring when the router is in use see Table 48 This configuration is carried out in Workbench see the
257. ius 840 Not Used Sirius 850 Used when expanding between two Sirius 850 frames 12 2 for details Alarms 25 Way D Type socket Alarm Outputs Alarm outputs switch in the event of the following failures Fan Controller PSU For details on the output that switches for each failure see section 16 4 3 For example the outputs can be used for warning lights in a panel or monitoring by an external control system PSU Status B PSU Status A 25 Way D Type socket x 2 PSU Alarm Inputs Collects alarm signals from the PSU s using the supplied cable s Table 79 Sirius Alarm Rear Panel Connections Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 273 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Control and Alarm Rear Panel Connections Connector Function Frame ID Rotary Switch Frame identification switch see section 16 3 1 for full details Sirius 840 set to position 3 Sirius 850 single frame set to position 0 Sirius 850 frame 1 of 2 set to position 1 Sirius 850 frame 2 of 2 set to position 2 Door Ethernet RJ45 Ethernet Used to connect the door PC to an external network Door Fuse amp 5 A Anti Surge Ceramic fuse 5 mm x 20 mm Spare Fuse Table 79 Sirius Alarm Rear Panel Connections 16 3 1 Sirius 840 850 Frame ID Rotary Switch on the Alarm Rear Panel Each Sirius 840 850 router frame contains a rotary decimal switch situated on the Alarm rear panel it is used to identify the
258. ively The audio input module 4915 accepts either MADI only or a combination of AES and MADI depending on the rear panel that is fitted In either case the individual audio channels can then be routed through the audio crosspoint cards Video Crosspoints The video signals are routed through the video crosspoints to one or more destinations on the video output modules as instructed by the router control system Any embedded audio is routed along with the video The video routing is completely non blocking and an optional video crosspoint card gives the router video crosspoint redundancy Optionally the Sirius 850 has a second set of video crosspoint cards in the top of the router that are used to route signals to the expansion outputs 577 to 1152 As with the other crosspoint cards an optional video crosspoint can be fitted for video redundancy Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 22 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Product Overview 3 1 3 Audio Crosspoints The audio crosspoint card routes the mono audio channels in the Sirius 800 routers and the audio routing is completely non blocking An optional audio crosspoint card can be added for audio crosspoint redundancy The de embedded and discrete audio signals are routed through the audio crosspoint to one or more destinations main non expansion outputs only as instructed by the router control system The audio can be routed to the audio output modules re embedded
259. k that the Input Output Monitoring module is correctly configured see section 5 2 2 Connectors to the Motherboard LEDs Fig 148 5939 Sirius 830 Video amp Audio Input amp Output Monitoring Module Issue 5 Rev2 Page 223 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Multiviewer and Input Output Monitoring Modules 13 7 1 5939 Sirius 830 Video amp Audio Input amp Output Monitoring Module LEDs Table 53 shows the LED color code on the 5939 Input Output Monitoring Module and Fig 151 shows the front edge of the module LED Color Function Power OK Detail Power to the module Normal Working Status On Solid working correctly Command OK Command from the Control module Flashing receiving information and working correctly Command Error Error with command from the Control module Off normal state Flashing the command message from the router controller is corrupt or hasn t been received Contact Snell Customer Support see section 1 2 for contact details Switch Flashes on a take signal when switching a route Off normal state Flashes each time a route is set PAL OK Flashes and signals that the FPGA is working correctly Flashing the FPGA is working correctly Table 52 5939Sirius 830 Video amp Audio Input amp Output Monitoring Module Command Error Command OK Switch Power OK PAL OK 5939
260. kHz sample rate nominal Up to 16 SMPTE 425M Level B Dual Link mapped to SMPTE372M 274M 4 2 2 10bit at 50 59 94 60 progressive frames s Embedded Audio to SMPTE ST299 1 Synchronous to video at 48 kHz sample rate nominal Table 104 5949 and 5925 Video AHP Output Modules AHP Audio Outputs 4929 and 4925 AES MADI Output Module Audio Delay 4929 only free License with each module Audio Delay Per audio output channel in steps of 0 25 ms e MADI in a range of 0 to 2 Seconds 48 kHz AES in a range of 0 to 2 Seconds 48 kHz Audio Processing 4929 only optional Licensed features see section 3 5 Sample Rate Conversion SRC License Snell Order Code S8A SRC 1 per module 768 mono channels on MADI 240 mono AES channels Sample Rate e Supported input sample rates from the audio crosspoint 32 Conversion SRC kHz 44 1 kHz or 48 kHz e MADI Supports conversion to 48 kHz e AES Supports conversion to 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz Dolby signals must be routed as a synchronous AES pair The Dolby signal will automatically bypass the SRC even if the pair is selected for sample rate conversion Any near rate reference locking is achieved by dropping or repeating Null samples in the guard band Audio Processing 4929 and 4925 free License with each module Gain Per mono or stereo signal Silence or 72 to 30 dB in 0 1 dB steps Phase Invert Available per m
261. king is not enabled The audio crosspoint redundancy algorithm is enabled by default For details on disabling the audio crosspoint redundancy algorithm see section 10 6 Redundancy Available Green The crosspoint modules are configured for the matrix 1 main and 1 redundant Red The crosspoint modules are not configured for the matrix and therefore there is no crosspoint redundancy Note If the Sirius 800 is configured for redundancy and when powered up one or more crosspoint modules are missing or faulty the indications displayed will be Redundancy Available displays Green Fail Found displays Red Fail Found Green A failure has not occurred in the crosspoint matrix green ok 1 l Red A failure has occurred in the crosspoint matrix This may be a failure that has now cleared check the Fault Present status to see if the fault is still present in the crosspoint matrix Fault Present Green The crosspoint matrix is currently working correctly green ok l Red There is currently a fault present in the crosspoint matrix Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 69 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Door PC Screen Item Clock Master Failed Action Description Displays the Audio Crosspoint module that is supplying the audio system clock Left or Right The Audio Crosspoint module either generates the audio system clock Clock Master or uses the clock generated on the other crosspoint if fitted In normal
262. l Detail 1 FPGA 1 status 2 FPGA 2 status 3 FPGA 3 status 4 FPGA 4 status Power OK Power to the module Table 41 5949 Output Module LED Information On Solid working correctly Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 183 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Output Modules and Output Rear Panels LED Color Label Detail Normal Working Status Local Receiving messages Flashing receiving information and Command from local Nucleus working correctly OK control module the Nucleus controller in this frame Local Error with messages Off normal state Command from local Nucleus Flashing the command message from Error control module the the router controller is corrupt or hasn t Nucleus controller in been received this frame This communications error could be caused by a hardware failure or incorrect insertion Check that the module is inserted correctly If the Local Command Error LED is flashing at the same time as the Local Command OK LED is flashing it suggests a mismatch in the configuration of the Nucleus controller Check controller configuration Remote Receiving messages Sirius 830 840 850 no expansion Command from remote Nucleus Off Expansion not used OK control module the Sirius 850 expanded to second frame Nucleus controller inthe Flashing receiving information and frame linked to this working correctly frame Remote Error with mess
263. l Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Product Overview 3 7 2 Signal Flow Through the Router The Sirius 840 routes video and or audio signals by using the video and audio crosspoint modules The Sirius 840 can be fitted with Multiviewer outputs and Input Output monitoring as required Fig 12 Full details of the options are shown sections 13 3 1 13 4 2 13 4 3 and 13 4 4 Multiviewer Outputs If the Multiviewer Crosspoint Module is fitted it receives signals from the input modules after any processing has been carried out Input Output Monitoring Outputs If an Input Output Monitoring Module is fitted each monitoring output can be independently configured to display either an input or an output signal Each monitoring output can also be independently configured to display a signal before or after processing has been applied to it processing modules only Up to four monitor signals are passed to the BNC connectors on the 1287 Control rear panel see section 16 2 Rear Input Rear Panels Mounted Input Monitor amp MV Modules use the Crosspoint Monitor same router slot Crosspoint Modules Module therefore only one Module 1 x 5930 module can be fittedJ 1 x 5902 Front Mounted Inputs before or after processing Outputs before or after processing Output Multiviewer Output Monitor Output Modules Module Modules 1 x 5933 1 3 x 5931 Rear Main Monitoring Multiviewer Mounted Outputs Outputs Outputs 1 3
264. l Module LEDs Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 249 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Nucleus Router Control Modules 14 4 2 Nucleus 2450 Sirius 800 Input and Output Port Mapping Note The information in this section is only correct if the Sirius 800 router is fitted with Nucleus 2450 router controllers with the default database Databases can be modified including the mapping information If this is the case please see the database configuration for details When the Sirius 800 router is fitted with 2463 router controllers using the default database the number scheme will be different Please see the database configuration for details 14 4 2 1 Sirius 830 Input and Output Port Mapping Table 67 shows the Sirius 830 crosspoint address mapping Input Output Range Addresses Video Inputs 1 to 288 Source 0 to 287 Main Video Outputs 1 to 288 Destination 0 to 287 Destination 1152 to 1291 the default configuration controls these as 289 to 428 as this then Multiviewer Outputs 1 to 140 reduces the matrix sani provides a continuous range of outputs Monitoring Outputs 1t04 Destination 16370 to 16373 Video Destinations 289 to 1152 are not used and do not respond to any control Table 67 Sirius 830 Input and Output Port Mapping 14 4 2 2 Sirius 840 Input and Output Port Mapping Frame ID Switch set to 3 see section 16 3 1 Table 68 shows the Sirius 840 crosspoint address mapping
265. last message is received A value of 0 causes the link to remain open indefinitely Default is O ink remains open indefinitely The frequency in milliseconds the 2450 polls the router for status Default value is every 1000 milliseconds Increasing this value reduces the load on 2450 and the router by polling it less frequently However it does in crease the time before an error is reported It may be necessary to do this on a heavily loaded 2450 or router Reducing this value reduces the time before an error is reported but increases the load on the 2450 and the router The value should not be set lower than the TIMEOUT value This is the timeout in milliseconds for a response from the router The default is 50 milliseconds This should be sufficient for most routers when single commands are sent in a TCP IP packet If multiple connect messages are sent in a single TCP IP packet the timeout should be increased to 200 milliseconds Also if the router is heavily loaded this value may need to be increased The number of TCP IP connections to the 2450 should not effect the timeout since this is the timeout on the serial port to the router The clients connecting to the 2450 may need to adjust their timeout for the response on the network due to messages on multiple TCP IP connections being serialized to the router This determines whether status request 1 messages return the status response 5 message or whatever response is returned from th
266. lence Mute or 72 to 30 dB in 0 1 dB steps Audio mixing Up to 16 mono channels per mix Gain adjustment range per channel Silence or 72 to 30 dB in 0 1 dB steps Channel Swap shuffle Change the channel order of up to 16 audio inputs Video Format Audio Channels Format 525 625 Up to 16 SMPTE ST259 carrier Embedded Audio to SMPTE ST272ADEF synchronous and asynchronous 20 bit audio packets only 720p Up to 16 SMPTE ST292 carrier SMPTE ST296 720p 4 2 2 10 bit 50 59 94 60 progressive frames s Embedded Audio to SMPTE ST299 1 Audio synchronous or asynchronous to video 48 kHz nominal sample rate 1080i Up to 16 SMPTE ST292 carrier SMPTE ST274 1080i 4 2 2 10 bit 25 29 97 30 interlaced frames s Embedded Audio to SMPTE ST299 1 Audio synchronous or asynchronous to video 48 kHz nominal sample rate Table 100 5919 and 5915 Video AHP Input Modules Issue 5 Rev2 Page 321 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Specifications 5919 and 5915 Video AHP Input Modules 1080p Up to 16 SMPTE ST424M carrier SMPTE ST 425M Level A 1080p 4 2 2 10 bit 50 59 94 60 progressive frames s Mapping structure 1 Embedded Audio to SMPTE299 1 amp ST299 2 Audio synchronous or asynchronous to video 48 kHz nominal sample rate Up to 16 SMPTE ST 425 Level B Dual Link mapped to SMPTE ST372 ST274 4 2 2 10bit at 50 59 94 60 progressive frames s Embedded Audio to SMPTE ST299 Audio synchronous or asynchronous to video 48
267. lied with earlier Sirius 830 router systems and is shown here for users that already have them fitted The 5916 video input module can be supplied as a replacement for these earlier systems if required On newer systems the 5917 video input module can be used instead of the 5916 and uses the same rear panels so is a direct replacement See section for details The 5916 standard video BNC Fiber input module has 24 input channels and can handle SD ASI and HD signals up to 3Gb s Connectors to the Motherboard LEDs Connectors to the 1234 1235 or 1236 Rear Panels Connectors to the Motherboard Fig 181 5916 Standard Video BNC Fiber Input Module The 5916 Input Module is compatible with the 1234 1235 BNC See section 9 1 and 1236 Fiber rear panels See section 9 2 Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 292 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Modules No Longer Supplied With New Systems B 2 3 1 5916 Input Module LED Information Table 85 shows the LED color code on the 5916 input module and Fig 177 shows the input module LED Color Label Deiail Normal Working Status Power OK Power to the module On Solid working correctly Local Receiving messages Flashing receiving information and Command from local Nucleus working correctly OK control module the Nucleus controller in this frame Local Error Receiving CRC error Off normal state messages from local Flashing the command message from
268. ll Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Input Rear Panels and Input Modules 9 14 Important A 5919 Sirius 800 Video AHP Input Module with Delay and Sync Capability Early Sirius 800 routers must be modified by Snell before they can be used with the 5919 See section 3 11 to check if the router needs modifying The 5919 module heat sink can get very hot during normal operation When removing the 5919 module from a router do not touch the heat sink until it has had time to cool down The 5919 video AHP input module with delay and sync capability has 24 input channels and can handle SD DVB ASI and HD signals up to 3Gb s The audio de embedder extracts up to 16 mono audio channels per video input channel 16 for SD and HD giving up to 768 audio channels per 5919 input module The 5919 AHP video input module contains a powerful processing engine that can manipulate the individual audio channels passing through it see section 9 14 1 The input module also contains frame line synchronizers allowing video signals to be synchronized with router references see section 9 14 1 1 Audio and video processing are licensed features which must be purchased for each module they are needed on See section 3 5 1 for licensing details The 5919 passes all of the de embedded audio channels including VU amp C data to the audio crosspoints Connectors to the Motherboard LEDs Sirius 830 Connectors to the 1234 1235 or
269. ls This is configured in Workbench see section 10 7 for configuration details Configuration options available are e Move the failed route to the redundant crosspoint default when shipped Move all routes from the crosspoint module with the failure to the redundant crosspoint module e Notify the user and leave them to take appropriate action Yellow Main and redundant crosspoint modules working correctly Grey A fault has occurred or a crosspoint has been by passed Switches the routes back to the main crosspoint module once it has been replaced Green Crosspoint module present Red Crosspoint module not present Green Crosspoint module is powered Red Crosspoint module is not powered Displays the Modules screen see section 5 2 2 for details Moves all of the routes from the failed crosspoint module to the redundant crosspoint module allowing the failed crosspoint module to be replaced The Active LED on the failed crosspoint module will go off The failed crosspoint card can be replaced without interrupting any crosspoint routing once the routes have been switched to the redundant crosspoint module Table 8 Video Crosspoint Matrix Status Screen Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 66 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Door PC Screen Item Description Sirius 830 Crosspoint Card Status Buttons XpntCardRedundant830 button XpntCardMain830 button Touch the button to bypass the
270. lsed off Green pulsed White Blue Blue pulsed White 1 The current default Catsii colors are shown on the Door PC see section 6 2 1 and can be changed through Workbench see section 6 3 Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 80 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Catsii Functionality 6 1 2 MADI Audio Catsii Colors Signal Condition MADI Input 4915 amp Output 4929 4925 Default color l No valid MADI signal Red 56 Channel MADI 48 kHz Yellow pulsed Off 56 Channel MADI 44 1 kHz Yellow pulsed Blue 56 Channel MADI 9 other sample rates Yellow pulsed Red Valid 56 Channel MADI Redundant signal input only Yellow 64 Channel MADI 48 kHz Green pulsed Off 64 Channel MADI 44 1 kHz Green pulsed Blue 64 Channel MADI other sample rates Green pulsed Red Valid 64 Channel MADI Redundant signal input only Green Table 11 Default Audio Catsii Configurations 1 The current default Catsii colors are shown on the Door PC see section 6 2 1 and can be changed through Workbench see section 6 3 6 2 I O Connector Identification For connector identification when an input or output is selected from Workbench the following happens All LEDs turn off except e Yellow The column of the selected connector e Yellow The row of the selected connector e Flashing Red Yellow The selected connector Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 81 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com 6 2 1 Door PC Catsii Control Th
271. ly identical and can be mixed within a frame The 5905 crosspoint module has an SD card slot and three extra LEDs which the 5901 doesn t have The Video Crosspoint modules each have a configuration of 288 inputs and 288 outputs 10 1 1 5901 Sirius 800 Series Video Crosspoint Module LEDs Fig 96 5901 Video Crosspoint Module Note e The 5901 video crosspoint module was supplied with earlier Sirius 800 router systems and is shown here for users that already have them fitted On newer systems or when spares are required the 5905 video crosspoint module can be used as a direct replacement see section 10 1 2 for details Issue 5 Rev2 Page 145 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Crosspoint Modules 10 1 2 5905 Sirius 800 Series Video Crosspoint Module LEDs SD SDHC Card Used for upgrading Crosspoint module firmware see the Sirius 800 Maintenance amp Upgrade manual for details Fig 97 5905 Video Crosspoint Module Note Jumpers and Headers are present on the video crosspoint module and these are for Snell Use Only n normal operation no Jumper links or headers are fitted Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 146 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Crosspoint Modules 10 1 3 Video Crosspoint Module LED Information Note Table 30 shows the LED color code on the Video Crosspoint Modules and Fig 98 shows the
272. m Input Rear Panels and Input Modules 9 12 6 4915 Input Module LED Information Table 22 shows the LED color code on the 4915 Input Module and Fig 87 shows the front edge of the input module LED Color Label Detail Status CPU status Flashing sequence Green Green Blue normal operation the CPU is programmed and running Brief Red Flash at startup normal Flashing Red CPU Error Remove module and refit to force a reboot FPGA status Flashing rapidly between Red amp Green 2 Hz each LED starting up Green On Solid amp Red Off normal state working correctly Green Off amp Red On Solid FPGA programming fault found Remove module and refit to force a reboot Red amp Green Flashing very rapidly in sync 4 Hz each LED A change has been made to the module settings database in RAM but it has not yet been written to flash memory This is not a fault and the flash memory will be updated after 10 seconds of no audio setting changes being made Do not remove power from the module while this indication is present as the flash may become corrupted Other indications are displayed when performing a firmware upgrade see the Sirius 800 Maintenance amp Upgrade manual for details Power to the module On Solid working correctly Receiving messages from the local Nucleus control module the Nucleus controller in this frame Flashing receiving information and work
273. mal Working Status Power OK Power to the module On Solid working correctly Local Receiving messages from Flashing receiving information Command local Nucleus control module and working correctly OK the Nucleus controller in this frame Local Error with messages from Off normal state Command local Nucleus control module Flashing the command message Error the Nucleus controller in this from the router controller is corrupt frame or hasn t been received This communications error could be caused by a hardware failure or incorrect insertion Check that the module is inserted correctly If the Local Command Error LED is flashing at the same time as the Local Command OK LED is flashing it suggests a mismatch in the configuration of the Nucleus controller Check the controller configuration Remote Receiving messages from Flashing receiving information Command local Nucleus control module and working correctly OK the Nucleus controller in the frame linked to this frame Remote Error with messages from Off normal state Error local Nucleus control module Flashing the command message the Nucleus controller in the from the router controller is corrupt frame linked to this frame or hasn t been received This communications error could be caused by a hardware failure or incorrect Insertion Check that the module is inserted correctly If the Error LED is flashing at the same time as the Command OK LED is flashi
274. matically Check that the Active LED on the failed video crosspoint module is off and then remove the failed video crosspoint module see section 10 1 3 for the location of the Active LED Replace the failed video crosspoint module with a replacement working crosspoint module The replacement video crosspoint module is automatically tested and the Fault Present indicator will change back to Green if the replacement is fully working Touch the Fault Fixed button to move all of the routes from the redundant video crosspoint module to the fixed video crosspoint module The Main or Expansion Video Crosspoint Matrix Status screen should now return to its working state Sirius 830 see Fig 34 on page 64 for button and parameter locations Sirius 840 850 see Fig 35 on page 65 for button and parameter locations Fail Found indicator Green e Fault Present indicator Green First Failure Detected Failed Source and Destinations will both be reset to Zero XpntCardNone Yellow Sirius 830 XpntCardRedundant830 Grey XpntCardMain830 Grey Sirius 840 850 XpntCardOddToOdd 1 Grey XpntCardEvenToOdd 2 Grey e XpntCardRedundant R Grey XpntCardOddToEven 3 Grey XpntCardEvenToEven 4 Grey Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 153 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Crosspoint Modules 10 5 5903 Sirius 800 Audio Crosspoint Module The 5903 Audio Crosspoint modules each have a maximum
275. me 2 Toremove the module from its socket pull on the two levers and slide the module out of the frame 3 Toinsert the module lift the levers and locate in the frame 4 Pushthe levers to fully lock the module 5 Close the front fan frame assembly making sure not to trap any wires Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 106 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Input Rear Panels and Input Modules 9 Input Rear Panels and Input Modules 9 1 Note Sirius 830 1234 amp 1235 Video BNC Input Rear Panel e The 1235 rear panel was supplied with earlier Sirius 830 router systems and is shown here for users that already have them fitted On newer systems the 1234 rear panel can be used instead of the 1235 and is compatible with the same video input modules so is a direct replacement The 1234 1235 video BNC input rear panels have 24 BNC inputs The 1234 1235 rear panels are used in the Sirius 830 with either the 5919 5915 input module 24 channel video with de embedder re clocking and AHP or the 5916 5917 input modules 24 channel video with re clocking Video Input 1 Video Input 24 2 K f if ff i f K 2 ff Ly l ff t ff K 2 yi ff l 7 t i Not Used a Fig 69 1234 1235 Input BNC Rear Panel Sirius 830 only All the BNC connectors on the 1234 1235 rear panels have Snell s unique Catsii feature that illuminates each connector
276. n the MADI stream Example SRC straight through mode AES SRC settings required for SRC straight through mode for one or more of a group of eight AES pairs See Fig 104 on page 167 for setting locations SRC Rate Any SRC Reference Disabled SRC Enable Checked Use SRC Unchecked for the pair s required to work in SRC straight through mode Example SRC straight through mode MADI SRC settings required for straight through mode for a MADI stream See Fig 105 on page 167 for setting locations SRC Rate Any SRC Reference Disabled SRC Enable Checked Use SRC Unchecked Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 169 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Output Modules and Output Rear Panels Note Reference lock only mode e A group of pairs or a MADI stream can be locked to the AES reference or one of the four physical video reference inputs without sample rate conversion being enabled e fnoreference signal is present on the selected reference input all the SRCs on the 4929 module using that reference input will be free running and independent of any other module in the frame AES If channels within a pair are asynchronous to each other then sample drop or repeat is used on the right channel to match the left channel e MADI If channels from the audio crosspoint are asynchronous to each other then sample drop or repeat is used on all channels to match the first active channel in the MADI stream Example referen
277. n practice Example 1 Slot 5 MADI 1 Connector First MADI Channel 5 x 768 768 577 8840 768 577 3072 577 3649 First MADI Channel 3649 Last MADI Channel 3649 63 3712 Last MADI Channel 3712 Example 2 Slot 9 MADI 2 Connector First MADI Channel 9 x 768 768 641 6912 768 641 6144 641 6785 First MADI Channel 6785 Last MADI Channel 6785 63 6848 Last MADI Channel 6848 Example 3 Slot 12 MADI 3 Connector First MADI Channel 12 x 768 768 705 9216 768 705 8448 705 9153 First MADI Channel 9153 Last MADI Channel 9153 63 9216 Last MADI Channel 9216 Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 125 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Input Rear Panels and Input Modules 9 12 4915 Sirius 800 AES MADI Input Module Important Early Sirius 800 routers must be modified by Snell before they can be used with the 4915 See section 3 11 to check if the router needs modifying The 4915 AES MADI input module can accept either 120 AES i nputs balanced or unbalanced with up to 3 MADI input channels or 12 channels of MADI inputs depending on the rear panel fitted The 4915 Input Module is compatible with the rear panels listed in Table 20 Rear Panel Up to 120 AES inputs and up to 3 MADI input channels Sirius 830 1354 Balanced AES HD BNC MADI rear panel 1357 Unbalanced AES HD BNC MADI rear panel
278. n z ok Red A failure has occurred in the crosspoint matrix This may be a failure that has now cleared check the Fault Present status to see if the fault is still present in the crosspoint matrix Fault Present Green The crosspoint matrix is currently working correctly green ok l Red There is currently a fault present in the crosspoint matrix Table 8 Video Crosspoint Matrix Status Screen Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 65 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Door PC Screen Item First Failure Detected Failed Source Failed Destination Total Routes Main Crosspoint Redundant Crosspoint Failed Action Crosspoint Status XpntCardNone Fault Fixed button Presence Power More button Free Failed Crosspoint button Description The Failed Source and Failed Destination parameters show the first failed route through the crosspoint that was detected If both display zero and the Fail Found status is red then an entire crosspoint card has failed Check the Crosspoint Status of each crosspoint card to determine which card has failed If both display zero and the Fail Found and Fail Present LEDs are green then no fault has been found Displays the total number of routes passing through the Main crosspoint module s Displays the total number of routes passing through the Redundant crosspoint module Displays the action that will be carried out by the router when a crosspoint fai
279. nd the signals would remain co timed as shown Audio Source Output Module Embedded HD D wo D Co timed Embedded HD Surround Co timed e DE AES E Dolby E Fig 4 Example Audio from Various Sources Embedded on a Video Output Module 3 1 7 Video Processing Each of the AHP video input 5919 and AHP video output 5949 modules contain frame line synchronizers allowing video signals to be synchronised with router references Frame or line syncs can be offset to allow for delays later in the system The frame line synchronizer is a licensed feature which must be purchased see section 3 5 for details Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 24 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Product Overview 3 2 3 2 1 3 2 2 Note Router Configuration and Control Overview The Workbench control system is flexible and scalable providing a range of interfaces from a single router control panel running on a PC through to large and powerful installations using dual redundant control across many sites System configuration details are stored in a Workbench database which is written pushed to the router controllers to configure them Once the router controllers have been configured in this way they store the database locally allowing the router to work independently after a power off even if the connection to the Workbench database PC server is not available Workbench operates in a client server configuration using standard TCP IP net
280. nector to 24 unbalanced AES female BNC connectors The breakout cable is optional and not supplied with the AES rear panels Five cables are required for all of the AES connectors on each AES rear panel 62 Way D Type High 24 x Female BNC Density Plug Connectors AES number printed on sleeve of each cable 1 Metre 3 Feet 3 Inches Fig 83 RMYS 2502910A Unbalanced AES Breakout Cable 62 Way D Type to 24 BNC Female 9 11 HD BNC MADI Input Connectors The HD BNC connector details are the same for the balanced and unbalanced AES rear panels see section 9 9 or 9 10 for rear panel details The first and last MADI Channels in the following table assume that the HD BNC breakout cables are connected to an AES rear panel located in input slot 1 of the router HD BNC Plug First MADI Channel Last MADI Channel Marking Slot 1 Slot 1 MADI 1 577 640 MADI 2 641 704 MADI 3 705 768 Table 19 Starting and Ending MADI Channels for Slot 1 Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 124 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Input Rear Panels and Input Modules 9 11 1 9 11 2 9 11 3 Use the following formula to calculate the first and last MADI channels for any other router input slot First MADI Channel Slot Number x 768 768 X Where X the First MADI channel for the required MADI connector Last MADI Channel First MADI Channel 63 Please see the following examples to see how this works i
281. nell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Door PC 5 6 2 Dial Up Routing Video The Dial Up screen shown in Fig 41 is used to route single signals in the video matrix and cannot be used to route signals in the audio matrix Touch the Dial Up Routing Video button from the main menu screen and then touch the Continue buttons as they are displayed Finally touch the Dial Up button when it is displayed to access the screen This procedure avoids the dial up panel being enabled accidentally in a live environment Video Matrix Dial Up Panel Destinabon m m Current Source SAT Clear E Fig 41 Dial Up Routing Video DST SRC button Touch the DST SRC button to toggle between the Destination and Source text boxes The text boxes have a red border to indicate when they are selected for data entry Destination text box enter the video destination here A red border indicates the text box is selected for data entry e Source text box enter the video source here A red border indicates the text box is selected for data entry e Current Source text box read only displays the source currently being routed to the destination entered in the Destination text box Clear button deletes the contents of the selected text box destination or source Dial Up keypad number buttons used to enter the destination and source numbers
282. nellgroup com Output Modules and Output Rear Panels 11 3 1 1 Note Frame Line Sync and Video Delay The video processing block can be used for frame line sync or video delay on a channel by channel basis but they cannot both be used on the same channel Video Frame Synchronization is achieved by dropping or repeating video frames when the Frame Buffer is empty or full Selecting audio post synchronization means that when a video frame is dropped or repeated a frame of audio will also be dropped or repeated Selecting audio pre synchronization means that when a video frame is dropped or repeated the audio will not be dropped or repeated so will no longer be associated with the original video frame resulting in lip sync mismatch Therefore Snell recommends that the synchronizers are used to re time video in synchronous systems only Video AHP Detected Standard 1080i50 Output Frame Sync m Lm Dest 170 PRESET Summary Standard Mode Standard Mode Frame Delay Frame Delay Sync Sync EN NW EN NN 1080p24 L 1080 59 20 Selected Dest p56 li EN NN Men Fig 111 Example Workbench Frame Sync Delay Summary Screen The video channel is selected using the dialup panel The Frame Sync Delay screen displays the currently detected video standard for the selected channel The configuration buttons at the top of the screen are used to configure the general behavio
283. ng information and working correctly Local Command Error Error with messages from local Nucleus control module the Nucleus controller in this frame Off normal state Flashing the command message from the router controller is corrupt or hasn t been received This communications error could be caused by a hardware failure or incorrect insertion Check that the module is inserted correctly If the Local Command Error LED is flashing at the same time as the Local Command OK LED is flashing it suggests a mismatch in the configuration of the Nucleus controller Check the controller configuration Table 93 5925 Sirius 800 Video AHP Output Module LED Information Page 308 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Modules No Longer Supplied With New Systems LED Color Label Detail Normal Working Status Remote Command OK Receiving messages from remote Nucleus control module the Nucleus controller in the frame linked to this frame Sirius 830 840 850 no expansion Off Expansion not used Sirius 850 expanded to second frame Flashing receiving information and working correctly Remote Error Error with messages from remote Nucleus control module the Nucleus controller in the frame linked to this frame Sirius 830 840 850 no expansion Off Expansion not used Sirius 850 expanded to second frame Off normal st
284. ng it suggests a mismatch in the configuration of the Nucleus controller Check the controller configuration Table 37 5926 Output Module LED Information Issue 5 Rev2 Page 175 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Output Modules and Output Rear Panels Remote Command OK Local Command OK Remote Error Power OK Local Error 5926 Fig 108 5926 Output Module LEDs Issue 5 Rev2 Page 176 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Output Modules and Output Rear Panels 11 3 Important A Note 5949 Sirius 800 Video Embedding amp AHP Output Module with Delay and Sync Capability Early Sirius 800 routers must be modified by Snell before they can be used with the 5949 See section 3 11 to check if the router needs modifying The 5949 module heat sink can get very hot during normal operation When removing the 5949 module from a router do not touch the heat sink until it has had time to cool down The 5949 Sirius 800 video embedding amp AHP output module with delay and sync capability has 24 video output channels and can handle SD DVB ASI and HD signals up to 3Gb s The 5949 module can be used for expansion in dual frame Sirius 850 systems see section 12 2 The audio embedder synchronously re inserts up to 16 mono audio channels per video output channel 16 for SD and HD giving up to 768 audio channels per 5949 output module The 5949 AHP vi
285. no longer supplied with new systems 4925 Audio AHP Output Free License with Module each module Table 3 Licensed Options for Audio Input and Output Modules Not Applicable Not Applicable If the SD card is removed from a module for more than 30 minutes the licensed options will cease to function on that module Routing will not be affected but remember that if any processing functions such as shuffle gain delay SRC etc are in use they will be reset to their default values Replacing the licensing SD card will re instate the licensed options See the Sirius 800 Maintenance amp Upgrade manual for details on updating the module licenses Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 32 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Product Overview 3 6 Sirius 830 Frame Overview 3 6 1 Frame Architecture Fig 11 shows the main features of a non expandable Sirius 830 Router frame 48 96 or 140 Multiviewer Multiviewer Outputs Outputs DIN 1 0 2 3 or or Monitoring Outputs A Up to 4 Input Output Monitoring Outputs BNC amp DIN 1 0 2 3 1 x Main Video Crosspoint Module 1 x Redundant Video Crosspoint Module Optional 288 Redundant Video Crosspoint Matrix A 1 x Main Audio Crosspoint Module 9216 Redundant Audio 1 x Redundant Audio Crosspoint Crosspoint Matrix A Module Optional Y Y Up to 288 video inputs and 288 Video Inputs and Outputs video outputs and Ls and Audio Input
286. nput Rear Panel 108 9 3 Sirius 830 1303 MADI BNC Input Rear Panel 109 9 4 Sirius 830 1304 MADI Fiber Input Rear Panel 110 9 5 Sirius 840 850 1285 Video MADI BNC Input Rear Panel 111 9 6 Sirius 840 850 1286 Video MADI Fiber Input Rear Panel 112 9 7 Sirius 840 850 1349 amp 1289 Video BNC Input Rear Panel 113 9 8 Sirius 840 850 1305 Video Fiber Input Rear Panel 2 114 9 9 Balanced AES Input Rear Panels with MADI Inputs 115 9 9 1 Sirius 830 1354 Balanced AES Input Rear Panel with MADI Inputs 115 9 9 2 Sirius 840 850 1352 Balanced AES Input Rear Panel with MADI Inputs 116 9 9 3 62 Way High Density Balanced AES Socket Pin Outs 117 9 10 Unbalanced AES Input Rear Panels with MADI Inputs 120 9 10 1 Sirius 830 1357 Unbalanced AES Input Rear Panel with MADI Inputs 120 9 10 2 Sirius 840 850 1355 Unbalanced AES Input Rear Panel with MADJI Inputs ue pei x Dre e Rb debeo ER RARE 121 9 10 3 62 Way High Density Unbalanced AES Socket Pin Outs 122 9 10 4 FGAEY 2502910A Unbalanced 62 Way AES to BNC Breakout Cable 124 9 11 HD BNC MADI Input Connectors 124 911 1 Example Wines conde d aaa ER REPE EEG UE EDS 125 9 11 2 Example 25 cece esos ed hd Eae an 125 9 11 3 Example 3 rs bee a UE ee ee ee OAS 125 9 12 4915 Sirius 800 AES MADI Input Module 126 9 12 1 MADI Main and Redundant Inputs
287. nsed options and must be purchased for each module they are used on See section 3 5 for details Processing is configured in Workbench Fig 91 shows the order that the video and audio processing is applied to the signal To Input Output or To Input Output To Multiviewer Monitoring Monitoring Output Frame Sync Bypass Video and Audio To Video Crosspoint 3 z L E A Video with 5 H s 5 Audio Transport Embedded v 9 3 2 Stream to Audio g E a 3 5 Main Audio g 5 g lt 5 Crosspoint card lt i 2 3 55 Frame Sync 5 5 or Delay n 9 o DI Audio Transport Stream to Redundant Audio Signal Color Code Crosspoint card Module License Color Code sio License wdeosinabely Auda bean Input Output Monitoring selected from either the input or the output of the module pre or post processing See section 5 6 3 for details on how to configure this using the router Door screen Fig 91 5919 Processing Block Diagram If any embedded audio channels are asynchronous to the video signal the input module will use drop repeat to synchronize the audio channels with the video signal Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 137 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Input Rear Panels and Input Modules 9 14 1 1 Note Frame Line Sync and Video Delay The video processing block can be used for frame line sync or video delay on a channel by channel basis but they cannot both be used on the same channel Video Frame
288. nt matrix Additionally if any one of the following situations occur the router controller will move all routes to the redundant crosspoint module e The main crosspoint module is removed from the router e The router controller looses communications with the main crosspoint module e The crosspoint module reports one or more of its power rails has a fault To replace the failed crosspoint module all the routes on the failed module must be moved to the redundant crosspoint module see section 10 4 1 for details Example Router pre configured to move the failed route to the redundant crosspoint module e Output 1 on the main crosspoint fails Output 1 on the output module switches to the redundant path f Output 2 on the main crosspoint fails Output 2 on the output module switches to the redundant path Any failure needs addressing immediately to retain protection see section 10 4 1 for details Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 149 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Crosspoint Modules 10 3 Note Sirius 840 850 Video Crosspoint Arrangement The Sirius 840 router has five crosspoint modules situated below the input modules mounted horizontally that send signals to the output modules four are used as actual crosspoint modules the fifth is optional and for redundancy For Sirius 840 video crosspoint module locations see section 8 3 1 The Sirius 850 has the same video crosspoint module configur
289. o 2 Multiviewer Output module s e 1291 qty 1 to 2 Multiviewer Coax Rear panel s 1 x 5902 Multiviewer Crosspoint Inputs Module see section 13 7 5931 Up to two 5931 Multiviewer Output Modules see section 13 6 1 5931 je 8 ICH Up to two 1291 Multiviewer Coax Rear Panels see section 13 11 1 to 48 73 to 120 Fig 140 Multiviewer Outputs Only No Monitoring Option Sirius 850 Note Earlier Sirius 850 systems were sometimes fitted with 5932 multiviewer output module s and either 1291 multiviewer coax rear panel s or 1292 MV Link rear panel s e The 1292 MV Link rear enabled up to 140 multiviewer outputs to be connected to a Miranda KaleidoX multiviewer see sections B 5 and B 5 2 for details e 5932 modules and 1292 rear panels are no longer available and are shown here for users that already have them fitted Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 216 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Multiviewer and Input Output Monitoring Modules 13 4 2 Sirius 850 Multiviewer Outputs and Input Output Monitoring e 5902 qty 1 Multiviewer Crosspoint module e 5931 qty 1 to 2 Multiviewer Output module s e 1291 qty 1 to 2 Multiviewer Coax Rear panel s 5933 qty 1 Output Monitor module Video Audio Outputs zi 1 x 5902 Multiviewer Crosspoint lana Module see section 13 5 Multiviewer signals are post processing Video Audio Inputs Up to two 5931 Multiviewer Out
290. o equipamento As pegas ou partes existentes no interior do equipamento n o necessitam de interven o manuten o ou manuseamento por parte do utilizador Repara es ou outras interven es devem ser efectuadas apenas por t cnicos devidamente habilitados Avisos de Seguran a As instru es de manuten o fornecidas s o para utiliza o de t cnicos qualificados Para reduzir o risco de choque el ctrico n o devem ser realizadas interven es no equipamento n o especificadas no manual de instala es a menos que seja efectuadas por t cnicos habilitados Para reduzir o risco de choque el ctrico n o expor este equipamento chuva ou humidade Assegurar que a unidade est sempre devidamente ligada terra e que as liga es alimenta o est o correctas O sistema de alimenta o do equipamento deve por raz es de seguran a possuir liga o a terra de protec o De liga o ao NEUTRO devidamente identificada A tomada de energia qual a unidade est ligada deve situar se na sua proximidade e facilmente acess vel Turvamerkkien selitys Tama merkki tarkoittaa etta laitteen mukana toimitettu kirjallinen materiaali sis lt t rkeit tietoja Lue k ytt ohje A Tama merkki ilmoittaa ett laitteen sis ll on vaarallisen voimakas j nnite Sis puolella ei ole mit n osia joita k ytt j voisi itse huoltaa Huollon saa suorittaa vain alan ammattilainen Turvaohjeita Huolto ohjee
291. o fibre output rear panel has 12 fiber SFP cages with two outputs per fiber SFP module The 1302 rear panel is used with the 5949 5925 output module 24 channel video with audio embedder re clocking and AHP and the 5926 5938 video output module 24 channel video with re clocking o DI eee Output 1 Video Output 2 850 Expansion Connectors a b C Not Used with 5926 modules LILILIOGIIISLILILILI LILILI Video Output 23 Video Output 24 fo La Fig 116 Sirius 800 video fibre output rear panel All the fiber connectors on the output rear panel have Snell s unique Catsii feature that illuminates each connector See section 6 for details of the Catsii functionality When ordering the router the rear panels can be specified with or without fiber SFP transmitter modules When the rear panels are ordered as spares they are supplied without Fiber SFP transmitter modules and these must be ordered separately The Snell order code for the standard SFP transmitter module is shown below Fiber SFP Transmitter Module Order Code ST31ST31 3 Fiber SFP 2 channel 1310nm 5 to 0 dBm output power For 3G HD SD amp MADI Max 12 per rear panel A number of CWDM Fiber SFP transmitter modules are also available contact your local Snell representative for details Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 187 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Output Modules and Output Rear Panels 11 6 1
292. o the router frame the update will be complete once the controller has rebooted and is displayed as connected Green in Workbench 10 If a second controller is fitted reset it fom the Workbench Controller Configuration interface software so that it goes Idle Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 257 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Nucleus Router Control Modules 14 4 5 2 Note Note 14 4 6 Note Modify an ini File Using Copy 1 Ensure the Nucleus Controller card to be removed is idle If the router is only fitted with a single controller the controller will be Active rather than Idle Nucleus LED Number Color LED Number Color Controller LED D4 LED D16 2450 Idle Purple Idle Flashing Red Active Blue Active Flashing Green Table 72 Nucleus 2450 Active Idle LED Status 2 Ifthe Nucleus controller to be removed is Active see Table 72 press the reset button on it see Fig 159 on page 248 and the Active and Idle Nucleus controllers will swap Over 3 Remove the Idle Nucleus controller card 4 Remove the Compact Flash memory card from the Nucleus controller and insert it into a card reader 5 Plug the card reader into your computer and view the files on the memory card 6 If no changes are required the ini file can simply be opened with a text editor such as Microsoft Notepad viewed and then closed again without saving Before making any chan
293. ocessing engine that can manipulate the individual audio channels passing through it see Appendix B 2 2 1 Audio processing is a licensed feature which must be purchased for each module it is needed on See section 3 5 1 for licensing details Connectors to the Motherboard Sirius 830 Connectors to the 1234 1235 or 1236 Rear Panels LEDs Fugue LED Sirius 840 850 Connectors to the 1349 1289 or 1305 Rear Panels Eight Diagnosti LEDs Snell Use Only Connectors to he Motherboard Firmware Licensing SD SDHC Card see the Sirius 800 Maintenance amp Upgrade manual for details Fig 178 5915 Sirius 800 Video AHP Input Module e Jumpers and Headers are present on the video input module and these are for Snell Use Only e n normal operation no jumper links or headers are fitted Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 286 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Modules No Longer Supplied With New Systems B 2 2 1 Note The 5915 Input Module is compatible with the rear panels listed in Table 86 Rear Panel See Section Sirius 830 1234 amp 1235 BNC rear panel See section 9 1 Sirius 830 1236 Fiber rear panel See section 9 2 Sirius 840 850 1349 amp 1289 BNC rear panel See section 9 7 Sirius 840 850 1305 Fiber rear panel See section 9 8 Table 86 5915 Rear Panel Compatibility Processing on the Input Module The 5915 video input module can manipulate the audio chann
294. odules 13 3 2 Sirius 840 Multiviewer Outputs and Input Output Monitoring e 5902 qty 1 Multiviewer Crosspoint module e 5931 qty 1 to 3 Multiviewer Output module s 1309 qty 1 to 3 Multiviewer Coax Rear panel s e 5933 qty 1 Output Monitor module Video Audio Outputs em 1x 5933 1 x 5902 Multiviewer Crosspoint EL Module see section 13 5 LJ Muttiviewer signals are post processing amp F Video Audio TER Up to three 5931 Multiviewer Output 5931 5931 5931 Modules see section 13 6 1 Up to three 1309 Multiviewer Coax MV MV Monitor Rear Panels see section 13 10 1 to 48 49 to 96 97 to 140 1t04 For details of the Monitor 1 to 4 BNC connections see section 16 2 GP DE KOE Input Output Monitoring selected from either the input or the output of the module pre or post processing See section 5 6 3 for details on how to configure this using the router Door PC Multiviewer signals are always post processing Fig 137 Multiviewer Outputs and Input Output Monitoring Option Sirius 840 Note If Input pre processing is monitored using the monitor outputs then multiviewer outputs should not be routed from inputs 1 3 5 and 7 of any video input module as they will display duplicates of the four monitoring outputs Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 214 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Multiviewer and Input Output Monitoring Modules 13 3
295. of the system components and reports this to the door PC and the external systems as required Up to two router controllers can be fitted to the router in a main and backup configuration When two controllers are fitted the controller in the left slot is the main controller and will be active when the router is powered up This is the default power up setting but this setting can be changed from Workbench if required See the Workbench manual for details The controller mounted in the left slot is Controller A and the controller in the right slot is Controller B When two controllers are fitted in the router they must both be the same type running the same software version For example either 2 x 2463 or 2 x 2450 controllers should be fitted When two controllers are fitted in the router they must both have a network connection Ethernet A and Ethernet B for connection details see section 16 2 Table 78 Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 233 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Nucleus Router Control Modules 14 1 14 1 1 Workbench The Workbench software uses a database to store router and system configuration details The database can be created from scratch custom built by Snell chargeable or based on one of the supplied sample default databases See section 3 2 for further details The router is supplied with Workbench LiveRunner and a sample database installed on the Door PC The installed sample database is ei
296. om a 1290 24 channel expansion rear panel mounted in a second linked Sirius 850 frame see section 12 2 for details Connectors to the Motherboard LEDs Connectors to the 1294 or 1302 Rear Modules Fig 127 5938 Sirius 850 Standard Video Output Module Expandable Note e Jumpers and Headers are present on the video output module and these are for Snell Use Only n normal operation no jumper links or headers are fitted The 5938 video output module is compatible with the 1294 BNC rear panel See section 11 4 and the 1302 Fiber rear panel See section 11 5 Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 204 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Sirius 850 Video Expansion 12 3 1 5938 Output Module LED Information Table 46 shows the LED color code on the 5938 Module and Fig 128 shows the front edge of the output module LED Label Detail Normal Working Status Color Power OK Power to the module On Solid working correctly Local Receiving messages Flashing receiving information and Command from local Nucleus working correctly OK control module the Nucleus controller in this frame Local Error with messages from Off normal state Command local Nucleus control Flashing the command message from Error module the Nucleus the router controller is corrupt or hasn t controller in this frame been received This communications error could be caused by a hardware failure or incorrect insertion
297. on Issue 5 Rev2 Page 284 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Modules No Longer Supplied With New Systems Remote Command OK Local Command OK Remote Error Power OK Local Error 5913 5914 Fig 177 5913 5914 Sirius 840 850 Standard Video Input Module LEDs Issue 5 Rev2 Page 285 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Modules No Longer Supplied With New Systems B 2 2 Important AN Note 5915 Sirius 800 Video AHP Input Module e The 5915 Sirius 800 video AHP input module was supplied with earlier Sirius 800 router systems and is shown here for users that already have them fitted e The 5915 Sirius 800 video AHP input module can be supplied as a replacement for these earlier systems if required The 5915 module heat sink can get very hot during normal operation When removing the 5915 module from a router do not touch the heat sink until it has had time to cool down The 5915 Sirius 800 video AHP input module with audio de embedder and re clocking has 24 input channels and can handle SD DVB ASI and HD signals up to 3Gb s The audio de embedder extracts up to 16 mono audio channels per video input channel 16 for SD and HD giving up to 768 audio channels per 5915 input module The 5915 passes all of the de embedded audio channels including VU amp C data to the audio crosspoints The 5915 AHP video input module contains a powerful pr
298. on the next if the serial commands straddled a frame By configuring a Set Delay of two milliseconds the time to send the second crosspoint both crosspoints will have been received when they are set That way both crosspoints will go on the same frame CONFIG ResetAfterConfigPush 1 Configure the action to be taken after a configuration push Set to 1 to restart the controller after a full database push Default 0 disables automatic restart Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 252 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Nucleus Router Control Modules 02overlP Enable true TCP_IP_Port 2000 UDP_Connect_Port 2001 UDP_Stat6_Port 2002 Connect MC addrz224 1 1 1 Stat MC addrz224 1 1 2 TCP IP Link TimezO Polltime 1000 Timeout 50 Return Status 5 true TCP Connecteds true Connect MC ENA true Stat MC ENA true Enables SW P 02 protocol over IP control Note The default setting for this parameter is Enabled so if the parameter is missing or commented out it will still be enabled Port used for TCP IP server connection Default port is 2000 Port used for UDP broadcast messages for connecteds Default port is 2001 Port used for UDP broadcast messages for status 6 changes Default port is 2002 Multi cast address used for connecteds Default address is 224 1 1 1 Multi cast address used for status 6 changes Default address is 224 1 1 2 Time in seconds that the link remains open after the
299. on both of the original channels The Mono Mix is A B 2 4925 Connections from the Audio Crosspoints The 4925 audio output module receives two identical multiplexed audio transport streams each of which contains all of the audio channels on the output module up to 768 mono channels One transport stream is received from the main audio crosspoint module and a duplicate transport stream is received from the redundant audio crosspoint module The output module monitors the transport streams received from each of the audio crosspoint modules for errors If an error is found the output module will use the transport stream from the other audio crosspoint module if it is fitted Dueto the nature of multiplexed audio transport streams there is an extremely small delay between groups of channels as the transport stream is constructed If the audio is locked to the input these delays will need to be considered e Ifthe audio is locked to an external reference these delays are managed by the router and the audio will remain co timed Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 299 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Modules No Longer Supplied With New Systems B 3 1 9 4925 Output Module LED Information Table 91 shows the LED color code on the 4925 output module and Fig 186 shows the front edge of the output module LED Color Label Detail Normal Working Status CPU status Flashing sequence Green Green Blue normal
300. on can be carried out while the System is in use This section describes what hardware is required to expand an existing single router to a dual router system See Fig 126 for a details of the video signal wiring between the routers and Fig 126 for a diagram of the control interconnections Existing Sirius 850 Frame 1 of 2 The following extra equipment is required for the existing Sirius 850 frame e 4x 5905 5901 Video Crosspoint Modules mounted in upper part of the frame a fifth crosspoint module is optional and provides redundancy for the video expansion crosspoint matrix See section 10 1 for module details e Up to 24 x 5928 Sirius 850 Standard Video Expansion Output Modules depending on the number of extra video outputs required Fitted in the top section of the router each 5928 provides 24 outputs See section 12 4 for module details Up to 24 x 1290 Sirius 850 Video Expansion Output Rear Panels one for each 5928 module fitted Fitted in the rear of the router each 1290 is used to connect 24 signals to the remote Sirius 850 router The interconnect cables are supplied with the rear panels See section 12 5 for module details Up to 24 x expandable video output modules 5938 5949 and 5925 as required one expandable video output module for each 5928 fitted in the remote router Fitted in the output module slots of the router they accept via their rear panels and interconnect cables the expansion outputs from the 1290 rear p
301. on page 284 for details on the number of power supply shelves and power supply units required Max Rated Power 7000 W for video only routing on a fully equipped system 13000 W for video and audio routing on a fully equipped system Power Consumption for Typical Usage Examples Fully Equipped Standard Video modules all Coax 3250 W No monitoring or redundancy options Fully Equipped Standard Video modules all Fiber 3800 W No monitoring or redundancy options Fully Equipped 50 standard Video 50 Video AHP 5640 W all Coax No monitoring or redundancy options Additional Redundant Video crosspoints 50 W Additional Redundant Audio crosspoints 55 W Additional 96 MV outputs 320 W Table 112 Sirius 840 Frame Details Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 332 2014 Snell Limited www snellgroup com Specifications Sirius 850 Frame Weight Between 190 Kg 419 Ibs and 215 Kg 474 lbs typical full frame without packaging and depending on modules fitted Height 34RU Expandable chassis 1511mm 59 49 inches Power requirements Auto ranging 100 Vac to 240 Vac 50 60Hz via external power supply shelf shelves see Table 115 See Appendix B 1 3 on page 285 for details on the number of power supply shelves and power supply units required Max Rated Power 7000 W for video only routing on a fully equipped system 13000 W for video and audio routing on a fully equipped system Power Consumption for Typ
302. ond frame Flashing receiving information and working correctly Remote Error Error with messages from remote Nucleus control module the Nucleus controller in the frame linked to this frame Sirius 830 840 850 no expansion Off Expansion not used Sirius 850 expanded to second frame Off normal state Flashing the command message from the remote router controller is corrupt or hasn t been received This communications error could be caused by a hardware failure or incorrect insertion Check that the module is inserted correctly and the four RJ45 connections between the frames are fitted correctly see section 12 2 If the Remote Error LED is flashing at the same time as the Remote Command OK LED is flashing it suggests a mismatch in the configuration of the Nucleus controller Check the controller configuration Table 92 5923 5924 Sirius 840 850 Standard Video Output Module LED Information Page 303 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Modules No Longer Supplied With New Systems ve6S Ec6S Power OK Command OK Command Error Remote Command OK Remote Error Fig 188 5923 5924 Sirius 840 850 Standard Video Output Module LEDs Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 304 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Modules No Longer Supplied With New Systems B 3 3 Important AN Note 5925 Sirius 800 Vi
303. ono or stereo signal NORMAL INVERT control on off Stereo Mode Options are Left Right swap Left Both Right Both Mono Mix or Normal Table 105 4929 and 4925 AES MADI Output Modules Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 327 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Specifications 4929 and 4925 AES MADI Output Module AES Outputs Functional Signal Standard AES3 2009 Output Sample Rate Free running asynchronous to any reference the signal input sample rate is re generated at the output Format 20 bit or 24 bit as input format Transparency Default channel status and User data applied to all re synchronised outputs Default Channel Status bits set to Consumer Use of Channel Status bit 0 Professional 1 Linear PCM Identification bit 1 PCM Data Carried 0 or Non PCM data carried e g Dolby data 1 Sampling Frequency bits 6 amp 7 48kHz 0 amp 1 44 1 kHz 1 amp 0 or 32 kHz 1 amp 1 or Not Indicated 0 O Sampling Frequency bits 35 to 38 96 kHz 0 1 0 0 192 kHz 1 1 0 0 or Not Indicated 0 0 0 0 Use of Auxiliary Sample Bits bit 18 24 bit format 1 All other default channel status bits set to Zero 0 Default User Data bits set to All bits set to Zero 0 Parity re calculated on outputs Transparent to audio data Sample rate adjustment for near rate locking by drop repeat Transparency free Transparent to audio da
304. or Expansion Message OK Expansion Message Error Fig 193 5937 Sirius 830 Standard Video BNC Fiber Output Module LEDs Issue 5 Rev2 Page 312 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Modules No Longer Supplied With New Systems B 4 Output Rear Panel B 4 1 1298 Sirius 800 Balanced AES Output Rear Panel The 1298 Sirius 800 balanced AES output rear panel has 5 x 62 way female high density sockets for balanced AES audio outputs Note Y The 1298 Sirius 800 Balanced AES output rear panel was supplied with earlier Sirius 800 router systems and is shown here for users that already have them fitted The 1353 Sirius 800 Balanced AES output rear panel can be supplied as direct replacement for the 1298 if required See section 11 8 for details of the 1353 rear panel If unbalanced AES outputs are required see section 11 9 for details The 1298 rear panel is used with the 4929 4925 120 channel AES MADI output module For the wiring details for the 62 way D Type sockets see section 11 8 1 o E J Fig 194 1298 Sirius 800 Balanced AES Output Rear Panel Sockets 1 i PE 1 to 24 m pet Not Used Sockets 2 Outputs 25 to 48 Sockets 3 Outputs 49 to 72 Sockets 4 Outputs 73 to 96 Sockets 5 Outputs 97 to 120 Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 313 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Modules No Longer Supplied With New Systems B 5 Multiviewer Modules B 5
305. or RollCall If the controller IP address is not available a new one can be set using a USB memory stick see the Sirius 800 Maintenance amp Upgrade manual for details Using Workbench 2463 Nucleus2 Router Control Module Navigate to ConfigurationItems IP IP 1 Number 0 DHCP False set to false for a fixed IP address Address set the IP address of the controller Port if blank then the network port will be the default value which is 2007 SubnetMask set to match the network DefaultGateway if unknown or not required enter 0 0 0 0 Speed NWK AUTO Default setting Configures the controller to negotiate its communication speed with the network switch This setting should always be used unless the network switch is set to force a specific speed in which case one of the following settings should be used to match the network switch setting NWK 10 BASE Forces the controller to 10 Mbps NWK 100 BASE Forces the controller to 100 Mbps NWK 1000 BASE Not Available e Changes will not take effect until the Nucleus2 controller has been reset This forces it to read the new IP Address from its config xml file Having changed the controller IP address remember to use its new IP address to connect to it Ifthe controller is one of a pair in the router the other controller s replication address details must be changed to match the new IP address details set see section 14 3 6 for details Issue 5 Rev2 Page 244 20
306. or SW P 02 amp SW P 08 Protocols 259 14 4 10 Further Information 0 0000 cece ee 259 14 5 Multi Drop Panel Communications Protocol SW P 06 260 14 6 General Switcher Protocol SW P 02 n a saaa aaaea 260 14 6 1 SW P 02 Routing Monitoring O Ps amp MV Destination Control 260 14621517 Sirius 830 icik ossa sane PS me xe Rom gale Be x eem edt 261 14 6 1 2 Sirius 840 iiio isle t buie RA ORE RP IAS E LUO I Tg UPS 262 14 6 1 3 Sirius 850 Single Frame with Optional Expansion Outputs 263 14 6 1 4 Sirius 850 Dual Frame 264 15 Control Fan Interface Module cece eee 265 15 1 Control Fan Interface Module Compatibility 266 1571 4 Fan QU ewe Rer edere auis n nk eel Re ee ac Aa 268 15 1 2 Sirius 850 Control Fan Interface Module in a Two Frame System 268 15 1 3 Control Fan Interface Module LEDs 00 eae 269 16 Control and Alarm Rear Panel Connections 271 16 1 Sirius 830 Control Connections 0 00 ee eee 271 16 2 Sirius 840 850 Control Connections 272 16 3 Sirius 840 850 Alarm Rear Panel Connections nuas auauna naaa 273 16 3 1 Sirius 840 850 Frame ID Rotary Switch on the Alarm Rear Panel 274 16 4 Control I O and Alarm Pin outS 0 0 c eee e 274 16 4 1 RS485 9 Way D Type Socket 274 16 4 2 LTC amp AES Reference 9 Way D Type Socket 275 16 4 3 Alarm Relay Output 25 Wa
307. ormation and OK module working correctly Command Error with command from Off normal state Error the Control module Flashing the command message from the router controller is corrupt or hasn t been received Contact Snell Customer Support see section 1 2 for contact details Switch Flashes on a take signal Off normal state when switching a route Flashes each time a route is set PAL OK Flashes and signals that the Flashing the FPGA is working FPGA is working correctly correctly Xpt Error Displays if there is a Off normal state problem with any crosspoints On solid problem with one or more crosspoints on the module Flashing Crosspoint module overheating make sure the fan assemblies are all closed and the fans are all operating correctly Table 49 5902Sirius 800 Series Multiviewer Crosspoint Module LED Information Command Error Power OK Command OK Switch Xpt Error PAL OK 5902 Fig 145 5902Sirius 800 Series Multiviewer Crosspoint Module LEDs Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 220 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Multiviewer and Input Output Monitoring Modules 13 6 5931 Sirius 800 Multiviewer Output Module The 5931 Sirius 800 multiviewer output module takes the 48 multiviewer output signals from the 5902 multiviewer crosspoint module and passes each signal through a re clocker Each 5931 multiviewer output module has 48 outputs Connectors to
308. ot used Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 316 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Modules No Longer Supplied With New Systems B 5 2 1 Sirius 850 Multiview Link Outputs Pins Function Pins Function 1 nput 7 15 nput 7 Shield 2 Input 7 16 Input 8 3 Input 8 Shield 17 Input 8 4 Input 5 18 Input 5 Shield 5 Input 5 19 Input 6 6 Input 6 Shield 20 Input 6 7 Input 3 21 Input 3 Shield 8 Input 3 22 Input 4 9 Input 4 Shield 23 nput 4 10 Input 1 24 Input 1 Shield 11 Input 1 25 Input 7 12 Input 2 Shield 26 Input 7 13 INC 27 Shield 14 NC 28 NC Table 97 Multiview Link Outputs Note Cables are supplied if MV Link is ordered Kaleido must also be ordered with MV Link Issue 5 Rev2 Page 317 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Modules No Longer Supplied With New Systems Issue 5 Rev2 Page 318 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Specifications Appendix C Specifications C 1 Inputs C 1 1 Video Inputs 5917 5919 5913 5915 and 5916 Video Input Modules used with 1234 1349 1235 1285 or 1289 Main Coax Video Input Rear Panels Number and type 24 per module automatic cable equalisation and re clocked Connectors BNC to IEC61169 8 750 electrical impedance Gold plated Standards supported SMPTE 259M 525 and
309. outer Systems Front Module and Rear Panel Compatibility Important Early Sirius 800 routers must be modified by Snell before they can be used for audio routing and processing 4915 5919 4929 5949 4925 5915 5925 or 5903 modules in use See section 3 11 to check if the router needs modifying Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 88 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Module Locations Table 14 shows which front modules and rear panels can be used together on earlier Sirius 800 router systems Front Module Rear Panel Sirius 800 AES MADI output module no audio delay 1353 Balanced AES see section 11 8 120 AES Pairs and up to 3 MADI outputs 1356 Unbalanced AES 4925 MADI outputs not supported by 1298 rear see section 11 9 Section B 3 1 Panel 1298 Balanced AES see Appendix B 4 1 or 1295 BNC See section 11 6 150 Maina Fed OBI 1296 Fiber See section 11 7 5913 Sirius 840 850 Standard Video BNC Input 1285 BNC See section 9 5 Section B 2 1 module 5914 Sirius 840 850 Standard Video Fiber input 1286 Fiber See section 9 6 Section B 2 1 module Sirius 830 1234 1235 BNC See section 9 1 5915 1236 Fiber See section 9 2 Sirius 800 Video AHP input module Section B 2 2 Sirius 840 850 1349 1289 BNC See section 9 7 1305 Fiber See section 9 8 5916 Sirius 830 Standard Video BNC Fiber 1234 1235 BNC See section 9 1 Section B 2 3 input module 1236 Fiber See section 9 2 5923 Sirius 840 850 Stan
310. output module is compatible with the 1296 Fiber rear panel see section 11 7 Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 302 2014 Snell Limited www snellgroup com Modules No Longer Supplied With New Systems 5923 5924 Output Module LED Information Table 92 shows the LED color code on the 5923 and 5924 output module and Fig 188 shows the output module LEDs LED Color Function Detail Normal Working Status Power OK Power to the module On Solid working correctly Command OK Receiving messages from local Nucleus control module the Nucleus controller in this frame Flashing receiving information and working correctly Command Error Error with messages from local Nucleus control module the Nucleus controller in this frame Off normal state Flashing the command message from the router controller is corrupt or hasn t been received This communications error could be caused by a hardware failure or incorrect insertion Check that the module is inserted correctly If the Command Error LED is flashing at the same time as the Command OK LED is flashing it suggests a mismatch in the configuration of the Nucleus controller Check the controller configuration Remote Command OK Receiving messages from remote Nucleus control module the Nucleus controller in the frame linked to this frame Sirius 830 840 850 no expansion Off Expansion not used Sirius 850 expanded to sec
311. outputs can display see Table 54 Signal Monitor Output Catsii Color Default Monitor port not enabled Off Off No signal Current configured setting for No valid signal Red SD or DVB ASI Current configured setting for Valid SD signal Yellow Any HD or 3G signal Current configured setting for Valid 1080i signal Green AES audio signal Current configured setting for No valid signal Red via 4915 4929 4925 modules Table 54 Control Panel Catsii Signal Status Colors Sirius 840 850 Connectors to Connector to the Motherboard Control Rear Panel LEDs Monitor LEDs Fig 152 5933 Sirius 840 850 Output Monitoring Module Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 227 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Multiviewer and Input Output Monitoring Modules 5933 Sirius 840 850 Output Monitoring Module LEDs Table 55 shows the LED color code on the 5933 output monitoring module and Fig 153 shows the front edge of the module LED Color Function Power OK Detail Power to the module Normal Working Status On Solid working correctly Command OK module Command from the Control Flashing receiving information and working correctly Command Error Error with command from the Control module Off normal state Flashing the command message from the router controller is corrupt or hasn t been received Contact Snell Customer Support see section 1 2 for con
312. p rear panels Destination 1364 to 1411 Monitoring Outputs 1to4 Destination 16370 to 16373 Destinations 1 to 576 are not used and do not respond to any control Table 71 Sirius 850 Input Output Port Mapping Frame 2 Of 2 Multiviewer Outputs 1292 to 1431 only if two 1292 multiviewer MV Link rear panels are fitted no longer supplied Nucleus 2450 Config ini File The Nucleus configuration details can be found in the Config ini file which is on the Compact Flash memory card The Config ini file stores configuration details such as Test Mode switching delay SW P 02 over IP settings etc See the Workbench user manual for full details of the Config ini file The following entries are required in the Config ini file DEBUG TestMode 0 Snell internal testing use only Must be set to 0 for router control The Nucleus router control module will not be able to control the router if TestMode is set to any other value ROUTING Set_Delay 1 A delay in milliseconds before setting a crosspoint following the first crosspoint received The default is 1 disabled The purpose is to ensure multiple crosspoints sent serially are set on a single frame boundary For example if an external controller is setting two crosspoints serially using general switcher protocol and the external controller cannot tell where in the frame it is sending the messages it is possible for one crosspoint to go on one frame and the second
313. p60 1080 progressive 60 Hz Ref1080p59 1080 progressive 59 Hz Ref1080p50 1080 progressive 50 Hz Reflnput1 Overrides the Auto detection by using one of the fixed reference inputs to which allows the same standard but offset for timing issues to be Reflnput4 resolved see section 3 9 3 There can be a mix of the physical reference inputs and the derived reference inputs depending on which Nucleus controller type is fitted and how it is configured see the following notes Notes e f Nucleus 2450 controllers are fitted only the physical reference inputs are available e If Nucleus2 2463 controllers are fitted then a mix of physical and derived reference inputs are available for use depending on router configuration see section 3 9 1 for details on derived references Table 4 Switching Point Video References Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 43 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Product Overview Video Reference Video Signal SDlInput1 and SDIInput2 Table 4 Switching Point Video References Not Available 3 9 3 Reference Offset Nucleus2 Controllers Only In some circumstances it is necessary to set an offset on a reference signal to accommodate System timing and to make sure the video signal switches at the correct point see section 3 9 5 and section 3 9 6 for examples of when this may be required Reference offsets can be set from Door screen see section 5 3 3 or from Workbench see section 3 9 1 3
314. pansion In connectors a b and c for outputs 1 to 24 in slot 1 a b and c for outputs 1 to 24 in slot 1 Fig 126 Two Sirius 850 Frames Connected Together slot 1 cabling shown as an example Ensure the Frame IDs are correctly set for both the Sirius 850 frames when connecting them together The rotary Frame ID switch is located on the alarm rear panel of the router See section 16 3 1 for details e Each 1290 rear panel must be connected to the expansion inputs of the corresponding output module in the second Sirius 850 frame i e slot 1 to slot 1 slot 2 to slot 2 etc The expansion input connectors are located below the output module rear panel connectors 1 to 24 and are marked a b and c The connections on the 1290 rear panel are marked A B and C The expansion cables connect A to a B to b and C to c The Remote and Local control connections between the two frames are connected as detailed in section 12 2 1 e Itis not possible to mix the 1290 and 1293 Output Rear Panels in a frame Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 203 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Sirius 850 Video Expansion 12 3 59368 Sirius 850 Standard Video Output Module Expandable The 5938 Sirius 850 standard video output module expandable has 24 video output channels and can handle SD ASI and HD signals up to 3Gb s When the 5938 module is mounted in a Sirius 850 router it can receive video expansion signals fr
315. placement controller the active controller synchronizes persistence AHP audio settings and crosspoint tally table files with it This process replication is indicated on the idle controller by LED 5 flashing orange When replication is complete LED 5 will flash green Failing over to the idle controller before data synchronization is complete may corrupt the data files being synchronized and affect the operation of the router Dual Redundant 2463 Router Control Modules Do not fail over to the idle controller if LED 5 on the idle controller is flashing orange data synchronization in progress Failing over to the idle controller before data synchronization is complete may corrupt the data files being synchronized and affect the operation of the router When LED 5 on the idle controller flashes green data synchronization complete it is safe to fail over the controller e f resetting the 2463 router control module remotely check the value of OID 2 5 6 for the active controller True Replication is complete Safe to Reset False Replication is not complete Do Not Reset Single 2463 Router Control Module e All communication with the 2463 router control module will be lost during a reset Because of this the crosspoints cannot be switched and tallies are not reported during this process Video and audio processing is unaffected Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 237 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 8
316. plicate input Router MADI Input Rear Panels 1303 BNC Input Rear Panel see section 9 3 1304 Fiber Input Rear Panel see section 9 4 1285 BNC Input Rear Panel see section 9 5 1286 Fiber Input Rear Panel see section 9 6 Sirius 830 Sirius 840 850 Table 7 The drop down box to the right of each pair of MADI signals is used to set the MADI input signal used by the router Options are AutolnputSelector Select for automatic changeover between the main and redundant MADI inputs in the event of a MADI input failure Operation If the main MADI input fails the input module will automatically switch to the redundant input for that feed Once it has switched the input module will continue to use the redundant input even if the main input is restored If subsequently the redundant input fails the input module will automatically switch back to the main MADI input e Main Overrides automatic input selection and selects the Main MADI input as the input used by the router Important This is an override and will prevent the router automatically switching to the redundant input if the main input stops working Redundant Overrides automatic input selection and selects the Redundant MADI input as the input used by the router Important This is an override and will prevent the router automatically switching to the main input if the redundant input stops working EnableOverride Not U
317. point 1 fails Output 7 on the output module switches to the redundant path Any failure needs addressing immediately to retain protection see section 10 4 1 for details Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 151 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Crosspoint Modules 10 4 Video Crosspoint Failure If Video Redundancy is enabled see section 10 2 and a video crosspoint routing failure is detected by the redundant crosspoint checking algorithm the Nucleus router controller performs one of the following actions based on the configuration in Workbench see section 10 7 for details on changing this setting Move the failed route to the redundant crosspoint default when shipped Move all routes from the crosspoint module with the failure to the redundant crosspoint module e Just notify the user and leave them to take appropriate action Note e Any failure needs addressing immediately to retain protection e For information on replacing the failed crosspoint card see section 10 4 1 Following a change in source for a given output routing change it can take several seconds to check the Sirius 800 redundancy It is assumed that it is okay until this is done and so no alarm is flagged during this checking period 10 4 1 Replacing a Failed Video Crosspoint Module using the Door PC Note e The fan assembly should be placed back into the closed position as soon as possible after opening as this ensures corre
318. portant Before powering down the Sirius 800 router switch the Door PC off using one of the following methods Method 1 1 2 3 4 Navigate to the Door PC main menu and touch the Exit button on the screen A new screen will be displayed with a Shutdown button Touch the Shutdown button and the Door PC will shutdown Wait until Windows closes and the screen goes black then power down the Sirius 800 Make sure that all the external power supply shelves are switched off as soon as possible Method 2 1 Alternatively open the door and press and release the Door PC power switch see Fig 19 The power switch does not latch in place This causes LiveRunner to close and Windows to shut down Wait until Windows closes and the screen goes black then power down the Sirius 800 Make sure that all the external power supply shelves are switched off as soon as possible Once the Door PC has shutdown the Sirius 800 can be powered down Make sure that all of the external power supply shelves are switched off as quickly as possible to avoid individual power supply units having to supply excessive power to the Sirius 800 To avoid overloading the individual external power supply units make sure that all the external power supply shelves are switched off as quickly as possible Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 52 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Door PC 5 Door PC Note 5 1 Importan
319. put Modules see section 13 6 1 Up to two 1291 Multiviewer Coax Monitor Rear Panels see section 13 11 1 to 48 73 to 120 1t04 For details of the Monitor 1 to 4 BNC connections see section 16 2 Input Output Monitoring selected from either the input or the output of the module pre or post processing See section 5 6 3 for details on how to configure this using the router Door PC Multiviewer signals are always post processing Fig 141 Multiviewer Outputs and Input Output Monitoring Option Sirius 850 e If Input pre processing is monitored using the monitor outputs then multiviewer outputs should not be routed from inputs 1 3 5 and 7 of any video input module as they will display duplicates of the four monitoring outputs Earlier Sirius 850 systems were sometimes fitted with 5932 multiviewer output module s and either 1291 multiviewer coax rear panel s or 1292 MV Link rear panel s e The 1292 MV Link rear enabled up to 140 multiviewer outputs to be connected to a Miranda KaleidoX multiviewer see sections B 5 and B 5 2 for details 5932 modules and 1292 rear panels are no longer available and are shown here for users that already have them fitted Issue 5 Rev2 Page 217 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Multiviewer and Input Output Monitoring Modules 13 4 3 Sirius 850 Output Monitoring Only no multiviewer outputs e 5933 qty 1 Output Monitor module Video Audio Outputs f 1x 5933 See s
320. r Fugue Status Top LED Diagnostic LEDs x 8 Bottom LED Fig 191 5925 Sirius 800 Video AHP Output Module LEDs Issue 5 Rev2 Page 310 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Modules No Longer Supplied With New Systems B 3 4 5937 Sirius 830 Standard Video BNC Fiber Output Module Note e The 5937 Sirius 830 standard video BNC Fiber output module was supplied with earlier Sirius 830 router systems and is shown here for users that already have it fitted The 5937 Sirius 830 standard video BNC Fiber output module can be supplied as replacements for these earlier systems if required On newer systems the 5926 Sirius 800 standard video output module non expandable can be used instead of the 5937 and uses the same rear panels so is a direct replacement See section for details The 5937 Sirius 830 standard video BNC Fiber output module is a 24 channel output module with re clocking Routing to the output module is controlled by the Nucleus router controller module There are two main busses to the output module one from the motherboard and one from the rear connector board Connectors tothe 1294 or 1302 Rear Modules Fig 192 5937 Sirius 830 Standard Video BNC Fiber Output Module The 5937 Output Module is compatible with the 1294 BNC rear panel See section 11 4 and the 1302 Fiber rear panel See section 11 5 Issue 5 Rev2 Page 311 2014 Snell Limited
321. r of the video channel The Summary tab displays all of the possible video standards and whether they are configured for frame sync or delay The signal standard is auto detected and the channel uses the settings defined in the appropriate Frame sync or Delay tab for that standard Function Function Description Channel Configuration Applies to all video standards Detected Standard Displays the detected video standard for the selected video channel Summary button Click on the Summary button to return to the summary screen Check the box to enable frame line sync on the selected video Frame Sync Enabled channel Select the embedded audio from before or after the frame sync block by clicking on the required option Table 38 Frame Sync Delay Summary Screen Audio Selection Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 179 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Output Modules and Output Rear Panels Function Function Description Sync Function Select to sync to frame or to line by clicking on the required option Summary tab Standard amp Mode for each video input standard Green when frame sync is enabled for the video standard Frame Syne Inadicator Red when frame sync is not enabled for the video standard Green when video delay is enabled for the video standard Delay Indicator Red when video delay is not enabled for the video standard Table 38 Frame Sync Delay Summary Screen Frame Line Sync A video output sign
322. r is corrupt or hasn t been received This communications error could be caused by a hardware failure or incorrect Insertion Check that the module is inserted correctly If the Error LED is flashing at the same time as the Command OK LED is flashing it suggests a mismatch in the configuration of the Nucleus controller Check the controller configuration Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 172 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Output Modules and Output Rear Panels LED Color Label Deiail Normal Working Status Video External Video On Solid external video reference Ref 1 Reference 1 Status present and local oscillators locked Off external video reference not present Video External Video On Solid external video reference Ref 2 Reference 2 Status present and local oscillators locked Off external video reference not present Video External Video On Solid external video reference Ref 3 Reference 3 Status present and local oscillators locked Off external video reference not present Video External Video On Solid external video reference Ref 4 Reference 4 Status present and local oscillators locked Off external video reference not present AES Ref External AES On Solid external AES reference Reference Status present and local oscillators locked Off external video reference not present Table 36 4929 Output Module LED Information Fugue Status LED R
323. r supplied See Appendix B 4 1 Up to 12 MADI output channels 1295 MADI Output BNC rear panel See section 11 6 1296 MADI Output Fiber rear panel See section 11 7 Table 34 4929 Rear Panel Compatibility Fugue LED PL2 Link fitted across two pins closest to LEDs LEDs Connectors to the 1353 1356 1295 1296 or 1298 Rear Modules Firmware Licensing SD SDHC Card see the Sirius 800 Maintenance amp Upgrade manual for details Fig 101 4929 120 Channel AES MADI Output Module Note Jumpers and Headers are present on the audio output module and these are for Snell Use Only n normal operation no jumper links or headers are fitted except for PL2 which has a link fitted across the two pins closest to the LEDs on the front of the module Issue 5 Rev2 Page 163 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Output Modules and Output Rear Panels 11 1 1 11 1 2 Note Duplicate MADI Outputs When fitted with the 1295 or 1296 MADI rear panels the 4929 module outputs 12 MADI channels and a further 12 duplicate MADI channels The main and backup connections are shown in the rear panel diagrams listed below Rear Panel See Figure Number 1295 BNC rear panel See Fig 117 on page 188 1296 Fiber rear panel See Fig 118 on page 189 Table 35 MADI Main and Backup Connections Configuring MADI to 56 or 64 Channels Individual MADI channels are configured to output in 56 or 64 channel MADI using the Workbenc
324. rect rear panels see section 11 10 for details e Upto 64 channels of audio per MADI output 11 1 4 MADI Audio Outputs Note To connect MADI audio outputs from a 4929 input module it must be used with either a 1295 BNC or 1296 Fiber rear panel Up to 12 MADI outputs one main and one duplicate output of each channel When fiber SFP modules are used the main and duplicate MADI outputs span two separate SFP modules to guard against an SFP failure see section 11 7 for details Up to 64 channels of audio per MADI output Maximum of 768 12 x 64 audio channels per 4929 audio output module MADI streams are generated locked to the AES reference All audio must be synchronous for fully transparent operation Re generate VU amp C data See Table 105 on page 327 for default standard details Asynchronous AES channels will be added to the MADI using drop repeat techniques Asynchronous Dolby E will not pass error free through MADI outputs Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 165 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Output Modules and Output Rear Panels 11 1 5 Audio Processing on the Output Module The 4929 audio output module can manipulate the audio channels received from the audio crosspoint before outputting them Note e Sample Rate Conversion SRC is a licensed option and must be purchased for each module it is used on See section 3 5 for details The audio processing functions allow
325. redundancy settings Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 160 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Crosspoint Modules 10 7 Configuring Video Audio Crosspoint Failure Action The action on crosspoint failure for video and audio are set from the Workbench controller online editor See the Workbench manual for information on using the online editor Nucleus2 2463 Controller Navigate to Devices Devices 1 LocalRouterDevice LocalRouterControl RouterSpecificControl Sirius800Control Nucleus 2450 Controller Navigate to Control2450 CommonControl RouterSpecificControl Sirius800Control Nucleus2 2463 amp Nucleus 2450 Controllers Video navigate to RedundantXpntControl ActionOnFail MoveFailedRoute Select the required action from the drop down menu NoAction Notify the user and leave them to take appropriate action MoveFailedRoute Move the failed route to the redundant crosspoint default when shipped MoveAllRoutes Move all routes from the crosspoint with the failure to the redundant crosspoint Audio 2463 only navigate to RedundantAudioXpntControl FailedAction MoveFailedStream Select the required action from the drop down menu MoveFailedStream Move the failed stream to the redundant crosspoint default when shipped MoveAllStreams Move all streams from the crosspoint with the failure to the redundant crosspoint Important Ifthe video or audio action on fail setting is
326. redundant crosspoint card Grey Redundant crosspoint card is working correctly Yellow Redundant crosspoint card has failed or been bypassed Touch the button to bypass the main crosspoint card Grey Main crosspoint card is working correctly Yellow Main crosspoint card has failed or been bypassed Sirius 840 850 Crosspoint Card Status Buttons XpntCardOddToOdd 1 button XpntCardEvenToOdd 2 button XpntCardRedundant R button XpntCardOddToEven 3 button XpntCardEvenToEven 4 button Touch the button to bypass crosspoint card 1 Grey Crosspoint card 1 is working correctly Yellow Crosspoint card 1 has failed or been bypassed Touch the button to bypass crosspoint card 2 Grey Crosspoint card 2 is working correctly Yellow Crosspoint card 2 has failed or been bypassed Touch the button to bypass the redundant crosspoint card Grey Redundant crosspoint card is working correctly Yellow Redundant crosspoint card has failed or been bypassed Touch the button to bypass crosspoint card 3 Grey Crosspoint card 3 is working correctly Yellow Crosspoint card 3 has failed or been bypassed Touch the button to bypass crosspoint card 4 Grey Crosspoint card 4 is working correctly Yellow Crosspoint card 4 has failed or been bypassed Table 8 Video Crosspoint Matrix Status Screen Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 67 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Door PC 5 4 1 4 Video Cro
327. rence signal will be used to create a derived SD reference of the same frame rate as the external reference signal e 720P the selected external reference signal will be used to create a derived 720p reference of the same frame rate as the external reference signal e 1080i the selected external reference signal will be used to create a derived 1080i reference of the same frame rate as the external reference signal e 1080p the selected external reference signal will be used to create a derived 1080p reference of the same frame rate as the external reference signal If an offset is required for one or more derived references touch the Reference Offset button see Fig 33 To return to the Derived Reference status screen touch the Back button Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 62 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Door PC Reference Offset Configuration Nucleus2 2463 only This screen is used to configure offsets for the derived references if they are required Offsets are set in milliseconds lines or frames An offset can be set on a reference signal to negate timing issues to make sure the video signal switches at the correct point see section 3 9 5 and section 3 9 6 for examples of when this may be required Important Before making any configuration changes please see section 3 9 Derived Reference Control Time ms eu PTT R r Ls toca lcs E Fig
328. rently from any input Dolby E is flagged as non audio and passed transparently to the audio crosspoint Up to 3 MADI inputs are also available on HD BNC connectors with correct rear panels see section 9 11 for details e Upto 64 channels of audio per MADI input e Each MADI input can be asynchronous 9 12 3 MADI Audio Functions Up to 12 MADI inputs 56 or 64 channels of audio per MADI input at a nominal sample rate of 48 kHz Maximum of 768 12 x 64 audio channels per 4915 audio input module 12 redundant MADI inputs which automatically switch if a main MADI input fails Each MADI input can be asynchronous to others Passes all input audio channels including VU amp C Validity User and Channel status data to the audio crosspoint Dolby E is flagged as non audio and passed transparently to the audio crosspoint Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 128 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Input Rear Panels and Input Modules 9 12 4 Note Audio Processing on the Input Module The 4915 audio input module can manipulate the audio channels received from the input rear panels before outputting them to the audio crosspoint card This makes it possible to customize the audio input channels to a house standard within the router The audio processing functions are gain control phase invert and stereo mode left right swap left both right both or mono mix The audio processing is supplied free of charge for each
329. roller card If set to 0 no SNMP features are activated on the card If set to 1 the SNMP features are activated subject to the restrictions in the next section Note If this changes the card requires a restart If this entry is omitted from the ini file it defaults to O The Enable flag enables or disables the ability of the Nucleus 2450 router controller to connect to a computer running RollCall Set to 1 to enable RollCall connection this is the default setting or set to 0 to disable RollCall connection These settings are shown with their default values and they need not be changed unless instructed to do so by Snell Support Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 254 2014 Snell Limited www snellgroup com Nucleus Router Control Modules SNMP Versionz Version Description Text Contact Unknown Location Unknown SysName 2450 NumberCommunityGet Names 1 NumberCommunitySet Names 1 TrapManager 1 TrapManagerAddrN 1 72 31 7 133 CommunityGetName N public CommunitySetName N private EnableSnellTraps 1 The Version variable is the text that is returned when the sysDescr SNMP request 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 1 is received by the card The Contact variable is the text that is returned when the sysContact SNMP request 1 3 6 1 2 1 1 4 is received by the card This can be set to the name and or contact details responsible for this equipment The Location variable is the text that is returned wh
330. rosspoint modules can be fitted sending signals to the output modules Four crosspoint modules are used as the main crosspoint modules and the fifth is optional for redundancy Sirius 850 Expanded up to 576 x 1152 1152 x 1152 for a two frame system Up to five additional crosspoint modules can be fitted in the top of an expanded frame These send signals to the expansion output modules in the top of the router Four crosspoint modules are used as the main crosspoint modules and the fifth is optional for redundancy In a two frame system each frame must be fitted with expansion crosspoints Audio each crosspoint module has 18 432 crosspoints Sirius 830 up to 9 216 x 9 216 Up to two crosspoint modules can be fitted sending signals to the output cards One crosspoint module is used as the main crosspoint module and the second is optional for redundancy Sirius 840 up to 18 432 x 18 432 Up to two crosspoint modules can be fitted sending signals to the output cards One crosspoint module is used as the main crosspoint module and the second is optional for redundancy Sirius 850 up to 18 432 x 18 432 Up to two crosspoint modules can be fitted sending signals to the output cards One crosspoint module is used as the main crosspoint module and the second is optional for redundancy Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 29 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Product Overview Nucleus router controller Dual redundant with auto fail over P
331. roup com Product Overview 3 8 Sirius 850 Frame Overview 3 8 4 Frame Architecture Fig 11 shows the main features of an expandable Sirius 850 router frame Up to 576 video signals to a second frame by using a 1290 rear panel see section 12 5 or Video Outputs DIN 1 0 2 3 using a 1293 rear panel see section 12 6 Expanded frame size EV 5762 Redundant Video 4 x Main Video Crosspoint Modules Crosspoint Matrix 1 x Redundant Video Crosspoint Module Optional _ fz 48 or 96 Multiviewer Outputs pr DIN 1 0 2 3 e Outputs B wand 4 t Output Monitori Monitoring Outputs ces BNC dL Video Inputs Up to 576 video and up to and 18432 audio inputs depending Audio Inputs on configuration Non A 4 x Main Video Crosspoint Modules 5762 Redundant Video P Expanded Crosspoint Matrix Y 1 x Redundant Video Crosspoint frame size Module Optional 184322 Redundant Audio V Crosspoint Matrix 1 x Main Audio Crosspoint Module 1 x Redundant Audio Crosspoint Module Optional Video Outputs and Audio Outputs t 18432 audio outputs depending Up to 576 video and up to on configuration Fig 14 Single Sirius 850 Router Frame Architecture Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 39 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Product Overview 3 8 2 Signal Flow Through the Router The Sirius 850 routes video
332. roup com Nucleus Router Control Modules 14 3 9 Enable Disable RollCall on a Nucleus2 Controller Using the Online Editor Note RollCall is enabled on the controller by default If RollCall needs to be disabled then this is done using the Workbench Online Editor The RollCall Command Set Files must be present on the controller to connect using RollCall see the Sirius 800 Maintenance amp Upgrade manual for details on installing these files if they are not present 2463 Nucleus2 Router Control Module Navigate to ConfigurationItems RollCall Enabled setto True to enable RollCall and False to disable RollCall The other settings are shown with their default values and they need not be changed unless instructed to do so by Snell Support StartupDelay 5 SharePort 2050 BridgePort 2600 BridgeRemoteAddress 128 1 1 1 BridgeAutoConnect False Name Router Informationl Info1 Information2 Info2 NetNibbles 1000 UseLongNames False Changes will not take effect until the controller has been reset If two Nucleus2 controllers are fitted in a router then the second one must also be enabled for RollCall Connect to the RollCall web applet by typing the controller IP address into the address bar of your web browser When the Nucleus2 web page is displayed click on the RollCall Control tab and the RollCall web applet will start Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 246 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup
333. rovides redundant control connections on RS422 485 and Ethernet e Status monitoring to external controller and door PC e Nucleus2 2463 support several protocols SW P 02 serial SW P 02 IP SW P 06 RS 485 multi drop panel protocol SW P 08 serial SW P 08 IN IP RollCall SNMP Control and SNMP Monitoring Earlier Sirius 800 routers were supplied with Nucleus 2450 controllers and these support several protocols SW P 02 serial SW P 02 IN IP SW P 02 IN time stamped crosspoint set SW P 06 RS 485 multi drop panel protocol SW P 08 serial RollCall SNMP Control SNMP Monitoring GVG ES Control and Harris Passthrough Control Options The Sirius 800 routers can be controlled using the following control systems Workbench RollCall Hardware Panels Soft Panels Workbench or RollCall RollMap External control systems using SW P 02 or SW P 08 Third party control systems using SW P 02 or SW P 08 Miscellaneous Dual redundant Power Supplies are fitted for maximum resilience depending on configuration A unique feature to the Sirius 800 range is the Catsii status indication and connector location functions Multiviewer outputs e Sirius 830 288 x 48 to 288 x 140 Sirius840 576 x 48 to 576 x 140 Sirius 850 576 x 48 to 576 x 96 Input Output Monitoring Outputs Sirius 830 Four outputs for input output monitoring cannot be used if Multiviewer outputs are fitted Sirius 840 and 850 Four independent outputs for
334. rs are fitted The 5917 Input Module is compatible with the rear panels listed in Table 23 See Section See section 9 1 Rear Panel Sirius 830 1234 1235 BNC rear panel Sirius 830 1236 Fiber rear panel Sirius 840 850 1349 1289 BNC rear panel Sirius 840 850 1305 Fiber rear panel See section 9 2 See section 9 7 See section 9 8 Table 23 5917 Rear Panel Compatibility Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 133 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Input Rear Panels and Input Modules 9 13 1 5917 Input Module LED Information Table 24 shows the LED color code on the 5917 Input Module and Fig 89 shows the front edge of the input module LED Color Label Deiail Normal Working Status Power OK Power to the module On Solid working correctly Local Receiving messages Flashing receiving information and Command from local Nucleus working correctly OK control module the Nucleus controller in this frame Local Error Error with messages Off normal state from local Nucleus Flashing the command message from control module the the router controller is corrupt or hasn t Nucleus controller in been received this frame This communications error could be caused by a hardware failure or incorrect insertion Check that the module is inserted correctly If the Local Error LED is flashing at the same time as the Local Command OK LED is flashing it suggests a mismatch in t
335. s Dimensions are in millimeters inches 59 49 1511 0 22 56 573 0 Fig 172 Sirius 850 Frame Dimensions Dimensions are of full size system without the 24 76 628 9 2146 BACK OF EARS oo gu sa Ne i Bi i co e 5a a iS A Page 279 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Router and Power Supply Shelf Dimensions A 4 Power Supply Shelf Dimensions The power supply shelf is a separate 2U assembly Power Supply Shelves are rack mountable and can be placed above below or remote from the Sirius Frame You must allow at least 250 mm 10 Inches at the rear of the shelf for cables and connectors 17 55 445 8 BACK OF EAR BACK OF EAR 19 00 482 6 Dimensions are in millimeters inches 346 i 88 0 Fig 173 Power Supply Shelf Dimensions Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 280 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Modules No Longer Supplied With New Systems Appendix B Modules No Longer Supplied With New Systems B 1 B 1 1 Note Input Rear Panels Sirius 830 1299 Balanced AES Input Rear Panel The 1299 balanced AES input rear panel has 5 x 62 way female high density sock
336. s and Outputs up to 9216 audio inputs and 9216 audio outputs depending on configuration Fig 7 Sirius 830 Router Frame Architecture Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 33 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Product Overview 3 6 2 Signal Flow Through the Router The Sirius 830 routes video and or audio signals by using the video and audio crosspoint modules The Sirius 830 can be fitted with either Multiviewer outputs or Input Output monitoring as required Fig 8 Multiviewer Outputs If the Multiviewer Crosspoint Module is fitted it receives signals from the input modules after any processing has been carried out Input Output Monitoring Outputs If an Input Output Monitoring Module is fitted each monitoring output can be independently configured to display either an input or an output signal Each monitoring output can also be independently configured to display a signal before or after processing has been applied to it processing modules only Up to four monitor signals are passed to both the BNC and DIN 1 0 2 3 connectors on the 1237 rear monitor module see section 13 2 2 The BNC connectors are optimized for video signals including embedded audio and the DIN 1 0 2 3 connectors are optimized for discrete audio signals Rear Mounted i o o ge Q LN a Front Outputs before 2 zi Mounted or after processing OLI j Output Monitoring slot therefore only Cro
337. s flag is that in a router with a large number of destinations 512 for example there are 5 trappable parameters per destination On startup this particular router would result in 2560 traps for the destination variables alone By setting this variable to 1 these initial traps are not sent but all subsequent ones are This is global setting that affects all Snell specific variables Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 256 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Nucleus Router Control Modules 14 4 5 Nucleus 2450 Viewing Modifying Config ini and Network ini Files 14 4 5 1 Note Note The Nucleus 2450 controller Compact Flash card stores the Config ini file and the Network ini file These files are used to set various controller parameters and can be modified if required to change controller configuration The contents of the Config ini file are listed in section 14 4 3 and the contents of the Network ini file are listed in section 14 4 4 This section describes how to view and modify the ini files using a simple text editor such as Microsoft Notepad There are two methods to modify the ini files FTP access to the Nucleus see section 14 4 5 1 e Removing the compact flash card and viewing modifying an ini file on the compact flash card see section 14 4 5 2 Modify an ini File Using FTP 1 Use Workbench to check the IP address es of the Nucleus controller s to be updated 2 Use acli
338. s shown below Fiber SFP Receiver Module Order Code SRR 3 Fiber SFP 2 channel 1260 1620nm receiver 3G HD SD MADI Capable Max 12 per rear panel Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 112 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Input Rear Panels and Input Modules 9 7 Sirius 840 850 1349 amp 1289 Video BNC Input Rear Panel Note The 1289 rear panel was supplied with earlier Sirius 840 850 router systems and is shown here for users that already have them fitted On newer systems the 1349 rear panel can be used instead of the 1289 and is compatible with the same video input modules so is a direct replacement The 1349 1289 video BNC input rear panels have 24 BNC inputs The 1349 1289 rear panels are used in the Sirius 840 850 with the 5919 5915 video input module 24 channel video with de embedder re clocking and AHP and the 5917 video input module 24 channel video with re clocking Video Input 1 Not Used f f f li f f li t i f f f f f Fig 75 1349 1289 Input BNC Rear Panel Sirius 840 850 only All the BNC connectors on the 1349 1289 rear panels have Snell s unique Catsii feature that illuminates each connector See section 6 for details of the Catsii functionality Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 113 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Input Rear Panels and Input Modules 9 8 Sirius 840 850 1305 Video Fiber Inp
339. se Only Firmware Licensing SD SDHC Card see the Sirius 800 Maintenance amp Upgrade manual for details Fig 189 5925 Sirius 800 Video AHP Output Module e Jumpers and Headers are present on the video output module and these are for Snell Use Only n normal operation no jumper links or headers are fitted The 5925 output module is compatible with the 1294 BNC rear panel see section 11 4 and the 1302 Fiber rear panel see section 11 5 Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 305 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Modules No Longer Supplied With New Systems B 3 3 1 Processing on the Output Module The 5925 video output module can manipulate the audio channels received from the crosspoint modules before outputting them This makes it possible to customize the video and audio output channels to a house standard reference within the router Note Audio processing is a licensed option and must be purchased for each module it is used on See section 3 5 for details Processing is configured in Workbench Fig 190 shows the order that the processing is applied to the signal To Input Output To Input Output Monitoring SI Monitoring Video with da Embedded Audio 9 from Video 9 Crosspoint LL o 2 g 5 o 9 E E 3 a 9 lt E E 9 Video Output with z EM 4 a Embedded Audio Audio Transport E 6 E Stream from
340. section 3 5 Video Processing License Snell Order Code S8AHP VF 1 license 8 assignable channels assigned to any input or output channels Frame Line Sync and Video Delay Frame Sync offset set in frames lines and pixels or milliseconds Line Sync offset set in pixels or milliseconds Video Delay set in pixels The video processing block can be used for frame line sync or video delay on a channel by channel basis but they cannot both be used on the same channel Input Standard 1125 1080 50P A amp B Level B dual link only 1125 1080 59P A amp B Level B dual link only 1125 1080 29i 1125 1080 25i 750 720 59P 750 720 50P 525 480 28i 625 576 25i Default Video Output Standard Last known good Controls per channel Genlock amp Video Delay Genlock Mode Lock to Reference Lock to Input Genlock H Phase 0 5H in pixel clock steps Genlock V Phase 0 5F in 1 line steps Video H Delay 0 1 Line in pixel clock steps Video V Delay 0 1 Frame in 1 line steps Video Delay 0 14 Pictures Picture Frame in progressive formats Picture Field in interlaced formats Reference Select Mode Configured for each input or output any of 4 looping references or internally derived references Other Controls Action on Loss of Input Freeze Black configurable HANC Data Blank On Off On removes all HANC data Note this
341. sed Use the Next and Previous buttons to move through the modules MADI Input Module Status Slot 20 m EE WD c I wo E EIS maois E E Ir maos EE m To mois SM EE sal mais BO v wo EN m v Ls maois N m ra maois NES aJ Tm rake X B z Signal Present mov NO Mmm Fig 29 MADI Inputs Slot 20 Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 59 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Door PC 5 3 3 References The reference screens are used to view the status of the references and also to configure the derived references and offsets If the router is fitted with Nucleus 2450 controllers only the Reference Status screen will be displayed see Fig 30 For details on video references see section 3 9 and for the audio reference see section 3 10 Reference Status Screen Nucleus 2450 only This screen displays the status of the router reference inputs See the on screen Key for details References Audio Reference Reference 2 Reference 4 ice aeg Key a a Fig 30 Reference Status Nucleus 2450 only Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 60 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Door PC Note Derived References Nucleus2 2463 only This screen displays the status of the external references offsets and derived references See the on screen Key for details Derived video references enable the router to use a reference signal standard that is not available from outside of th
342. sertion Check that the module is inserted correctly If the Error LED is flashing at the same time as the Command OK LED is flashing it suggests a mismatch in the configuration of the Nucleus controller Check the controller configuration Table 91 4925 Sirius 800 AES MADI Output Module no audio delay LED Information Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 300 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Modules No Longer Supplied With New Systems LED Color Label Detail Normal Working Status On Solid external video reference Video External Video present and local oscillators locked Ref 1 Reference 1 Status Off external video reference not present On Solid external video reference Video External Video present and local oscillators locked Ref 2 Reference 2 Status Off external video reference not present On Solid external video reference Video External Video present and local oscillators locked Ref 3 Reference 3 Status Off external video reference not present On Solid external video reference Video External Video present and local oscillators locked Ref 4 Reference 4 Status Off external video reference not present On Solid external AES reference AES Ref External AES present and local oscillators locked Reference Status Off external video reference not present Table 91 4925 Sirius 800 AES MADI Output Module no audio delay LED Information Fugue Status LED
343. sspoint Modules Module one module can be Module 1x 5939 fitted 1 x 5902 Multiviewer Output Modules 1 3 x 5931 Rear Main Monitoring Multiviewer Mounted Output Rear Outputs Outputs Panels 1 x 1237 1 3 x 1309 The before or after processing option Multiviewer or is only available for processing modules Input Output Monitoring see section 13 for details Fig 8 Sirius 830 Signal Flow Diagram Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 34 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Product Overview 3 6 3 A Rear Connectors Fig 9 shows a fully populated Sirius 830 frame with BNC Inputs and Outputs See section 8 2 for rear panel input output connector configuration details Multiviewer crosspoint cards and rear panels cannot be installed the same frame as a 1237 Monitoring module for details see section 13 Cables connected to the router must be fitted with adequate vertical and horizontal strain relief to avoid twisting of the rear panels causing damage to the router connectors and loss of electrical signal connection to the router Multiviewer see section 13 10 48Vdc Power Connectors _ ell 1237 a Monitoring Module Pans see Fig 10 oo 0 Inputs and Outputs see section 8 2 D Not used It is not possible to mix Multiviewers Control Rear Panel and the 1237 Monitoring module in see section 16 1 the same frame see section
344. sspoint before the failed crosspoint is replaced see section 10 5 5 for details Table 33 5903 Audio Crosspoint Module LED Information Sirius 800 Audio Crosspoint Arrangement The Sirius 800 routers have two horizontally mounted audio crosspoint modules that send audio signals to the output modules The 5903 audio crosspoint module is used with the audio capable input 4915 5919 and 5915 and output modules 4929 5949 4925 and 5925 For audio crosspoint module locations see section 8 2 1 Sirius 830 section 8 3 1 Sirius 840 or section 8 3 3 Sirius 850 The router requires a minimum of one audio crosspoint module The optional redundant crosspoint module can take the place of the main crosspoint module in the event of a failure If the redundant crosspoint module has become active due to a failure on the main crosspoint module the system is no longer redundant Audio Crosspoint Operation Each audio capable input module 4915 5919 and 5915 creates two identical multiplexed audio transport streams each of which contains all of the audio channels on the input module up to 768 mono channels One transport stream is sent to the main audio crosspoint module and a duplicate transport stream is sent to the redundant audio crosspoint module Similarly each audio crosspoint module generates a multiplexed audio transport stream up to 768 mono channels to each audio capable output module 4929 5949 4925 and 5925
345. sspoint Failure When a video crosspoint routing failure is detected by the redundant crosspoint checking algorithm the Nucleus router controller performs one of the following actions based on the configuration in Workbench Move the failed route to the redundant crosspoint default when shipped Move all routes from the crosspoint module with the failure to the redundant crosspoint module e Just notify the user and leave them to take appropriate action Note e See section 10 6 for details on enabling disabling video redundancy and section 10 7 for details on setting the redundancy action on crosspoint failure e For information on replacing a failed crosspoint card see section 10 4 1 If one or more routes fail on a video crosspoint module this will be displayed on the Main or Expansion Video Crosspoint Matrix Status screen A typical example of how the buttons will look is listed below see Fig 34 on page 64 or Fig 35 on page 65 for button and parameter locations Fail Found indicator Red Fault Present indicator Red First Failure Detected Failed Source and Destinations will display the first failed route e XpntCardNone Grey Failed Action text as configured in Workbench e Sirius 830 XpntCardMain830 Yellow indicates the crosspoint has failed e Sirius 840 850 XpntCardxxxToxxx x Yellow where xxx is the failed crosspoint module Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 68 2014 Snell Limited
346. sue 5 Rev 2 Page 103 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Module Locations 8 3 8 2 8 4 1293 Expansion Output Rear Panel Configuration The output from the 5928 Expansion Output Module is via the 1293 24 Channel Expansion Output Rear Panel Fig 66 Sirius 850 Expansion 1293 Output Rear Panel Configuration YYTETTTETTTT EEE FE L4 RW nannnnnnnna nnnnnnnnnnnn nounnnunnonncnunnnnonounnnnn nunnnaunananaanncznnnnonannannno HHH KHOR nnnnaoaonancancsnonnnononsoanun RHR HORROR CURRIE ELL LELE REL LE UE HGGG G nnnnaunnanunancsnonnananonaunnunnn IIC LL LELE ELE CELERE CIEL DIGI A III LLC ER ELLE CC LELE nounnounnounancononononnnnn nunnnmnunaocnucnunannop nmunnaunn nnnnauonnaunancannnnonannunnnno nnnnaoaognnancancsnnnnaonsoosoannn De AEGEE HGGG nnnnauonnnanncnnnnonannnnno HHH HHO ROAR BHR R ROHR nnnnnnnnunasnaonnonnnounnu 1152 60 Important The 1293 Expansion Output Rear panel has 24 x DIN 1 0 2 3Coax connectors Inserting and Removing Vertical Modules The rear panel fastening screws are supplied fitted to the rear panels and the rear panel blanking plates Replacement screw details Pozidriv Pan head M3 x 6 mm Zinc plated screw Before adding modules to a Sirius 800 router check that the power supplies fitted can supply sufficient power to the router See Appendix B for router power requirements Rear panels must be fitted and fastened securely to th
347. system being used The frame number is set using a 10 way rotary decimal switch on the rear of the router see Table 79 This uniquely identifies the Sirius 850 router within a multiple frame expanded system The Frame ID switch should be set according to the following table Frame Switch Description Value 0 Sirius 850 Only frame in a single frame system 576 x 1152 1 Sirius 850 First frame in a two frame system expanded to 11522 Outputs 1 576 2 Sirius 850 Second frame in a two frame system expanded to 11522 Outputs 577 1152 3 Sirius 840 4 to 9 These positions are reserved for future use Table 80 Frame ID Numbering Note e Ifa Sirius 850 router installation is modified from a single frame system to a two frame system or back to a single frame system the Frame ID will need to be changed on each Sirius 850 16 4 Control I O and Alarm Pin outs 16 4 4 RS485 9 Way D Type Socket Pins Multi drop General Switcher and General Remote 1 Chassis Chassis 2 Rx Tx 3 TX Rx 4 OV OV 5 N C N C 6 OV OV 7 Rx Tx 8 Tx Rx 9 Chassis Chassis Table 81 RS485 9 Way D Type Socket Issue 5 Rev2 Page 274 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Control and Alarm Rear Panel Connections 16 4 2 LTC amp AES Reference 9 Way D Type Socket Pins Function GND AES balanced Ground LTC AES Unbalanced GND AES balance
348. t The Workbench LiveRunner program runs on the Door PC screen and monitors the status of the Sirius 800 The Door screen can also be used to control some aspects of the router There are numerous default screens that provide easy control of the Sirius 800 router This section shows examples of the default door screens for the Sirius 800 range of routers The Door PC and controllers must be connected to an Ethernet hub switch using Ethernet cables and the Ethernet connectors on the rear of the router see section 16 for connector positions If the hub switch is on a network the IP addresses of the controllers and Door PC must be changed to match the host network requirements see the Sirius 800 Maintenance amp Upgrade manual for details The actual Door PC screens available on your system depends on the version of LiveRunner installed and the actual Sirius 800 router the door PC is on Although it is not recommended the door screens can be created deleted and modified by the user so the actual Door screens on your system may differ Main Menu The Door screen gives quick access to the monitoring and control functions of the router All sub screens have a Menu button touching this will return you to this main menu screen Sirius 850 Main Menu Signals tion 5 3 Video Inputs MADI Inputs References pem See sec i Status en Alarms see section 5 2 1 Status m Alarms see section 5 2 ims Modules Temperature Je Redundant
349. t either 1 or 2 The CommunitySetNameN variable is used to specify 1 of the community strings used for set operations The N should be replaced by a unique digit either 1 or 2 The EnableSnellTraps variable is used to specify whether traps are sent for changes to certain Snell specific variables If this is set to 0 MIBv2 system traps are sent but no Snell specific traps for example routed source change are sent Page 255 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Nucleus Router Control Modules SNMP TrapMessageDelay 10 DisablelnitialNotify 1 The TrapMessageDelay variable specifies the number of milliseconds minimum that occurs between consecutive Snell trap messages For example if it is set to 10 there is a gap of at least 10ms between each Snell specific trap message that is sent The reason for this is that when large numbers of crosspoints are changed simultaneously for example a large number of traps can be sent in quick succession which can cause unnecessary loading on the controller and management station It is recommended that this variable is set to a value between 0 and 100 Note No traps are discarded as a result of this setting they are simply queued up and sent at the specified intervals The DisablelnitialNotify flag can be used to prevent the controller card from sending power on startup traps for each variable type that supports traps The reason for implementing thi
350. t Output Monitoring selected from either the input or the output of the module pre or post processing See section 5 6 3 for details on how to configure this using the Fig 103 Audio Channel Processing Block Diagram MADI Rear Panel Issue 5 Rev2 Page 166 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Output Modules and Output Rear Panels 11 1 5 1 11 1 5 2 Audio Delay Delay is applied to an audio output channel in steps of 0 25 ms e MADI in a range of 0 to 2 Seconds 48 kHz AES in a range of 0 to 2 Seconds 48 kHz Sample Rate Conversion Sample Rate Conversion SRC allows the sample rate of audio from the audio crosspoint to be converted to a different sample rate and output from the 4929 module The following figures show the SRC section of the Workbench audio output processing screens for both AES and MADI Dest Audio Processing AES Ch1 Ch2 Ch3 Ch4 Ch5 Ch6 Ch7 Ch8 Ch10 Ch11 Ch12 Ch13 Ch14 Ch15 Ch 16 0 sd 5 8 9 12 13 16 17 20 21 24 25 28 29 L R L R L R L R R 1 R L R r R est Dest 1 PRESET iim anion mim La lic lea a Ge Ge Gs Ge e n Gum v y 9 ye J 6 IC LJ 9 6 Il n n n aw DENG 3 Gs Ge Ge Ga Ga Gay Ge Ga is irm Eam Ge Ga Ga Ga Ga D D E L Y s R c J uve mc 7 ne sa 7 no BRE ve BRE J vee snc Fig 104 Example Workbench AES Audio Processing Screen Showing SRC Settings
351. t be supplied from a power system providing a PROTECTIVE EARTH connection and having a neutral connection which can be reliably identified The power circuit breakers or switches supplying power to the unit should be close to the unit and easily accessible Lithium Batteries The Sirius 800 door PC and router control module s each contain a Lithium battery to provide non volatile memory Used batteries should be disposed of in accordance with the manufacturers instruction and any specific local legislation regarding the recycling of waste batteries and accumulators Ensure that the same make and model of battery is used if replacement is required a manufacturer recommended equivalent can be used if the original type is not available Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 15 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Warnings and Precautions 2 4 Fiber Output Modules Warning 2 5 2 6 A A LASER SAFETY The average optical output power does not exceed 0 dBm 1mW under normal operating conditions Unused optical outputs should be covered to prevent direct exposure to the laser beam Even though the power of these lasers is low the beam should be treated with caution and common sense because it is intense and concentrated Laser radiation can cause irreversible and permanent damage of eyesight Please read the following guidelines carefully Make sure that a fiber is connected to the board s fiber outputs before pow
352. t on tarkoitettu ainoastaan alan ammattilaisille Al suorita laitteelle muita toimenpiteit kuin mit k ytt ohjeissa on neuvottu ellet ole asiantuntija Voit saada s hk iskun J t kaikki huoltotoimet ammattilaiselle S hk iskujen v ltt miseksi suojaa laite sateelta ja kosteudelta Varmistu ett laite on asianmukaisesti maadoitettu ja ett s hk kytkenn t on tehty oikein Laitteelle tehoa sy tt v ss j rjestelm ss tulee olla SUOJAMAALIITANTA 2 ja nollaliit nn n on oltava luotettavasti tunnistettavissa S hk pistorasian tulee olla laitteen l hell ja helposti tavoitettavissa Eme nynon roov ZupBoAwv Ac qaAciac Aut ro c pBoAo Trapatr ptrel ro xprjarn oe ompavrik c TrAnpogop ec Trou quymepiiaiB vovrar duvoSeuriK eyyeip bio T TO g uBoAo urro eikv er t aro EGUWITE PIK ugiotay Tar eTrikivouves n ektpik r gelc Zo orepik Gey umr pyouv emoxeudon pa p pn Aum n povdda mp ma va emoreudZerai p vo eibi amp EKTTANSEU N VO THOT WTTIKG Npoeidotroinon Ao gareiag O 8ny ec etiokeuric rrou mrap yovrai avaqg povra arrokAeigmik Kai p voi eibiKeup vo TPOTWTIK Tix va persi o Kiviuvog nAektporrAngiac pnw zhee emicKeu g map p vo mc guynmrepi auBav pevec OTO eyyeip io rov yid kr c Kal av yere Ta aTrapaitnra mrpog vra yir va To k vere Aeg oF IOKEUES va ekreAo vrat AT EI IK ekmraibeup vo TPOCWIK gt Fia va permo
353. t tilg ngelig Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 13 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Warnings and Precautions Forklaring av Sakerhetssymboler Denna symbol h nvisar anvandaren till viktig information som terfinns i litteraturen som medf ljer Se manualen VN Denna symbol indikerar att livsfarlig spanning finns pa insidan Det finns inga servicevanliga delar inne i apparaten Denna apparat fa endast repareras av utbildad personal Sakerhetsvarningar Serviceinstruktioner som anges avser endast kvalificerad och utbildad servicepersonal F r att minska risken f r elektrisk st t utf r ingen annan service n den som terfinns i medf ljande driftinstruktionerna om du ej ar behGrig Overlat all service till kvalificerad personal F r att reducera risken f r elektrisk st t uts tt inte apparaten f r regn eller fukt Se alltid till att apparaten r ordentligt jordad samt att str mtillf rseln r korrekt utf rd Denna apparat m ste bli f rs rjd fr n ett str msystem som r f rsedd med jordadanslutning samt ha en neutral anslutning som l tt identifierbar Vagguttaget som str mf rs rjer apparaten b r finnas i n rheten samt vara latttillganglig S mbolos de Seguranca O s mbolo triangular adverte para a necessidade de consultar o manual antes de utilizar o equipamento ou efectuar qualquer ajuste A Este s mbolo indica a presenca de voltagens perigosas no interior d
354. t8 01 1897 OIPNY 99 01 Lyg O9plA 089 01 169 Olpny Ove O 7 LZ O PIA cL69 01 Gp L9 OIPNY 91 01 64 OSPIA VV L9 01 LES OIPNY 61 0 69 OSPIA 9 ES 01 6097 OIPNY 894 01 Gy O PIA 809p 01 Lp8 OIPNY ppt O LZL O9pIA Ov8 01 ELOE otpny OZ 01 Z6 O9plA ZLOE 01 S0 z O pny 96 01 O9plA 7082 01 LESI OIPNY ZZ 01 6p COPIA 9EGI 01 697 OIPNY 84 0 GZ O9pIA 892 O OIPNY 72 0 O9pIA Sirius 840 850 Input Module Location Front View Fig 61 Output Module Locations 8 3 6 Sirius 840 850 Before adding modules to a Sirius 840 850 router check that the power supplies fitted can supply sufficient power to the router The router power requirements are described in Appendix B 1 2 Sirius 840 and Appendix B 1 3 Sirius 850 Important Fig 61 shows the Output Module locations as they are situated in the Sirius 840 850 frame ZEB 01 G99 OIPNY 9 6 0 EGG O9plA 79921 0 L689 OIPNY ZGS 01 62G O9plA 96891 01 62191 oipny 8ZG 01 GOS O9pIA 8219 01 L9SGL oipny YOG O L87 O PIA 09EGL 01 E6S71 OIPNY Ogr 0 LSY O PIA c6Sr L 0 GSZ8E L Olpny 96 0 EEp O9plA 7281 01 LOGE OIPNY zer 01 60y O PIA 90S L 01 68ZZ L OIPNY 80r 0 98E O PIA 88221 01 LZSLL OIPNY 78 0 19 O PIA OZS LL 01 920 L OIPNY 09
355. ta running asynchronous outputs Transparent to Input Channel Status and User data Parity re calculated on outputs AES Outputs Electrical Interface 1353 1356 and 1298 Rear Panel Number and Type 120 AES pairs per card Balanced AES 1353 and 1298 Unbalanced AES 1356 Connector 5 x 62 way high density D type Sockets Output Amplitude 22V pk pk into 110 Q Output Impedance 110 Q 10 Output Rise amp Fall lt 30 ns Time MADI Outputs Functional Signal Standard AES10 2003 56 or 64 channels 48 kHz sample rate 4929 see section 11 1 2 for configuration 4925 see appendix B 3 1 2 for configuration Sample Rate 48 kHz nominal Synchronous to the selected reference AES or video reference 1 to 4 can be selected AES reference selected by default Lock to MADI channel 0 if no reference is present Audio Format 20 bit or 24 bit transparent Table 105 4929 and 4925 AES MADI Output Modules Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 328 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Specifications 4929 and 4925 AES MADI Output Module Transparency Default channel status and User data applied to all re synchronised outputs Default Channel Status bits set to Consumer Use of Channel Status bit 0 Professional 1 Linear PCM Identification bit 1 PCM Data Carried 0 or Non PCM data carried e g Dolby data 1 Sampling Frequency bits 6 amp 7 48kHz 0 amp 1 44 1 kHz 1
356. tact details Ethernet For Future Use Off normal state Table 55 5933 Sirius 840 850 Output Monitoring Module LEDs 5933 Fig 153 5933 Sirius 840 850 Output Monitoring Module LEDs Power OK Command OK Command Error For Future Use Mon1 Mon2 Monitor LED s replicate the four monitor Catsii LED s see section 13 8 2 Mon3 Mon4 Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 228 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Multiviewer and Input Output Monitoring Modules 13 9 1237 Sirius 830 Monitoring Rear Panel The 1237 Sirius 830 monitoring rear panel is compatible with the 5939 input output monitoring module The 1237 monitoring rear panel is a purchasable option and is shown in Fig 154 Ethernet Video Monitor Not Used 4 3 2 1 o 0 0 0 0 4 3 2 1 Audio Monitor Fig 154 1237 Sirius 830 Monitoring Rear Panel The output of audio monitors 1 to 4 is a copy of the output of video monitors 1 to 4 The BNC video outputs are optimized for video signals impedance and data rates and the DIN 1 0 2 3 audio monitor outputs are optimized for audio outputs impedance and data rates Audio Monitor outputs 1 to 4 output AES audio signals on DIN 1 0 2 3 connectors The four monitor output signals are generated by the Input Output Monitoring module Each monitor output port must be configured to match the type of signal it will be monitoring when the router is in use
357. te COM Error not 2453 2455 2457 Local COM OK Active OK Power OK Local Com Error Fig 166 Control Fan Interface Module LEDs Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 270 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Control and Alarm Rear Panel Connections 16 Control and Alarm Rear Panel Connections 16 1 Sirius 830 Control Connections The Sirius 830 control rear panel located in the middle of the frame contains all the control connectors for the router Fuses Door Ethernet Fig 167 Sirius 830 Control Panel PSUA ff PSU B Status i Status O Alarms i Tiene 2 Com 4 RS485 Ports 3 Com 5 Door 4 Com 6 Spare 1 Video 3 Reference 4 Controller A Ethernet Controller B Connectors Balanced LTC AES Unbalanced Reference Connector PSUA Status and PSU B Status Function 25 Way D Type socket PSU Alarm Inputs collect alarm signals from the PSUs using the supplied cable s ALARMS 25 Way D Type socket Alarm Outputs Alarm outputs switch in the event of the following failures Fan Controller PSU For details on the output that switches for each failure see section 16 4 3 Ethernet A B RJ45 x2 Ethernet for Nucleus controller A and B If two Nucleus controllers are fitted both the Ethernet A and Ethernet B ports must be connected to the network Video Reference BNC x 8 Video refer
358. th New Systems B 2 2 2 Gain Control and Phase Invert Gain Gain is applied to an audio input channel as Silence mute or in steps of 0 1dB in a range of 72 dB to 30 dB Phase Invert Phase invert will invert the audio waveform B 2 2 3 16 Channel Mixer There are 16 Mixers available per video input channel and each mixer can mix up to 16 channels of audio Each 16 channel mixer is used to mix two or more audio input channels together to create a single mono signal that is output from the mixer For example using Mixer 6 to mix the stereo pair of channels 1 and 2 would result in a single mono signal being output from Mixer 6 B 2 2 4 Channel Swap Shuffle The channel shuffler is used to change the channel order of one or more of the audio channels B 2 2 5 5915 Connections to the Audio Crosspoints The 5915 video input module creates two identical multiplexed audio transport streams each of which contains all of the audio channels on the input module up to 768 mono channels One transport stream is sent to the main audio crosspoint module and a duplicate transport stream is sent to the redundant audio crosspoint module Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 288 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Modules No Longer Supplied With New Systems B 2 2 6 5915 Input Module LED Information Table 87 shows the LED color code on the 5915 Input Module and Fig 180 shows the front edge of the input module
359. that illuminates each connector See section 6 for details of the Catsii functionality When ordering the router the rear panels can be specified with or without fiber SFP receiver modules When the rear panels are ordered as spares they are supplied without Fiber SFP receiver modules and these must be ordered separately The Snell order code is shown below Fiber SFP Receiver Module Order Code SRR 3 Fiber SFP 2 channel 1260 1620nm receiver 3G HD SD MADI Capable Max 12 per rear panel Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 110 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Input Rear Panels and Input Modules 9 5 Sirius 840 850 1285 Video MADI BNC Input Rear Panel The 1285 video MADI BNC input rear panel has 24 BNC inputs The 1285 rear panel is used in the Sirius 840 850 with either the 4915 audio input module 12 Ch MADI or the 5913 video input module 24 channel video with re clocking h asi i ey ES l4 lt a i 4 t f f f ie fi d Not Used MADI 4915 module MADI Input 1a MADI Input 2a MADI Input 1b MADI Input 2b MADI Input 11a MADI Input 12a MADI Input 11b MADI Input 12b Video 5913 Module Video Input 1 Video input 2 Video Input 3 Video Input 4 Video Input 21 Video Input 22 Video Input 23 Video Input 24 MADI channel a Main input MADI channel b Redundant input See section 9 12 1 for details Fig 73 1285 Input BNC Rear Panel
360. the Motherboard LEDs Fig 146 5931 Sirius 800 Multiviewer Output Module The multiviewer output of the 5931 module is connected to one of two possible rear panels for details see Table 50 One 5931 multiviewer output module is required for each rear panel fitted Rear Panel Connectors Sirius 830 840 Up to 3 rear panels with 48 Coax DIN 1 0 2 3 connectors per 1309 Rear Panel rear panel up to 140 multiviewer outputs Sirius 850 Up to 2 rear panels with 48 Coax DIN 1 0 2 3 connectors per 1291 Rear Panel rear panel up to 96 multiviewer outputs Table 50 5931 Multiviewer Output Module Possible Rear Panel Arrangements Note Sirius 830 Output Monitoring is not available on the Sirius 830 when it is equipped with multiviewer outputs Sirius 840 850 If Input pre processing is monitored using the monitor outputs then multiviewer outputs should not be routed from inputs 1 3 5 and 7 of any video input module as they will display duplicates of the four monitoring outputs Issue 5 Rev2 Page 221 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Multiviewer and Input Output Monitoring Modules 13 6 1 5931 Sirius 800 Multiviewer Output Module LED Information Table 51 shows the LED color code on the 5931 multiviewer output module and Fig 147 shows the front edge of the module LED Color Function Power OK Detail Power to the module Normal Working Status On Solid
361. the Video or Audio button to set the signal type to be routed to the output monitor see the note on page 77 Touch the DST SRC button to toggle between the Destination and Source text boxes as required highlighted with a Red box around the selected text box Enter the signal channel number in the selected text box Destination or Source by touching keypad numbers and then touch the Take button to route the signal to the selected monitor output If you make a mistake touch the Clear button and then enter the channel number correctly Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 77 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Door PC Note Note 7 If the signal to be monitored is an Input signal touch the appropriate button from the Input Position box e Real Input button selects the actual input received by the router before any processing is applied to the signal e Post audio processing button Video AHP modules only selects the input signal after audio processing has been applied to the signal The Post audio processing button is present for all input modules but is only used for video AHP modules The button setting is ignored for all other input modules 8 Ifthe signal to be monitored is an Output signal touch the appropriate button from the Output Position box Pre audio processing button Video AHP modules only selects the output signal before audio processing has been applied to the sign
362. the other audio crosspoint module if it is fitted Important Due to the nature of multiplexed audio transport streams there is an extremely small delay between groups of channels as the transport stream is constructed If the audio is locked to the input these delays will need to be considered e fthe audio is locked to an external reference these delays are managed by the router and the audio will remain co timed 11 3 3 5949 Output Module LED Information Table 41 shows the LED color code on the 5949 Output Module and Fig 114 shows the front edge of the output module Normal Working Status Each Pair of FPGA LEDS Flashing rapidly between Red amp Green 2 Hz each LED starting up Green On Solid amp Red Off normal state working correctly Green Off amp Red On Solid FPGA programming fault found Remove module and refit to force a reboot Red amp Green Flashing very rapidly in sync 4 Hz each LED A change has been made to the module settings database in RAM but it has not yet been written to flash memory This is not a fault and the flash memory will be updated after 10 seconds of no audio setting changes being made Do not remove power from the module while this indication is present as the flash may become corrupted Other indications are displayed when performing a firmware upgrade see the Sirius 800 Maintenance amp Upgrade manual for details LED Color Labe
363. the router Close and secure the fan door and router door Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 158 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Crosspoint Modules 10 6 Enabling Disabling Video Audio Redundancy 10 6 1 Video Redundancy The video redundant crosspoint algorithm is enabled or disabled by using the Generic Configuration Editor See the Workbench manual for information on using the Generic Configuration editor Nucleus2 2463 Controller Navigate to Devices Devices 1 LocalRouterDevice LocalRouterControl RouterSpecificControl Sirius800Control RedundantXpntControl Enable True Nucleus 2450 Controller Navigate to Control12450 CommonControl RouterSpecificControl Sirius800Control RedundantXpntControl Enable True Select the required action from the drop down menu e Redundant crosspoint algorithm enabled True e Redundant crosspoint algorithm disabled False Note Sirius 850 single frame Enabling video redundancy will enable redundancy for the main and expansion crosspoint modules in the router if fitted Sirius 850 dual frame systems Enabling video redundancy in frame one will enable redundancy for the main crosspoint modules mounted in frame one and the expansion crosspoint modules mounted in frame two The reverse is true for frame two In a dual frame system if redundancy is enabled in one frame it must also be enabled in the other frame Important e If video redund
364. the routes pass through the main routing crosspoint module The redundant signal path algorithm checks the signal paths on the main crosspoint module in turn by configuring the redundant crosspoint module to mimic the main crosspoint module The algorithm compares the signal standard of each signal path through the main crosspoint module with the signal standard of the equivalent path through the redundant module The algorithm also compares the signal lock status of each signal as it enters and leaves the main crosspoint module A difference between the incoming and outgoing signal lock status indicates a route failure Each signal path is compared in turn until all of the paths on the main module have been checked Once all of the signal paths have been checked the algorithm repeats the checking process If the algorithm finds a difference in the signal standard of a path passed by the main and redundant crosspoint modules or if a signal lock status check fails for a route the failure is flagged and the control system can if configured move the route to the redundant crosspoint module If more routes fail then they can also be moved to the redundant crosspoint module The algorithm will continue to check the crosspoint module for further failures At this point the crosspoint matrix is still capable of setting all 288 routes but redundancy protection has been lost This failure must be addressed immediately to regain redundancy for the crosspoi
365. ther video only or AHP depending on the input output modules fitted If one or more LiveRunner clients are to be installed on computers other than the Door PC the database shipped on the Door PC must be moved to a separate Workbench server or client server This does not apply to Workbench clients used for configuration or to RollCall clients connected to the controller s Although Workbench configuration can be carried out using the Door PC if a USB mouse and keyboard are connected this is not recommend as the screen resolution on the door screen is relatively low A Workbench installation DVD is supplied with the router and this can be used to install a Workbench client on a separate computer which can then be used to configure the router Initial Connection and Configuration Steps The following outlines the basic steps required for a new router to be connected to Workbench This process is described in more detail in the Sirius Installation and Quick Start manual 1 Connect the router controller module s Door PC and Workbench computer to a network 2 Install Workbench 3 Associate Workbench with a database using one of the following methods a Create a new Workbench database b Associate Workbench with an existing Workbench database c Move the Workbench database from the Door PC to a Workbench server or client server 4 Add the router control module s to Workbench only required if the Workbench database doesn t already
366. to it Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 258 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Nucleus Router Control Modules 14 4 7 Nucleus 2450 Setting the Network Communication Speed The Nucleus 2450 network communication speed is set in the controller Network ini file The Nucleus 2450 controller network speed must be set to 10 Mbps see section 14 4 4 for details 14 4 8 Nucleus 2450 Enabling RollCall RollCall is enabled by default To use RollCall with the router the RollCall template files must be loaded on the controller and RollCall must be enabled in the controller Network ini file In the RolICall section of the ini file change Enabled 0 to Enabled 1 For details on editing the Network ini files see section 14 4 5 14 4 9 Nucleus 2450 Setting Parity for SW P 02 amp SW P 08 Protocols Note The default parity settings for the SW P 02 and SW P 08 protocol are correct when used with Snell products and need not be changed e Some third party products use a parity that is different from the default parity In this case the parity used by the Snell router controller can be changed to match the third party product Parity can be changed for communication ports configured with SW P 02 or SW P 08 protocols Nucleus 2450 only Parity is set using the Workbench Generic Editor and can be Default None Even or Odd Note Fora dual controller router systems select the inactive controller and set that one first e
367. troller is operating correctly If only one of the crosspoint modules indicates the error contact Snell Customer Support see section 1 2 for contact details Switch Flashes on a take signal when switching a route Off normal state Flashes each time a route is set Fugue Status 5905 only CPU status The LED is approximately 25 mm 1 Inch from the edge of the board Table 30 Video Crosspoint Module LED Information Flashing Green Green Blue normal operation the CPU is programmed and running Brief Flash Red at startup normal Flashing Red CPU error Remove module and refit to force a reboot Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 147 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Crosspoint Modules LED Color Label Detail Status Xpt Alarm 5905 only Xpt Error 5901 only Displays if there is a problem with any crosspoints Off normal state On solid problem with one or more crosspoints on the module Flashing Crosspoint module overheating make sure the fan assemblies are all closed and the fans are all operating correctly Active Route is active on crosspoint Flashing when this module is routing one or more signals to live outputs Removing the crosspoint module will disturb the signal s passing through the crosspoint module Route Fail Illuminated if a route failure has been detected on this crosspoint
368. ts Monitoring Monitoring Outputs Outputs F g 164 Sirius 850 Dual Router Diagram Frame 1 of 2 Main video inputs and outputs are 1 to 576 Frame 2 of 2 Main video inputs and outputs are 577 1152 e Outputs 16370 Monitor row 1 e Outputs 16371 Monitor row 2 e Outputs 16372 Monitor row 3 e Outputs 16373 Monitor row 4 Frame 1 of 2 Mon Row Sources 0 575 outputs 0 575 Mon Row Sources 576 1151 inputs 0 575 Frame 2 of 2 Mon Row Sources 0 575 outputs 0 575 Mon Row Sources 576 1151 inputs 0 575 Frame 1 of 2 Outputs 1153 1292 are multiviewer outputs Frame 2 of 2 Outputs 1293 1432 are multiviewer outputs Note All numbers with an Asterisk against them are Base 0 Issue 5 Rev2 Page 264 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Control Fan Interface Module 15 Control Fan Interface Module Two Control fan interface modules are fitted in each router The control fan interface modules performs the following functions Fanning out of the control busses Dual redundant fan out of control busses Driving all the fans Dual redundant fan power Collecting alarm signals from power supply shelves and fans Generating relay alarm outputs In addition to the above functions the module has the following secondary functions Providing power to the LED s in the door Providing power and control to the Catsii LED s on the
369. tted in their place Fig 56 shows a mix of fiber and BNC input and output rear panel connectors on the rear of a Sirius 830 router Note M Fiber The columns count down from top to bottom then back to top again and from right to left The video and embedded audio channel numbers for input and output rear panel slots 1 and 12 are shown in Fig 56 The channel numbers for all of the rear panel connectors are listed in Table 15 If MADI rear panels are fitted each input or output contains up to 64 mono audio channels Each fiber input and output rear panel has 12 SFP cages with two inputs or outputs per fiber SFP module The main redundant MADI streams alternate between the fiber SFP modules meaning that if one SFP module fails either the main or redundant MADI stream will still be available See sections 9 4 and 9 12 1 inputs or sections 11 1 1 and 11 7 outputs for details Video Audio Video 288 Audio 9216 The channel numbers for all of the rear panel connectors are listed in Table 15 Fig 56 Example Mixed BNC Fiber Input Output Rear Panel Connectors 265 Video 1 8449 Audio 1 Input Slot 11 Input Slot 10 Input Slot 9 Input Slot 8 Input Slot 7 Input Slot 6 Input Slot 5 Input Slot 4 Input Slot 3 Input Slot 2 Input Slot 1 17 Input Slot 12 x EY
370. ultiviewer output module and Fig 196 shows the module LED Color Function Detail Normal Working Status Power OK Power to the module On Solid working correctly Command Command from the Nucleus Module Flashing receiving OK information and working correctly Command Error messages from Nucleus control Off normal state if it is Error module flashing then it is receiving error messages Table 96 5932 Sirius 850 Multiviewer Output Module LED Information Power OK Command OK Command Error 5932 Fig 196 5932 Sirius 850 Multiviewer Output Module LEDs Issue 5 Rev2 Page 315 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Modules No Longer Supplied With New Systems B 5 2 Sirius 850 1292 MV Link Rear Panel Note The 1292 MV Link rear panel is no longer supplied and is shown here for users that already have them fitted If two 1292 rear panels are used then the second rear panel is fitted in the top multiviewer slot and numbered as follows 137 140 129 136 121 128 113 120 105 112 97 104 89 96 81 88 73 80 MV18 MV10 If one 1292 rear panel is used it is fitted in the bottom multiviewer slot and numbered as follows 66 72 57 64 49 56 41 48 33 40 25 32 17 24 9 16 1 8 MV9 Fig 197 1292 MV Link Rear Panel Note Fig 197 shows that Multiviewer port 18 has only has four outputs the other four outputs are n
371. umber of input syncs in use on the audio crosspoint module Displays the total number of input streams without faults on the audio crosspoint module Displays the total number of input stream faults for the audio crosspoint module 0 No failed input streams good Displays the total number of output streams without faults on the audio crosspoint module Displays the total number of output stream faults for the audio crosspoint module 0 No failed output streams good Displays the total number of output streams in use on the audio crosspoint module Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 70 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Door PC Screen Item Description Crosspoint Status XpntCardNone Yellow Main and redundant crosspoint modules working correctly Grey A fault has occurred or a crosspoint has been by passed XpntCardRedundant Touch the button to bypass the redundant crosspoint card button Grey Redundant crosspoint card is working correctly Yellow Redundant crosspoint card has failed or been bypassed XpntCardMain button Touch the button to bypass the main crosspoint card Grey Main crosspoint card is working correctly Yellow Main crosspoint card has failed or been bypassed Presence Green Crosspoint module present Red Crosspoint module not present Power Green Crosspoint module is powered Red Crosspoint module is not powered More button Displays the Modules screen see the S800 User
372. und Remove module and refit to force a reboot 2 FPGA 2 status Red amp Green Flashing very rapidly in sync 4 Hz each LED A change has been made to the module settings database in RAM but it has not yet been written to flash memory This is not a fault and the flash memory will be updated after 3 FPGA 3 status 10 seconds of no audio setting changes being made Do not remove power from the module while this indication is present as the flash may become corrupted Other indications are displayed when 4 EPGA 4 status performing a firmware upgrade see the Sirius 800 Maintenance amp Upgrade manual for details Power OK Power to the module On Solid working correctly Receiving messages Flashing receiving information and Local from local Nucleus working correctly Command control module the OK Nucleus controller in this frame Error with messages Off normal state from local Nucleus Flashing the command message from control module the the router controller is corrupt or hasn t Nucleus controller in been received this frame mE This communications error could be caused by a hardware failure or incorrect Local Error insertion Check that the module is inserted correctly If the Local Error LED is flashing at the same time as the Local Command OK LED is flashing it suggests a mismatch in the configuration of the Nucleus controller Check the controller configuration Table 29 5919 Input Module LED Information Issue 5 Rev2
373. up com Sirius 850 Video Expansion Local Command OK Remote Command OK Remote Error Power OK Local Error 5938 Fig 128 5938 Sirius 850 Standard Video Output Module Expandable LEDs 12 4 5928 Sirius 850 Standard Video Expansion Output Module The 5928 Video Expansion Output Module has 24 video output channels and can handle SD ASI and HD signals up to 3Gb s Connectors to the 1290 or 1293 rear panel Connectors to the Motherboard Fig 129 5928 Sirius 850 Standard Video Expansion Output Module When the 5928 video expansion output modules are mounted in a Sirius 850 router they receive video signals from up to five expansion crosspoint modules The expansion output signals are used in one of two ways depending on the expansion rear panel type that is fitted e 1290 rear panel is used to pass the expansion video signals to a second Sirius 850 router see section 12 5 e 1293 rear panel has 24 x DIN 1 0 2 3 coax outputs giving the router up to 576 further outputs destinations 577 to 1152 see section 12 6 Note It is not possible to mix the 1290 and 1293 Output Rear Panels in a frame Issue 5 Rev2 Page 206 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Sirius 850 Video Expansion 12 4 1 5928 Sirius 850 Standard Video Expansion Output Module LEDs Table 47 shows the LED color code on the 5928 Sirius 850 standard video expansion output module and Fig 13
374. us 830 Module Locations 90 8 2 2 Sirius 830 Rear Panel Locations 91 8 2 3 Sirius 830 Input and Output Module Locations 44 92 8 2 4 Sirius 830 Rear Input Output Connector Configuration 93 8 2 4 1 Input Output and Expansion Connections by Slot 94 8 3 Sirius 840 850 iiec Eee ER EAR RA AUR EUR rA t 95 8 3 1 Sirius 840 Module Locations 95 8 3 2 Sirius 840 Rear Panel Locations 96 8 3 3 Sirius 850 Module Locations 97 8 3 4 Sirius 850 Rear Panel Locations 98 8 3 5 Sirius 840 850 Input Module Locations 99 8 3 6 Sirius 840 850 Output Module Locations 99 8 3 7 Sirius 840 850 Rear Input Output Connector Configuration 100 9 9 7 1 INPUTS sos Rania Pewee EN p a ores adhe Cakes Eada kane ia 100 83 7 2 OUITDUIS 2 42 ona o iens er ve ER PERIERE i ee eo E Koren eon 101 8 3 7 3 Input Output and Expansion Connections by Slot 102 8 3 8 Sirius 850 Rear Expansion Output Connectors 103 8 3 8 1 1290 Expansion Output Rear Panel Configuration 103 8 3 8 2 1293 Expansion Output Rear Panel Configuration 104 8 4 Inserting and Removing Vertical Modules 104 8 5 Inserting and Removing Horizontal Modules 106 9 Input Rear Panels and Input Modules 107 9 1 Sirius 830 1234 amp 1235 Video BNC Input Rear Panel 107 9 2 Sirius 830 1236 Video Fiber I
375. us Installation and Quick Start manual for details on how to link Workbench to a database For details on using the configuration software see the Workbench user manual Fig 5 and Fig 6 show two typical installation scenarios e Both installation scenarios include an optional RollCall PC that can be used to control the router Changes made by RollCall are reflected in Workbench and vice versa e The RollCall PC cannot be used to configure the router and this must be carried out using Workbench e Both scenarios show a single Sirius 800 series router for clarity however systems may well contain multiple routers control panels and other devices See the Workbench User Manual for details on device support Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 25 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Product Overview Fig 5 shows an example of a distributed installation where the database and SQL server are installed on the server PC Client PCs are loaded with individual components that connect through the network to the database The Workbench and or RollCall PC can be used for router control Client PC running RollCall for router server PO 1 control optional Management Studio Router Client PC running Client PC running Router control Workbench for Microsoft SQL module s and Door router control and Management Studio screen running configuration for database LiveRunner administration Fig 5 Example Standalone Dat
376. ut Rear Panel The 1305 video fiber input rear panel has 12 fiber SFP cages with two inputs per fiber SFP module The 1305 rear panel is used in the Sirius 840 850 with the 5919 5915 video input module 24 channel video with de embedder re clocking and AHP and the 5917 video input module 24 channel with re clocking Not Used Y Video Input 1 Video Input 2 Video Input 23 Video Input 24 Fig 76 1305 Fiber Input Rear Panel Sirius 840 850 only All the Fiber connectors on the 1305 rear panel have Snell s unique Catsii feature that illuminates each connector See section 6 for details of the Catsii functionality When ordering the router the rear panels can be specified with or without fiber SFP receiver modules When the rear panels are ordered as spares they are supplied without Fiber SFP receiver modules and these must be ordered separately The Snell order code is shown below Fiber SFP Receiver Module Order Code SRR 3 Fiber SFP 2 channel 1260 1620nm receiver 3G HD SD MADI Capable Max 12 per rear panel Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 114 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Input Rear Panels and Input Modules 9 9 Balanced AES Input Rear Panels with MADI Inputs 9 9 1 Sirius 830 1354 Balanced AES Input Rear Panel with MADI Inputs The 1354 balanced AES input rear panel has 5 x 62 way female high density sockets for balanced AES audio inputs and HD BNC connectors
377. vent of input signal loss the last good frame is Input Loss behavior output Black Screen in the event of input signal loss a black screen is output Table 39 Frame Sync Configuration Video Delay Delay is applied to a video output channel in frames lines pixels or in milliseconds Video delay is set in steps of 0 00001 ms up to a maximum of 14 frames for progressive video standards or 14 fields for interlaced video standards To enable video delay for a particular video standard Lock to Input must be selected in either the delay tab or the frame sync tab of the same standard Each video standard has a tab for frame sync configuration and a tab for delay configuration The signal standard is auto detected and the channel uses the settings defined in the appropriate Frame sync or Delay tab for that standard Summary Frame Sync Enabled Audio Selection Sync Function ha Gretta teme GMO S PrePon voso procesen 1080i Delay 1080i50 1080159 1080i60 um Frame Offset m Frame Offset m Frame Offset E E Line Offset Line Offset Line Offset D o e 0 j e Pixel Offset Pixel Offset Pixel Offset o 0 o 9 _ _ 0 Detay ms Detay ms Delay ms 40 mam 33 366656 23 323333 Input loss nput loss Input loss behaviour benaviour behaviour Fig 113 Example Workbench 1080i Delay Settings Screen The example in Fig 113 shows 10
378. wer Coax Rear Panel The 1309 Sirius 830 840 multiviewer coax rear panel has 48 DIN 1 0 2 3 connectors The 1309 rear panel is compatible with the 5931 multiviewer output module see section 13 6 One 5931 is module required to drive each of the 1309 48 channel rear panels Up to three 1309 rear panels can be fitted to the Sirius 830 or Sirius 840 router frames If three 1309 rear panels are used then the third rear panel is fitted in the top multiviewer slot and numbered as follows 139 Not Used 140 If two 1309 rear panels are used then the second rear panel is 95 fitted in the middle multiviewer slot and numbered as follows 49 50 If one 1309 rear panel is used it is fitted in the bottom multiviewer 47 slot and numbered as follows 8 Fig 155 1309 Sirius 830 840 Multiviewer Coax Rear Panel Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 230 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Multiviewer and Input Output Monitoring Modules 13 11 Note 1291 Sirius 850 Multiviewer Coax Rear Panel The 1291 Sirius 850 multiviewer coax rear panel has 48 DIN 1 0 2 3 connectors The 1291 rear panel is compatible with the 5931 multiviewer output module see section 13 6 One 5931 is module required to drive each of the 1291 48 channel rear panels Up to two 1291 rear panels can be fitted to the Sirius 850 router frame e A Earlier Sirius 850 routers used the 5932 multiviewer output module see appendix B
379. witch to showing signal format Menu sneli Enter sequence and press Take to activate LED Identification Press Clear to erase current sequence entry Fig 38 Catsii Control Dial Up Screen Global Catsii On Off e On button enables Catsii signal status on the rear of the router The Catsii colors used on your system can be viewed by touching the Catsii Colours button on the Catsii Control screen This displays the Catsii configuration screen shown in Fig 40 e Off button disables Catsii signal status display Catsii Colours button Touch the Catsii Colours button on the Catsii Control screen to display the Catsii configuration screen see Fig 40 Input Output location The Catsii LEDs can be used to locate a specific router input or output connector When Catsii is used in this way the Catsii LEDs are lit in the form of a cross hair with the specified input or output connector is at the centre of that cross hair see Fig 39 Fig 39 Example of Catsii LEDs being used to locate a specific BNC connector Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 73 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Door PC Note Connector Location Example Locating video input channel 35 1 If there is already a number entered in the left Dial Up keypad touch the Clear button on left Dial Up keypad to delete it 2 Touch button 3 and then button 5 on the left Dial Up keypad so 35 is displayed 3 Touch the Tak
380. work protocols that makes it easy to integrate into existing network infrastructures Snell and third party protocols are also used when interconnecting different equipment types If required device drivers can use an embedded controller with dual redundant power and run a real time operating system This combination offers the ultimate in resilient design Router System Configuration The router system is configured using Workbench software running on a computer with a network connection to the router Workbench is also used to create PC based Softpanels for router control Router configuration details are stored in the Workbench SQL database Once configuration is complete the configuration is pushed to the router controllers allowing them to work without a database connection The Workbench database can be created from scratch custom built by Snell chargeable or it can be based on one of the sample default databases supplied with Workbench Workbench comes with two default databases for each Sirius 800 router type 830 840 and 850 one for video only routing and one for AHP routing Additionally the Sirius 850 has default video only and AHP databases for single and both dual frame configurations frame 1 of 2 and frame 2 of 2 Microsoft SQL Management Studio is used for database administration functions including database backup and restore Database redundancy is available when setup using standard MS SQL configuration See the Siri
381. x 1309 The before or after processing Monitor Input Module 5930 only required if the option is only available for Multiviewer Crosspoint Module 5902 is not fitted processing modules Fig 12 Sirius 840 Signal Flow Diagram Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 37 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Product Overview 3 7 3 Rear Connectors Fig 13 shows a fully populated Sirius 840 frame with BNC Inputs and Outputs See section 8 3 for rear panel input output connector configuration details Cables connected to the router must be fitted with adequate vertical and horizontal strain relief to avoid twisting of the rear panels causing damage to the router connectors and loss of electrical signal connection to the router Multiviewer Outputs 27R see section 13 10 dro oc fool pool co co N uh E id a Connectors 22RU _ e 7 HIEIDDIIIII Not Used Alarm Rear Panel see section 16 3 Inputs Video 289 to 576 Inputs Video 1 to 288 Audio 9217 to 18432 Audio 1 to 9216 10RU Control Rear Panel Outputs see section 16 2 Video 289 to 576 Audio 9217 to 18432 E Outputs Video 1 to 288 Audio 1 to 9216 Fig 13 Sirius 840 frame with BNC Input Output Rear View For details of the Sirius 840 BNC and Fiber rear connectors see section 8 3 7 Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 38 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellg
382. xample SRC mode AES SRC settings required to convert a group of eight AES pairs to 44 1 kHz locked to the AES reference See Fig 104 on page 167 for setting locations SRC Rate 44 1 K SRC Reference Ref 5 must be 44 1 kHz SRC Enable Checked Use SRC Checked for each of the eight pairs Example SRC mode MADI SRC settings required to convert a MADI stream to 48 kHz locked to video reference 2 See Fig 105 on page 167 for setting locations SRC Rate 48 K SRC Reference Ref 2 SRC Enable Checked Use SRC Checked Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 168 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Output Modules and Output Rear Panels SRC straight through mode If an AES pair doesn t have sample rate conversion enabled Use SRC unchecked and doesn t have a reference selected Reference Disabled then that pair will be output at the same sample rate as the left channel of the pair In the case of a MADI stream all of the pairs will be output at the same sample rate as the first active channel of the MADI stream Note e The maximum sample rate that can be input to the SRC in straight through mode is 50 kHz e AES If channels within a pair are asynchronous to each other then sample drop or repeat is used on the right channel to match the left channel e MADI If channels from the audio crosspoint are asynchronous to each other then sample drop or repeat is used on all channels to match the first active channel i
383. y 6 1 6 1 1 Note Signal Status Catsii LED signal status is driven directly from the input and output modules and changes quickly when a Fiber or BNC cable is connected to the Sirius 800 Video Signal Catsii Colors Pulsed means 75 solid color 25 pulsed color at 1Hz Signal Condition Video Input 5913 5914 5916 5917 amp Output 5923 5924 5926 5937 5938 No valid signal Valid SD signal DVB ASI Signal Valid 1080i or 1080p 30 Hz or lower signal Valid 720p signal Valid 3G signal Table 9 Default Video Catsii Configuration Default color 1 Red Yellow Yellow pulsed off Green Green pulsed off Blue H The current default Catsii colors are shown on the Door PC see section 6 2 1 and can be changed through Workbench see section 6 3 Signal Condition Video Input 5919 5915 amp Output 5949 5925 No valid signal Valid SD signal with no embedded audio Valid SD signal with embedded audio DVB ASI Signal Valid 1080i or 1080p 30 Hz or lower signal with no embedded audio Valid 1080i or 1080p 30 Hz or lower signal with embedded audio Valid 720p signal with no embedded audio Valid 720p signal with embedded audio Valid 3G signal with no embedded audio Valid 3G signal with embedded audio Table 10 Default Video with Embedded Audio Catsii Configuration Default color l Red Yellow Yellow pulsed White Yellow pulsed off Green Green pulsed White Green pu
384. y D Type Socket 275 Issue 5 Rev 2 Page 8 2014 Snell Limited Sirius 800 www snellgroup com Contents Appendix A Router and Power Supply Shelf Dimensions 277 A 1 Sirius 830 Frame Dimensions Lil 277 A 2 Sirius 840 Frame Dimensions LL 278 A 3 Sirius 850 Frame Dimensions LL 279 A 4 Power Supply Shelf Dimensions LL 280 Appendix B Modules No Longer Supplied With New Systems 281 B 1 Input Rear Panels 0 0 0 cece teens 281 B 1 1 Sirius 830 1299 Balanced AES Input Rear Panel 281 B 1 2 Sirius 840 850 1297 Balanced AES Input Rear Panel 282 B 2 Input Modules sioaren uaa ee de E RU Reed 283 B 2 1 5913 4 Sirius 840 850 Standard Video Input Module 283 B 2 1 1 5913 5914 Input Module LED Information 284 B 2 2 5915 Sirius 800 Video AHP Input Module 286 B 2 2 1 Processing on the Input Module 287 B 2 2 2 Gain Control and Phase Invert LL 288 B 2 2 3 16 Channel Mixer LL 288 B 2 2 4 Channel Swap Shuffle 288 B 2 2 5 5915 Connections to the Audio Crosspoints 0 eee eee eee 288 B 2 2 6 5915 Input Module LED Information LL 289 B 2 3 5916 Sirius 830 Standard Video BNC Fiber Input Module 292 B 2 3 1 5916 Input Module LED Information LL 293 B 3 Output Modules 295 B 3 1 4925 Sirius 800 AES MADI Output Module no audio delay 295 B 3 1 1 Duplicate MADI Outputs LL 296 B

Sirius 800 User Manual Issue 5 Revision 2 - AV-iQ

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents